captain isaac paine elementary school mechanical...

PROJECT MANUAL

Issued For BID

May, 2017

CAPTAIN ISAAC PAINE

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

Mechanical System Renovations

160 Foster Center Road

Foster, Rhode Island 02825

AHARONIAN & ASSOCIATES, INC. - ARCHITECTS

310 George Washington Highway - Suite 100 - Smithfield, Rhode Island 02917 T 401-232-5010 F 401-232-5080

AHARONIAN & ASSOCIATES INC. - ARCHITECTS


CAPTAIN ISAAC PAINE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL


Foster, Rhode Island AA16106

TABLE OF CONTENTS TC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT TITLE # of PAGES

00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (AIA Document) 1

00 22 13 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3

00 41 00 BID FORM 4

00 43 13 BID SECURITY FORM (AIA Document) 1

00 45 10 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (AIA Document) 1

00 52 00 AGREEMENT FORM (AIA Document) 1

00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND FORM (AIA Document) 1

00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1

00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 6

00 73 16 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 2

00 73 39 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE REQUIREMENTS 1

00 73 46 WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE 1

00 91 13 ADDENDA 1

00 92 00 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 1

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP - Divisions 01 and 26

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION TITLE # of PAGES

01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6

01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS 4

01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 4

01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION 3

Aharonian & Associates, Inc. – Architects Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School – Mechanical System Renovations Foster, RI


01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 3

01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 5

01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 3

01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3

01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 11

01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 4

01 71 13 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION 2

01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING 4

01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 3

01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 13

01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 2

01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AND SUBMITTALS 5

01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 3

01 81 13 NE-CHPS SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 4

01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 32

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION TITLE # of PAGES

02 41 13 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 6

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE – NOT USED


DIVISION 4 MASONRY


04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 6

DIVISION 5 METALS – NOT USED


DIVISION 6 NOT USED


DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION


07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 5

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 4



DIVISION 8 NOT USED


DIVISION 9 FINISHES


09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 4

09 91 00 PAINTING 5

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES


10 56 00 METAL STORAGE CABINETS 5

DIVISIONS 11 thru 21 NOT USED

DIVISION 12 PLUMBING


22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING 5

22 14 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 2

22 42 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 2

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING


23 03 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 5

23 05 29 SUPPORT AND ANCHORS 5

23 05 48 VIBRATION ISOLATION & SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 7

23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 6

23 07 13 DUCTWORK INSULATIONS 3

23 07 19 PIPING INSULATION 4

23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 11

23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 22

23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 4

23 21 14 HYRONIC SPECIALTIES 4

23 21 23 HVAC PUMPS 3

23 31 00 DUCTWORK 3

23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 3

23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 2

23 72 00 PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY-RECOVERY UNITS 4

23 82 00 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 4



DIVISIONS 24 & 25 NOT USED

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL


26 00 00 ELECTRICAL 17

26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 4






INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13-1

DOCUMENT 00 21 13

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

AIA DOCUMENT A701 - Latest Edition

INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS

Document not bound herewith. The Contractor and Subcontractors may review the Document at the Office of the

Architect. The document is also available, for purchase, from the American Institute of Architects.

Failure to review this document will not relieve parties of the contractual requirements contained herein.

END OF DOCUMENT 00 21 13






SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 22 13-1

DOCUMENT 00 22 13

SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

SUPPLEMENTS

The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to AIA Document A701, 1997 Edition. Where any

Article of the Instructions to Bidders is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or

deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provision of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall

remain in effect.

ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

Delete subparagraph 2.1.3 in its entirety and substitute the following:

"2.1.3 The Bidder has inspected the site, has familiarized him/herself with the actual conditions under which

the Work is to be performed, has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the

Contract Documents and has full knowledge of the work required."

Add the following subparagraph:

"2.1.5 After award of Contract, no claim for additional compensation resulting from misunderstanding of

the Contract Documents or resulting from errors in or conflicts within the Contract Documents will be

entertained unless interpretations of the Contract Documents specifically relating to the portions thereof, which

appear to the Bidder to be in question, error or conflict, are brought to the Owner's attention during the Bidding

Period."

ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

Add subparagraph 3.2.4:

"3.2.4 No interpretation of the meaning of the Contract Documents will be made to any Bidder orally.

Neither the Owner or Architect will be responsible for any oral instructions."


"3.2.5 Failure of any Bidder to receive any such addendum shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation

under this bid as submitted."


"3.3.5 Refer to Division 1 specification sections for additional provisions of this document."

ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES


"4.2.1 Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required [ Five Percent (5%)] as

stipulated in the Advertisement For Bids. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the

terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and

Aharonian & Associates Inc – Architects

Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School – Mechanical System Renovations Foster, Rhode Island


Payment of all obligations arising thereunder. In addition, the Owner shall have any other legal remedies that it

is entitled, including but not limited to, any excess of the bid security in relation to the next lowest and qualified

bidder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds as required, the

amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty.”Delete

paragraph 4.2 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

Add paragraph 5.1.2:

"5.1.2 No award will be made on the date of Bid Opening."


5.2.1 The Owner may reject any bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with the provisions hereof and

may waive any informalities or reject any and all bids. Conditional bids will not be accepted."

Subparagraph 5.3.1 Delete the word "lowest" and insert "most" in its place in the first sentence.

Subparagraph 5.3.1 in the first sentence after the word "Bidder" insert "in the opinion of Owner."

Add subparagraph 5.3.1.1:

"5.3.1.1 The Owner does not obligate him/herself to accept the lowest or any other bid."

Add subparagraph 5.3.1.2:

"5.3.1.2 If the Base Bid exceeds the amount of funds available to finance the construction Contract, the

Owner may reject all Bids or may award the Contract to that responsible Bidder submitting the lowest Bid."

Notice of Owner's Method of Award:

1. The Owner will use several factors in determining the method of award to the "Responsive Bidder" as follows:

a. Lowest responsible Lump Sum

b. Contractor's qualifications with respect to projects of similar scope.

c. Timely completion

ARTICLE 6 – POST-BID INFORMATION

Refer to Paragraph 6.1 Contractor's attention is called to submission of a Contractor's Qualification Statement. Such

statement shall illustrate Contractor's previous experience.

Contractor's Qualification Statement shall be submitted with his/her proposal.

Delete subparagraph 6.2 in its entirety.

ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND


"7.1.1 The Bidder shall furnish a Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the

contract amount and a Labor and Material Bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract

amount as security for faithful performance of this Contract and for the payment of persons performing labor on

the project under contract.





"7.1.2 The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bid."


"7.1.3 The surety on such bonds shall be a duly authorized surety company satisfactory to the Owner and

authorized to do business in the State of Rhode Island."

Subparagraph 7.2.1 Delete the first sentence in its entirety and substitute the following:

"Simultaneously with his/her delivery of the executed contract, the Contractor shall deliver the required

bonds to the Owner."

ARTICLE 9 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS

Add the following paragraphs:

"9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF CONDITIONS"

"9.2 CONDITIONS OF WORK"

"9.2.1 Each bidder must inform him/herself of the conditions relating to the construction of the project and the

employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of his/her obligation to furnish

all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of his/her contract. Insofar as possible, the

Contractor, in carrying out his/her work, must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption

with the work of any other Contractor."

"9.3 LAWS AND REGULATIONS"

"9.3.1 The bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State Laws, municipal ordinances, and

the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the

contract throughout, and they will be deemed to be included in the contract the same as though herein written

out in full."

"9.4 LIEN RIGHTS"

"9.4.1 The project is municipal property owned by the Town of Foster, Rhode Island and is thus exempt from

liens.”

"9.5 STATE SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION"

"9.5.1 Bidders and their subcontractors and material suppliers shall not include in their Bids any Rhode

Island State Sales and Use Taxes relative to the performance of the Work that is covered by the exemption. The

Owner will furnish tax exempt numbers required.”







BID FORM 00 41 00-1

DOCUMENT 00 41 00

BID FORM

Date: ____________________________

To: Town of Foster Rhode Island

181 Howard hill Road


Attn: Business Office

Project: Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School – Mechanical System Renovations

160 Foster Center Road


Submitted By: _______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

(Include in the above spaces, the firm’s legal name, address, telephone and fax numbers, contact

and e-mail address. All information should be typed or printed)

NOTE: The Owner’s Selection Criteria shall determine the lowest evaluated or responsive Bid.

1. BASE BID

Having thoroughly examined the Project Site and all matters referred to in the Information for Bidders

and in the Bid Documents prepared by Aharonian & Associate, Inc., Architect for the above referenced

Project, we, the undersigned, hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work for the sum of:

$ , , . (Numeric)

$ _____________________________________________________________________________________Dollars

(Written)

In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern. The above Bid includes all cash allowances

outlined in Section 01 20 00 Allowances. Failure to fill out the above item, if providing a Base Bid, will establish

the Bid as non-responsive.



BID FORM 00 41 00-2

WE HAVE INCLUDED THE 5% BID SURETY AS REQUIRED BY THE INVITATION FOR BIDS.

2. ADDENDA

The following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bid Documents noted therein have

been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Sum.

Addendum #____Dated ________________

Addendum #____Dated ________________

Addendum #____Dated ________________ Addendum #____Dated ________________

3. BASE BID BREAKOUT COSTS

The following line item costs ARE INCLUDED IN THE BASE BID amount and are broken out for use by

the Owner.

A. Include list of all Subcontractors with Schedule of Values

4. BID ALTERNATES

Alternate #1: Deduct Alternate: $ (-) ______________________per sink unit..

5. SCHEDULE – CONTRACT TIME

If the Bid is accepted, unless otherwise indicated on the Bid Form, Bidder hereby agrees to commence the

Work under this Contract within fourteen (14) days after issuance of a written "Notice to Proceed" by the

Owner.

Bidder hereby agrees to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work on or before August 31, 2016 and to

achieve Final Completion of the Work within two (2) weeks thereafter.

6. ADDITIONAL WORK - OVERHEAD AND PROFIT

The Bidder agrees to be bound by the following percentages of cost basis for overhead, supervision, bond

and profit and other general expenses for any additional work. If accepted by the Owner in the award of

this Contract, these percentages shall be used in establishing the adjustment to the Contract Sum for

additions to or deductions from the Work in accordance with the applicable sections of the General

Conditions.

A. To the Contractor for Work performed by its own forces: Maximum ____ percent of the cost.

B. To Subcontractors for Work performed by its own forces: Maximum ____ percent of the cost.

C. The combined overhead and profit for Contractor and Subcontractors: Maximum ____ percent of

the cost.

7. UNIT PRICES



BID FORM 00 41 00-3

A. If accepted by the Owner in the award of this Contract, Unit Prices shall be used in establishing the

adjustment to the Contract Sum for additions to or deductions from the Work in accordance with the

applicable sections of the General Conditions. The Unit Prices listed shall include all costs, overhead

and profit and no further surcharges are to be added to any Unit Price item of Work that may be done.

Work deleted from the Contract will be calculated at 100% of the additional work Unit Prices.

B. Bidder agrees that the Unit Prices will not contain anything to alter or void the Lump Sum Bid

submitted herein and that applicable contents of this Bid shall be binding on the Unit Prices and the

Work involved whether or not specifically stated.

C. Unit Prices for fabricated items shall include all necessary connections and fastenings required to

produce a complete assembly.

8. BIDDER ACKNOWLEDEGMENTS

A. The Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive any

formalities in the bidding.

B. The Bidder agrees that this Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of ninety (90)

calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving Bids.

C. Upon written notice of the acceptance of its Bid by the Owner and in accordance with Article 14 of the

Information for Bidders, the Bidder shall provide a Certificate of Insurance covering all operations

under this Contract. The certificate meeting all conditions set forth therein shall be submitted to the

Owner prior to formal execution of the Contract.

D. Upon written notice of the acceptance of its Bid by the Owner, the Bidder shall execute the formal

Contract (Document 00 52 00 of the Project Manual) within ten (10) calendar days and deliver to the

Owner a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond (Documents 00 61 14 and 00 61 15 of the Project

Manual) as required by the General Conditions.

E. The Bid Surety, in the amount of 5% of the Base Bid, is to become the property of the Owner in the

event the Contract and Bonds are not executed within the timeframe set forth, as liquidated damages

for the delay and additional expense to the Owner caused thereby.

F. By submission of this Bid, the Bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint Bid, each party thereto

certifies as to its own organization, that its Bid has been arrived at independently, without consultation,

communication or agreement as to any matter relating to this Bid, with any other Bidder or with any

competitor.

9. REQUIREMENT FOR LICENSE NUMBER

A. In compliance with the requirements of Rhode Island General Law, Section 5-65-23, my Rhode Island

license number for the Work to be performed by this firm as Prime Contractor is:

LICENSE TYPE:________________________LICENSE NUMBER:________________________

10. BID FORM SIGNATURE(S)

The undersigned declares: that the only person interested in this proposal as principals are named herein as

such; that no official of the Owner and no person acting for or employed by the Owner is interested directly

or indirectly in this proposal or any contract which may be made under it or in any expected profits to arise

there from; that the proposal is made in good faith, without fraud, collusion or connection with any other

person bidding or refraining from bidding for the same work; that the Contract Documents relating to the



BID FORM 00 41 00-4

Contract covered by this proposal and in regard to all conditions pertaining to the Work have been

examined and has carefully checked the estimates of cost and from them makes this proposal.

Respectively Submitted,

______________________________________________________________________________

Name of Firm

SEAL (if Bid is by a corporation)

______________________________________________________________________

Signature

______________________________________________________________________

Title

______________________________________________________________________

Business Address

______________________________________________________________________

Telephone Number and Fax Number

The Bidder shall provide an affidavit that the person who has affixed his or her signature to this Bid Form is

actively and legally authorized to bind the firm contractually. This affidavit MUST be submitted with and

attached to the Bid Form.







BID SECURITY FORM 00 43 13-1

DOCUMENT 00 43 13

BID SECURITY FORM

AIA DOCUMENT A310 – Latest Edition

BID BOND

Document not bound herewith. Contractors and Subcontractors may review the document at the Office of the









CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 00 45 10-1

DOCUMENT 00 45 10

CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT


CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT

Document not bound herewith. The Contractor and Subcontractors may review the Document at the Office of the









AGREEMENT FORM 00 52 00-1

DOCUMENT 00 52 00

AGREEMENT FORM


STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR WHERE THE BASIS

OF PAYMENT IS A STIPULATED SUM

Document not bound herewith. Contractors and Subcontractors may review the Document at the Office of the









PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND FORM 00 61 13-1

SECTION 00 61 13

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND FORM

AIA DOCUMENT A312 – Latest Edition

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND










GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00-1

SECTION 00 72 00

GENERAL CONDITIONS

AIA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997 Edition

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION










SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 73 00

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

SUPPLEMENTS

A. The following supplements modify the “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”, AIA

Document A201-1997. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these

Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.

B. These Supplementary General Conditions are of the abbreviated or "stream-lined" type and include

incomplete sentences. Omission of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "in conformity

therewith", "shall be", "as noted on the Drawings", "according to the plans", "a", "an", "the", and "all" are

intentional. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as they are when

a note occurs on the Drawings. Words "shall be" or "shall" will be supplied by inference when colon ( : ) is

used within sentences or phrases.

C. The Contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or

scheduled on the Drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals

necessary and required for their completion.

ARTICLE 2 - OWNER

2.1 GENERAL

2.1.1 Delete the first sentence in Paragraph 2.1.1 and substitute the following “ The Owner is the person

or entity identified as such in the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor and is

referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number“.

2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER

2.2.3 At the end of the first sentence in Paragraph 2.2.3, delete “ and a legal description of the site “.

2.2.5 Delete the text of Subparagraph 2.2.5 and substitute the following: “ The Contractor will be

furnished free of charge one copy of the Drawings and Project Manuals. Additional sets will be

furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage and handling. “

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACTOR

3.1 GENERAL

3.1.1 Delete the text of Subparagraph 3.1.1 and substitute the following: “The Contractor is the person

or entity identified in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor and is referred to

throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term ‘Contractor’ means the

Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. “

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

3.4.2 Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.2.1and 3.4.2.2 to Paragraph 3.4.2:

Aharonian & Associates, Inc. – Architects

Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School – Mechanical System Renovations Foster, RI


3.4.2.1 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request

for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the

General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications).

3.4.2.2 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.2.above, the Contractor:

3.4.2.2.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and

determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified;

3.4.2.2.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the

Contractor would for that specified;

3.4.2.2.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract

except the Architect’s redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the

substitution which subsequently become apparent; and

3.4.2.2.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be

required for the Work to be complete in all respects.

3.8 ALLOWANCES

3.8.2.2 Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 3.8.2.2: “ except when installation is specified as

part of the allowance in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications). “

ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK

5.2.1 Add the following Subparagraph 5.2.1.1 to Paragraph 5.2.1:

5.2.1.1 Not later than 15 days after the date of commencement, the Contractor shall furnish in writing to

the Owner, through the Architect, the names of persons or entities proposed as manufacturers for

each of the products identified in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications) and,

where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor.

ARTICLE 7 – CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES

7.3.6 In the first sentence, delete the words “ a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit “ and

substitute “ an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.10

below: “

7.3.10 In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total

cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule:

7.3.10.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, (10) ten percent of the

cost.

7.3.10.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractor, (10) ten percent of

the amount due the Subcontractor.

7.3.10.3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that

Subcontractor’s or Sub-subcontractor’s own forces, (12) twelve percent of the cost.

7.3.10.4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub-subcontractors, (10) ten

percent of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor.

7.3.10.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with

Subparagraph 7.3.6.




7.3.10.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so

minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete

itemization of costs including labor, materials and Sub-contracts. Labor and materials shall be

itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Sub-contracts, they shall be

itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $500.00 be approved without such

itemization.

ARTICLE 9 – PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

9.3.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.3.1: “ The form of Application for Payment shall be

a notarized AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA

Document G703, Continuation Sheet. “


9.3.1.3 Until final payment, the Owner shall pay (90) ninety percent of the amount due the Contractor on

account of progress payments. When the Work is certified by the Architect to be (50) fifty percent

or more complete in the Application for Payment, the Owner shall pay (95) ninety five percent of

the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments.

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

9.8.3 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.8.3: “ The payment shall be sufficient to increase

the total payments to 95 percent of the Contract Sum, less such amounts the Architect shall

determine for incomplete work or unsettled claims. “

ARTICLE 10 – PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.1 SAFEETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS

10.1 Add the following Subparagraphs 10.1.2 and 10.1.3 to Paragraph 10.1:

10.1.2 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to

persons resulting from a material or substance encountered on the site by the Contractor, the

Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop work in the affected area and

report the condition to the Owner and the Architect in writing. The Owner, Contractor and

Architect shall then proceed in the same manner described in Subparagraph 10.1.3.

10.1.3 The Owner shall be responsible for obtaining the services of a licensed laboratory to verify a

presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event the

material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless

otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the

Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform

the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the

Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable

objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or the

Architect has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner, the Owner

shall propose another to whom the Contractor or the Architect has no reasonable objection.

10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY


10.2.3.1 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual

methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice.




ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS

11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

11.1.1 Add the following Subparagraphs 11.1.1.9 and 11.1.1.10 to Paragraph 11.1.1:

11.1.1.9 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis,

including:

1. Premises Operations ( including X-C and U as applicable ).

2. Independent Contractors’ Protective.

3. Products and Completed Operations.

4. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted.

5. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor’s obligation under Paragraph

3.18.

6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles.

7. Broad Form Property Damage, including Completed Operations.

8. Owner’s Protective.

11.1.1.10 If the General Liability coverage's are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a

claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination

date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination

date of coverage's required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with

Subparagraph 9.10.2.


11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following, or

greater if required by law:

1. Workers’ Compensation:

A. State Statutory

B. Applicable Federal ( e.g., Longshoremen’s ) Statutory

C. Employer’s Liability $500,000 per Accident

$500,000 Disease, Policy Limit

$100,000 Disease, Each Employee

2. Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability ( including Premises-Operations;

Independent Contractors’ Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form

Property Damage ):

A. Bodily Injury:

$1,000,000 Each Occurrence

$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate

B. Property Damage:



D. Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for two years after final payment.

E. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C or U coverage.

F. Broad Form Liability Insurance shall provide X, C and U coverage.

3. Contractual Liability:

A. Bodily Injury:


$2,000,000 Aggregate

B. Property Damage:






4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted:

A. Personal Injury:


5. Business Auto Liability ( including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles ):

A. Bodily Injury:

$1,000,000 Each Person


B. Property Damage:


6. Umbrella Excess Liability:

A. Excess Liability:

$2,000,000 Over Primary Insurance

11.1.3 Add the following sentence to Paragraph 11.1.3: “ If this insurance is written on the

Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AIA Document G715,

ACORD Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on the Commercial General Liability

policy form, ACORD Form 25S will be acceptable. “

11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE

11.4.1.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 11.4.1.1: “ If this insurance is written on the

Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AIA Document G715,

ACORD Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on the Commercial General Liability

policy form, ACORD Form 25S will be acceptable. “

11.4.1.5 Add the following Subparagraph 11.4.1.6 to Paragraph 11.4.1.5:

11.4.1.6 The insurance required by Paragraph 11.4 is not intended to cover machinery, tools or equipment

owned or rented by the Contractor which are utilized in the performance of the Work but not

incorporated into the permanent improvements. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s own

expense, provide insurance coverage for owned or rented machinery, tools or equipment which

shall be subject to the provisions of Subparagraph 11.4.7.

ARTICLE 13 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

Add the following Paragraphs to Article 13:

13.8 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY

13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows:

13.8.1.1 The Contractor and the Contractor’s Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee

or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin.

The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that

employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, or

national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment,

upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination;

rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship.

The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for

employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination.




13.8.1.2 The Contractor and the Contractor’s Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements

for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive

consideration for employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, or national origin.

13.9 STATE SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION

13.9.1 Bidders and their Subcontractors and material suppliers shall not include in their Bids any Rhode

Island State Sales and Use Taxes relative to the performance of the Work that is covered by the

exemption. The Owner will furnish tax exempt numbers required.

13.10 NOTICE OF DEFINITION OF OWNER

13.10.1 The "Owner" as referred to in these specifications is the Foster School District.







INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 00 73 16-1

DOCUMENT 00 73 16

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

The successful Bidder shall be required to provide Contractor’s Liability Insurance and all other required insurance

in the amounts and limits in accordance with the General Conditions contained Document 00 52 00 Agreement

Form and the following:

1.01 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

A. Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis,

including:

1. Premises Operations ( including X-C and U as applicable ).

2. Independent Contractors’ Protective.

3. Products and Completed Operations.

4. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted.

5. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor’s obligation under Paragraph 3.18.

6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles.

7. Broad Form Property Damage, including Completed Operations.

8. Owner’s Protective.

B. If the General Liability coverage's are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a

claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination

date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination

date of coverage's required to be maintained after final payment.

C. The insurance required shall be written for not less than the following, or greater if required by

law:

1. Workers’ Compensation:

a. State Statutory

b. Applicable Federal ( e.g., Longshoremen’s ) Statutory

c. Employer’s Liability $500,000 per Accident

$500,000 Disease, Policy Limit

$100,000 Disease, Each Employee

2. Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability ( including Premises-Operations;

Independent Contractors’ Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form

Property Damage ):

a. Bodily Injury:



b. Property Damage:



c. Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for two years after final payment.

d. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C or U coverage.



INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 00 73 16-2

3. Broad Form Liability Insurance shall provide X, C and U coverage.Contractual Liability:

a. Bodily Injury:



b. Property Damage:



4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted:

a. Personal Injury:


5. Business Auto Liability ( including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles ):

a. Bodily Injury:

$1,000,000 Each Person


b. Property Damage:


6. Umbrella Excess Liability:

a. Excess Liability:

$2,000,000 Over Primary Insurance

D. If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates

shall be AIA Document G715, ACORD Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on the

Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD Form 25S will be acceptable.

1.02 PROPERTY INSURANCE

A. If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates

shall be AIA Document G715, ACORD Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on the

Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD Form 25S will be acceptable.

B. The insurance required is not intended to cover machinery, tools or equipment owned or rented by

the Contractor which are utilized in the performance of the Work but not incorporated into the

permanent improvements. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s own expense, provide

insurance coverage for owned or rented machinery, tools or equipment.







MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE REQUIREMENTS 00 73 39-1

DOCUMENT 00 73 39

MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE REQUIREMENTS

It is the policy of the State of Rhode Island that minority business enterprises (MBEs) shall have the maximum

opportunity to participate in the performance of all procurements and projects funded in whole or in part with state

funds. Rhode Island General Law 37-14.1-6 states that “Minority business enterprises shall be included in all

procurements and construction projects under this chapter and shall be awarded a minimum of ten percent (10%) of the

dollar value of the entire procurement or project.”

The bidder’s compliance with MBE/WBE participation requirements will be evaluated on the basis of a percentage of

the total contract. Bidders agree that the participation commitment shall apply to the total contract price, inclusive of

all modifications and amendments, if awarded.

Prior to the approval and issuance of a contract, a letter of approval from the Office of Diversity, Equity and

Opportunity (ODEO), Minority Business Enterprise Compliance Office that you have satisfied the requirements of

RIGL 37-14.1 will be required. To initiate this process, you must submit a completed “MBE Utilization Plan” form to

Dorinda Keene at the Office of Diversity, Equity and Opportunity, MBE Compliance Office, One Capitol Hill,

3rd Floor, Providence, RI 02908. Plans may be submitted electronically to [email protected] . For further

information, call (401) 574-8670, or visit the MBE website located at www.mbe.ri.gov .

The Contract will be awarded to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest proposal complying with the conditions

of the Invitation to Bid provided the Bid is reasonable and it is in the interest of the Owner to accept it. The Bidder to

whom the award is made will be notified at the earliest practicable date. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and

all Bids and to waive any informality in Bids received whenever such rejection or waiver is in the interest of the

Owner. No Bidder may withdraw its bid within sixty (60) calendar days after the actual date of opening thereof.


mailto:[email protected]

http://www.mbe.ri.gov/






WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE 00 73 46-1

DOCUMENT 00 73 46

WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULE

The State of Rhode Island Department of Labor, Division of Professional Regulation General Decision Modification

document, in effect at the time of the Bid issuance for this Project, is an integral part of the Bid Documents for use in

fulfilling prevailing wage rate requirements. A copy is available on the web site of the State of Rhode Island

Department of Administration, Division of Purchases.

The Division of Purchases Web Site Address:

http://www.purchasing.state.ri.us/home.html

Click on “Information”; click on “Prevailing Wage Table”.

Documents are not contained within this Project Manual, may be obtained from the State of Rhode Island, Department

of Labor and Training, Division of Professional Regulations, 1511 Pontiac Avenue, Cranston, RI 02920-4407, Tel.

No. 401-462-8580.

The Foster-Glocester School District will require copies of certified payrolls to be submitted with the monthly

application for payment. Said Certified payrolls must be submitted to FGRSD Business Office, 91 Anan Wade Road,

North Scituate, RI 02857.







ADDENDA 00 91 13-1

DOCUMENT 00 91 13

ADDENDA

Insert Addenda as issued.

END OF SECTION 00 91 13






LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 92 00 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 92 00

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Document.

1.02 REFERENCE

A. The Drawings hereinafter listed represent an integral part of the Contract Documents. They should not be

considered as a separate entity, as along with the technical specifications, form a process of disseminating

information required to perform the Work of this Project.

B. The Drawings may be issued in multiple packages or phases. The Schedule below will be modified as these

packages are issued.

1.03 SCHEDULE

A. The following schedule indicates the Drawings of this Contract. The manner of listing and respective

order are for convenience only and do not obligate the Contractor to perform the Work in any specific

sequence. The work indicated on each drawing should not be construed as specific work for a specific

trade, subcontractor or supplier.

B. PHASE 1 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS:

Number Title

ARCHITECTURAL

CS COVER SHEET

D1.1 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN

A1.1 FLOOR PLAN

A1.4 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS

M1.1 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLANS & NOTES

M2.1 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES & DETAILS

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)







PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 1

SECTION 01 20 00

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cash allowances.

B. Unit cost allowances.

C. Contingency allowance.

D. Inspection and testing allowances.

E. Schedule of Values.

F. Change procedures.

G. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications For Payment.

1.02RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document 00 72 00 - General Conditions: Progress Payments and Final Payment.

B. Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination.

C. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

D. Section 01 77 99 – Closeout Procedures and Submittals: Final Payment.

1.03CASH ALLOWANCES

A. COSTS INCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES: Cost of Product to Contractor, or Subcontractor, less

applicable trade discounts; delivery to site and applicable taxes.

B. COSTS NOT INCLUDED IN THE ALLOWANCE: Product handling at the site, including unloading

uncrating and storage; protection of Products from elements and from damage and labor for installation

and finishing.

C. ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITIES:

1. Consult with Contractor in consideration and selection of Products, suppliers and installers.

2. Select Products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor.

3. Prepare Change Order.




D. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:

1. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. Assist Architect in

selection of Products, suppliers and installers.

2. On notification of selection by Architect, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and

installer.

3. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery.

4. Promptly inspect Products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims

for transportation damage.

E. Funds will be drawn from Cash Allowances only by Change Order.

1.04 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES

A. Contractor’s costs for Products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding,

equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of

funds from this Allowance.

B. Funds will be drawn from Contingency Allowance only by Change Order.

C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by

Change Order.

D. No Contingency Allowances have been established to date.

1.05 INSPECTION AND TESTING ALLOWANCES

A. COSTS INCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES: Cost of engaging an inspection or testing firm, execution of

inspection or tests, reporting results.

B. COSTS NOT INCLUDED IN THE ALLOWANCE

1. Incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspection or testing firm.

2. Costs of testing laboratory services required by Contractor separate from Contract Document

requirements.

3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect.

C. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

1. Submit one copy of the inspection or testing firm's invoice with next application for payment.

2. Pay invoice on approval by Architect.

D. Funds will be drawn from inspection and testing allowances only by Change Order.

E. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the inspection and testing allowance to Owner

by Change Order.

F. INSPECTION AND TESTING ALLOWANCES:

1. No Inspection and Testing Allowances have been established to date.




1.06 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Architect of the date when the final

selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to

avoid delaying the Work.

B. At the Architect's request, obtain proposals for each Allowance for use in making final selections.

Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by the Architect from the designated supplier.

1.07 UNUSED MATERIALS

A. Return unused materials to the manufacturer or supplier for credit to the Owner, after installation has

been completed and accepted.

1. When requested by the Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner where it is not

economically practical to return the material for credit. When directed by the Architect, deliver

unused material to the Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is the

Contractor's responsibility.

1.08 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation

Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered.

B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed.

C. FORMAT: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number

and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance and

General Conditions.

D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this Section. For Unit Cost

Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve

the total for the item.

E. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.

F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment.

1.09 CHANGE PROCEDURES

A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract

Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201/CM Article 12.4 by issuing supplemental

instructions on AIA Form G710 Architect's Supplemental Instructions or other similar form.

B. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change

with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing

the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days.

C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the

proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the

change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a

statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested

substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

D. STIPULATED SUM/PRICE CHANGE ORDER: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed or

maximum price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect.




E. UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER: For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will

be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-

determined, execute Work under a Construction Change Authorization. Changes in Contract Sum/Price

or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.

F. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form

G713 Construction Change Authorization or similar form, signed by the Owner, instructing the

Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in

Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change.

G. TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER: Submit itemized account and supporting data after

completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. Architect will

determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract

Documents.

H. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required

for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.

I. CHANGE ORDER FORMS: AIA G701 Change Order.

J. EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as

provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

1.10 ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS

A. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT: In accordance with the General Conditions and as specified herein.

B. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT: As specified herein.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in Allowances, in the form specified for

Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show the actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use

in fulfillment of each allowance.

C. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment.

D. Submit an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment.

E. PAYMENT PERIOD: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

F. Submit under transmittal letter specified in Section 01 33 00.

G. Submit lien waivers.

1.12 FORMAT

A. AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment, including continuation sheets when required.

B. For each item, provide a column for listing: Item Number; Description of Work; Scheduled Value,

Previous Applications: Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application: Authorized Change

Orders; Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application; Percentage of Completion; Balance to

Finish; and Retainage.

C. Reference the General Conditions.




1.13 SUBSTANTIATING DATA

A. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question.

B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show Application number and

date, and line item by number and description.

1.14 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS

A. Present required information in typewritten form or on electronic media printout.

B. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.

C. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item

for portion of work performed and for stored Products.

D. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on continuation sheet, listing Change Order number

and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.

E. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section 01 77 99.

1.15 MEASUREMENT - GENERAL

A. Reference the General Conditions for additional requirements on Unit Price Work.

B. All unit prices which are specified for measurement by the linear foot (LF) shall be measured from

the beginning to the termination point of the unit being measured.

C. Units of measure shall be as follows unless specified otherwise.

Item Method of Measurement

LS Lump Sum - Unit is one; no measurement will be made.

EA Each - Field count by Engineer

LF Linear Foot - Field measure by Engineer

SF Square Foot - Field measure by Engineer

SY Square Yard - Field measured by Engineer

CY Cubic Yard – Field measure by Engineer using the Average-End-Area Method to calculate

volume

TON Ton - Certified truck scale

1.16 PAYMENT

A. GENERAL: Progress payment requests shall be submitted monthly as specified in the General

Conditions.

Payment for Lump Sum Work covers all Work necessary to furnish, install and/or complete the

Work of the Contract.

Payment for unit price items covers all Work necessary to furnish, install and/or complete the item.

Payment for equipment, materials and labor for items not included on the Bid shall be considered

incidental and no separate payment will be made.

1.17 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS

A. Payment will not be made for following:




1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material.

2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for under the Contract

Documents.

3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by Contractor.

4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle.

5. Defective Work not accepted by the Architect or Engineer.

6. Material remaining on hand after completion of Work.

1.18 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. FINAL PAYMENT: Will be made only for materials incorporated into the Work in the Contract; no

partial payments shall be made for equipment or materials delivered to the site but not used.

1.19 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Reference the General Conditions, and as may otherwise be required in the Contract Documents.

B. Prior to submitting final application, make acceptable delivery of required documents.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to

ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.







SUBSTITUTIONS 01 25 00-1

SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Products, materials and equipment.

B. Transportation and handling.

C. Storage and protection.

D. Product options.

E. Substitutions.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document 00100 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures.

B. Document 00110 – Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.

C. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring.

1.03 MANUFACTURED AND FABRICATED PRODUCTS

PART 1 - Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices.

PART 2 - Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable.

PART 3 - Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer.

PART 4 - Products shall be suitable for service conditions.

PART 5 - Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are

specifically reviewed by Architect.

PART 6 - Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified.

1.04 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK

A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.

B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically reviewed by the Architect.




1.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

PART 1- When the Contract Documents require that installation of Work shall comply with manufacturer's printed

instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, as specified in

Section 01340 - Submittals.

PART 2- Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion.

PART 3- Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in

conformity with specified requirements.

PART 4- Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with

Architect for further instructions.

PART 5- Do not proceed with Work without clear instructions.

PART 6- Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation

procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by the Contract Documents.

1.06 CERTIFICATES OF CONFORMANCE AND MANUFACTURE

PART 1 - In addition to other requirements specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, as specified in

Section 01340 - Submittals, notarized certificates of conformance and manufacture that all materials and/or equipment to

be furnished under this Contract meet the specification requirements. When directed, each shipment of material shall be

accompanied by the manufacturer's notarized certificates of conformance and manufacture. Unless otherwise

specifically specified, all testing of materials shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner.

PART 2 - Each manufacturer's certificate shall be endorsed or accompanied by the Contractor's certificate that the

material certified by the manufacturer will be the material incorporated in the Work.

1.07 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict

with Work and conditions at the site and also when two or more trades, contractors or suppliers are

involved.

B. Transport all materials and equipment on legally approved conveyances as required or recommended by

the respective manufacturer or supplier.

C. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging with

identifying labels intact and legible.

D. Receive and handle all materials and equipment, at the Project site, by conveyances or methods as

recommended by the respective manufacturer or supplier to prevent damage to products.

E. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract

Documents and reviewed submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.

F. Remove from the site any material or item of equipment damaged during the transportation or handling

process, and immediately replace at no additional cost to the Owner.




1.08 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

1 Store products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

2 Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.

3 Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.

4 Maintain all storage areas in a clean and orderly condition at all times.

1.09 EXTERIOR STORAGE

A. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids. Prevent soiling or staining. Cover

products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings and provide adequate ventilation

to avoid condensation.

B. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign

matter.

C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored

products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions and are free from damage or

deterioration.

D. Replace any material or item of equipment damaged due to inadequate storage or protection and

immediately replace at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.10 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and

subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.

1.11 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED BY REFERENCE STANDARDS OR BY DESCRIPTION ONLY: Any

product meeting those standards or description.

B. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED BY NAMING ONE OR MORE MANUFACTURERS: Products of

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED BY NAMING ONE OR MORE MANUFACTURERS WITH A PROVISION

FOR SUBSTITUTIONS: It is the Bidder’s responsibility to determine if the proposed substitute product is

equal to the specified product. The Bidder may submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not

named for verification of the substitute product’s acceptability. Products substituted by the Bidder without

written approval of the Architect and carried by the Bidder in its Bid, is done so solely at the Bidder’s risk.

If the substitute product is subsequently not approved by the Architect because it does not equal or exceed

the specified product in every aspect, the Bidder shall be obligated to provide the specified product at no

additional cost to the Owner.

D. All references to manufacturers or suppliers model numbers and other information herein are supplied to

establish a minimum standard of performance, function, quality and appearance for the products to be

incorporated into the project.




1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during the

bidding period to requirements specified in this Section.

B. Thereafter, Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the

Contractor.

C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with

Contract Documents.

D. A REQUEST CONSTITUTES A REPRESENTATION THAT THE CONTRACTOR:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the

specified product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be

complete, with no additional cost to Owner.

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.

5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities.

E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data

submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract

Documents.

F. SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE

1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to

one proposed Substitution.

2. Submit shop drawings, product data and certified test results attesting to the proposed product

equivalence.

3. The Architect will notify the Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request.







PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Schedule of Values.

B. Change procedures.

C. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications For Payment.


A. Document 00 72 00 - General Conditions: Progress Payments and Final Payment.

C. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

D. Section 01 77 99 – Closeout Procedures and Submittals: Final Payment.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation

Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered.

B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed.

C. FORMAT: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number

and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance and

General Conditions.

D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this Section. For Unit Cost

Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve

the total for the item.

E. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.

F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment.

1.04 CHANGE PROCEDURES

A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract

Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201 by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA

Form G710 Architect's Supplemental Instructions or other similar form.




B. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change

with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing

and submit an estimate within 7 days. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request

for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a

statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract

Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other

contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

C. STIPULATED SUM/PRICE CHANGE ORDER: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed or

maximum price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect.

D. UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER: For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will

be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-

determined, execute Work under a Construction Change Authorization. Changes in Contract Sum/Price

or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.

E. TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER: Submit itemized account and supporting data after

completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. Architect will

determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract

Documents.

F. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form

G713 Construction Change Authorization or similar form, signed by the Owner, instructing the

Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in

Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change.

G. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required

for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.

H. CHANGE ORDER FORMS: AIA G701 Change Order.

I. EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as

provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS

A. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT: In accordance with the General Conditions and as specified herein.

B. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT: As specified herein.

1.06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment.

B. Submit an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment.

C. PAYMENT PERIOD: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

D. Submit under transmittal letter specified in Section 01 33 00.

E. Submit lien waivers.

1.06 FORMAT

A. AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment, including continuation sheets when required.

B. For each item, provide a column for listing: Item Number; Description of Work; Scheduled Value,

Previous Applications: Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application: Authorized Change




Orders; Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application; Percentage of Completion; Balance to

Finish; and Retainage.

C. Reference the General Conditions.

1.07 SUBSTANTIATING DATA

A. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question.

B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show Application number and

date, and line item by number and description.

1.08 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS

A. Present required information in typewritten form or on electronic media printout.

B. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.

C. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item

for portion of work performed and for stored Products.

D. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on continuation sheet, listing Change Order number

and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.

E. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section 01 77 99.

1.09 PAYMENT

A. GENERAL: Progress payment requests shall be submitted monthly as specified in the General

Conditions.

B. Payment for Lump Sum Work covers all Work necessary to furnish, install and/or complete the

Work of the Contract.

C. Payment for unit price items covers all Work necessary to furnish, install and/or complete the item.

D. Payment for equipment, materials and labor for items not included on the Bid shall be considered

incidental and no separate payment will be made.

1.10 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS

A. Payment will not be made for following:

1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material.

2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for under the Contract

Documents.

3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by Contractor.

4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle.

5. Defective Work not accepted by the Architect or Engineer.

6. Material remaining on hand after completion of Work.

1.11 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT




A. FINAL PAYMENT: Will be made only for materials incorporated into the Work in the Contract; no

partial payments shall be made for equipment or materials delivered to the site but not used.


A. Reference the General Conditions, and as may otherwise be required in the Contract Documents.

B. Prior to submitting final application, make acceptable delivery of required documents.









PROJECT COORDINATION 01 31 13 - 1

SECTION 01 31 13

PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations

including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination, administrative procedures and conservation.

2. Submittals.

3. Field engineering.

4. Cleaning and protection.


A. Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings: Progress and coordination meetings, pre-installation conferences.

B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Contractor's Construction Schedule.

C. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements: Materials and Equipment.

D. Section 01 77 99 – Closeout Procedures and Submittals.

E. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure

efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included

under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its

own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required

maintenance, service and repair.

3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special

procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports and attendance at

meetings.




1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their

work is required.

C. ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work.

Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of schedules.

2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.

3. Delivery and processing of submittals.

4. Progress meetings.

5. Project closeout activities.

D. CONSERVATION: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the

Work.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. COORDINATION DRAWINGS: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed

for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings

where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of

different components.

1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.

2. Indicate required installation sequences.

3. Comply with requirements contained in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. STAFF NAMES: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the

Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance

at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and

telephone numbers.

1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office and each temporary

telephone.

1.05 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Rhode Island and acceptable to the Architect.

B. Contractor to locate and protect survey control and reference points.

C. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings.

D. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines and levels utilizing recognized

engineering survey practices.

E. Submit a copy of registered site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor that the

elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents.





PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS

A. INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both

the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of

uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and

installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or

deterioration at Substantial Completion.

B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the

remainder of the construction period.

C. LIMITING EXPOSURES: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise

deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include,

but are not limited to, the following:

1. Excessive static or dynamic loading; Excessive internal or external pressures.

2. Excessively high or low temperatures; Thermal shock; Excessively high or low humidity;

Water or ice.

3. Air contamination or pollution; Solvents, chemicals, light, radiation; Excessive weathering.

4. Puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic.

5. Soiling, staining and corrosion.

6. Bacteria; Rodent and insect infestation.

7. Combustion; Electrical current.

8. High-speed operation; Improper lubrication; Unusual wear or other misuse; Misalignment.

9. Contact between incompatible materials.

10. Destructive testing;

11. Unprotected storage, improper shipping or handling.

12. Theft or vandalism.







PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19 - 1

SECTION 01 31 19

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pre-Construction Conference and Progress Meetings

1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall schedule and administer the Pre-Construction Conference and shall:

1. Prepare the agenda for the meeting.

2. Notify all parties required to attend meeting.

3. Make physical arrangements for meeting.

4. Preside at meeting.

5. Record the minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions.

6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within seven (7) calendar days after the meeting to

participants in the meeting and other parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.

B. The Contractor shall schedule and administer periodic progress meetings, and specially called

meetings throughout the progress of the work. The Contractor shall:

1. Prepare agenda for meetings.

2. Make physical arrangements for meetings.

3. Preside at meetings.

4. Record the minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions.

5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within five (5) calendar days after each meeting to

participants in the meeting and other parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.

C. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and

authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. ATTENDANCE: Owner and/or representative, Architect, Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent,

major Subcontractors, major suppliers and others as appropriate.




1. SUGGESTED AGENDA Distribution and discussion of

a. List of major Subcontractors and suppliers.

b. Projected construction schedules.

2. Critical work sequencing.

3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.

4. PROJECT COORDINATION: Designation of responsible personnel.

5. Procedures and processing of Field decisions, Proposal requests, Submittals, Change Orders

and Applications for Payment.

6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.

7. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents.

8. USE OF PREMISES

a. Office, work and storage areas.

b. Owner's requirements.

9. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids.

10. Traffic Maintenance Plan.

11. Temporary utilities.

12. Safety and first-aid procedures.

13. Security procedures.

14. Housekeeping procedures.

15. Place, date and time for regular progress meetings.

1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Conduct regular scheduled progress meetings at place, dates and times agreed upon at the Pre-

Construction Conference.

B. Conduct additional meetings as progress of the work dictates.

C. ATTENDANCE: Architect and his professional consultants as needed, Owner or representative (when

required), Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda,

suppliers as appropriate to the agenda and others as required.

D. SUGGESTED AGENDA

1. Review approval of minutes of previous meeting.

2. Review of work progress since previous meeting.

3. Field observations, problems and conflicts.

4. Problems that impede construction schedule.




5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules.

6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.

7. Revisions to construction schedule.

8. Progress schedule during succeeding work period.

9. Maintenance of quality standards.

10. Pending changes and substitutions.

11. Coordination of schedules.

12. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required.

13. Review proposed changes for:

A. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date.

B. Effect on subcontracts of the project.

14. Other business.









SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Procedural requirements for non-administrative Submittals, including shop drawings, product data,

samples and other miscellaneous work-related submittals. Shop drawings, product data, samples and

other work-related submittals are required to amplify, expand and coordinate the information contained

in the Contract Documents.

1. Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for specifications on

administrative, non-work-related submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to the

following items:

a. Permits; Written consents; Manifests

b. Payment applications; Performance and payment bonds; Insurance certificates.

c. Inspection and test reports; Progress reports.

d. Listing of subcontractors; Construction schedules.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Technical drawings and data that have been specially prepared for this Project,

including but not limited to the following items:

1. Fabrication and installation drawings; Coordination drawings (for use on-site).

2. Schedules.

3. Design-mix formulas.

C. PRODUCT DATA: Standard printed information on manufactured products that has not been specially

prepared for this Project, including but not limited to the following items:

1. Manufacturer’s product specifications and installation instructions; Catalog cuts.

2. Roughing-in diagram and templates; Standard wiring diagrams; Operational range diagrams.

3. Printed performance curves.

D. SAMPLES: Physical examples of work, including but not limited to the following items:

1. Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated work.

2. Small cuts or containers of materials.




E. Complete units of repetitively used materials. MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS: Work-related,

non-administrative submittals that d not fit in the three previous categories, including, but not limited

to the following:

1. Specially prepared and standard printed warranties; Testing and certification reports.

2. Project photographs; Record Drawings; Field measurement data.

3. Keys and other security protection devices.


A. Drawings, General Provisions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of

this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. GENERAL: Refer to the General Conditions for basic procedures for submittal handling.

B. COORDINATION: Coordinate the preparation and processing of submittals with the performance of

the work. Coordinate each separate submittal with other submittals and related activities such as

testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar activities that require sequential activity.

1. Coordinate the submittal of different units of interrelated work so that one submittal will not be

delayed by the Architect’s need to review a related submittal. The Architect reserves the right to

withhold action on any submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related

submittals are forthcoming.

C. SCHEDULING: In each appropriate administrative submittal, such as the Progress Schedule, show the

principal work-related submittals and time requirements for coordination of submittal activity with

related work.

D. COORDINATION OF SUBMITTAL TIMES: Prepare and transmit each submittal to the Architect

sufficiently in advance of the scheduled performance of related work and other applicable activities.

Transmit different kinds of submittals for the same unit of work so that processing will not be delayed

by the Architect’s need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

E. REVIEW TIME: Allow sufficient time so that the installation will not be delayed as a result of the

time required to properly process submittals, including time for re-submittal, if necessary. Advise the

Architect on each submittal, as to whether processing time is critical to the progress of the work, and if

the work would be expedited if processing time could be shortened.

1. Allow Fourteen (14) calendar days for the Architect’s initial processing of each submittal. Allow

a longer time period where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent

submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a

submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Allow seven (7) calendar days for reprocessing each submittal.

3. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor’s failure to transmit submittals

to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the work.

F. SUBMITTAL PREPARATION: Mark each submittal with a permanent label for identification.

Provide the following information on the label for proper processing and recording of action taken.

1. Project name; Date.

2. Name and address of Owner, Contractor and Supplier.




3. Name of manufacturer; Number and title of appropriate Specification Section; Drawing number

and detail references, as appropriate; Similar definite information as necessary.

4. Provide a space on the label for the Contractor’s review and approval markings, and a space for

the Architect’s “Action” marking.

G. SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Transmit four (4) copies, plus the number of copies the Contractor wants returned to him after review

of each submittal by the Architect, and to other destinations as required, by use of a transmittal form.

Prepare a separate transmittal form for each division of work and identify each submittal by

Specification Section number on the transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the

Contractor will be returned to the sender "without action".

1. Record relevant information and requests for data on the transmittal form. On the transmittal

form, or on a separate sheet attached to the form, record deviations from the requirements of the

Contract Documents, if any, including minor variations and limitations.

2. Submittals will be accepted by the Architect if transmitted via E-mail.

3. No submittals will be accepted by the Architect if transmitted via FAX machine.

4. Include the Contractor's signed certification stating that information submitted complies with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

5. Sequentially number the transmittal forms; re-submittals to have original number with an

alphabetic suffix.

H. CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW: Stamp of approval indicates to Owner and Architect that all quantities,

dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data have been

determined and verified, and that each submittal has been reviewed or coordinated with requirements

of Work and Contract Documents. Failure to provide the Contractor’s Review Stamp shall be

grounds for the Submittal to be returned to the Contractor with no action taken.

I. No portion of Work requiring shop drawings shall be started or any materials be fabricated, delivered

to site or installed prior to approval of such items. Fabrication performed, materials purchased or on-

site construction accomplished which does not conform to approved shop drawings and data shall be at

Contractor's risk. Owner will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies

required to accomplish conformity.

J. Project work, materials, fabrications and installation shall conform to approved shop drawings.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS

1. INSPECTION AND TEST REPORTS: Classify each inspection and test report as being either

“shop drawings” or “product data” depending on whether the report is specially prepared for the

project, or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at the point of production.

Process inspection and test reports accordingly.

2. SURVEY DATA: Provide copies of all survey data collected for property surveys, field

measurements, quantitative records of actual work, damage surveys and similar data required by

the individual Sections of these specifications. None of the specified copies will be returned.

3. STANDARDS: Where submittal of a copy of standards is indicated, and except where copies of

standards are specified as an integral part of a “Product Data” submittal, submit a single copy of

standards for the Architect’s use. Where workmanship, whether at the project site or elsewhere, is

governed by a standard, furnish additional copies of the standard to installers, Owner’s field

representative and others involved in the performance of the Work.




4. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: Refer to section "Project Closeout" and to individual Sections of

these specifications for specific submittal requirements of project closeout information, materials,

tools and similar items.

a. RECORD DOCUMENTS: Furnish set of original documents as maintained on the project

site.

5. GENERAL DISTRIBUTION: Provide additional distribution of submittals to Subcontractors,

suppliers, fabricators, installers, governing authorities and others as necessary for the proper

performance of the Work. Include such additional copies of submittals in the transmittal to the

Architect where the submittals are required to receive "Action" marking before final distribution.

Record distributions on transmittal forms.

1.05 ARCHITECT’S ACTION

A. GENERAL: Except for submittals for the record and similar purposes, where action and return on

submittals is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark with appropriate

"Action", and where possible return within twenty-one (21) calendar days of receipt. Where the

submittal must be held for coordination the Architect will so advise the Contractor without delay.

B. ACTION STAMP: The Architect will stamp, sign and date each submittal copy to be returned to

Contractor and indicate disposition of each submittal in accordance with the following grading

requirements:

1. “Approved” or “Reviewed” indicates that Architect notes not exception to the intent of the

Contract Documents. Fabrication of item may commence.

2. "Not Approved" or “Rejected” indicates nonconformance with the Contract requirements. The

Architect will state the reasons for rejections.

3. “Revise and Resubmit” indicates nonconformance with the Contract requirements or that too

many corrections would be necessary. No fabrication may commence.

C. ARCHITECT’S REVIEW

1. Architect’s review of submitted drawings and data will cover only general conformity to drawings

and specification, external connections and dimensions which affect layout.

2. Architect’s review does not indicate thorough review of all dimensions.

3. Architect’s review of submittals does not relieve Contractor’s responsibility for errors,

omissions or deviations, field verification of all dimensions nor responsibility for compliance

with Contract Documents.

1.06 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Architect and resubmit until they are

denoted “Approved”, “Reviewed”, “Approved as Noted” or “Furnish As Corrected” by the Architect.

Resubmission requirements specified in individual specifications Sections, which differ from these

requirements, will take precedence over these requirements.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.

2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect.

C. SAMPLES: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal




1.07 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute reproductions of shop drawings and copies of product data which carry the Architect’s

stamp denoting “Approved”, “Reviewed”, “Approved as Noted” or “Furnish As Corrected” to:

1. Job site file; Record documents file.

2. Subcontractors; Supplier or fabricator.

B. Distribute samples which carry the Architect’s stamp denoting “Approved”, “Reviewed”, “Approved

as Noted” or “Furnish As Corrected” as directed by the Architect.









QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00 - 1

SECTION 01 45 00

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Quality assurance and control of installation.

B. References.

C. Field samples.

D. Mock-up.

E. Inspection and testing laboratory services.

F. Manufacturers' field services and reports.


A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates.

B. Section 01 45 29 – Testing Laboratory Services.

C. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions and

workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent

tolerances, codes or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,

vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents.




B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. Should specified reference

standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification for Architect before proceeding.

C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract

Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.05 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review.

B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.

C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has

been accepted by Architect.

1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals

and finishes.

B. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mock-up has been

accepted by Architect.

1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

A. The Contractor will appoint and employ services of an independent firm, acceptable to the Owner and

Architect, to perform inspection and testing. Contractor shall pay for services from an Allowance

specified in Section 01 21 00 – Allowances.

B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests and other services specified in individual

specification Sections and as required by the Architect.

C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect, in duplicate, indicating

observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract

Documents.

D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage

and assistance as requested.

1. Notify Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring

services.

2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for

Contractor's use.

E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the

same independent firm on instructions by the Architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to the

Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum.

1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer

subject to approval of Architect/Owner.

B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces

and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment

as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.




C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers

that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for review.









TESTING LABATORY SERVICES 01 45 29 - 1

SECTION 01 45 29

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Selection and payment.

B. Contractor submittals.

C. Laboratory responsibilities.

D. Laboratory reports.

E. Limits on testing laboratory authority.

F. Contractor’s responsibilities.

G. Schedule of inspections and tests.


A. Document 00 72 00 - General Conditions: Inspections, testing and approvals required by public

authorities.

B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Manufacturer's certificates.

C. Section 01 75 00 - Starting and Adjusting.

D. Section 01 77 99 – Closeout Procedures and Submittals: Project Record Documents.

E. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required and standards for testing.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of

Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

B. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel

and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction.

1.04 SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Contractor will employ services of an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the Owner and

Architect, to perform specified inspection and testing;

B. Contractor shall pay costs of services.




C. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relive Contractor of obligation to perform work in

accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E329 and ANSI/ASTM D3740.

B. LABORATORY: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located.

C. LABORATORY STAFF: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.

D. TESTING EQUIPMENT: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to

either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

1.06 CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address and telephone number, and names of

full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.

B. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of

National Bureau of Standards (NBS) during most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of

remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

1.07 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance

of services.

C. Perform specified inspection, sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.

D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of

Work or products.

F. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect.

G. Attend pre-construction conferences and progress meetings.

1.08 LABORATORY REPORTS

A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two copies of laboratory report to Architect and to

Contractor.

B. INCLUDE:

1. Date issued.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name of inspector.

4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.

5. Identification of product and Specifications Section.

6. Location in the Project.




7. Type of inspection or test.

8. Date of tests.

9. Results of tests.

10. Conformance with Contract Documents.

C. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results.

1.09 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY

A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

1.10 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Deliver to laboratory, at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that

require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the Work.

C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle

samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and

curing of test samples.

D. Notify Architect/Engineer and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring

inspection and testing services.

E. Pay costs of testing laboratory services from Allowance specified in Section 01 21 00 on approval of

invoices by Architect.

F. Arrange with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond

specified requirements.

1.11 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. See individual specification Section for inspection and testing requirements.


PART 3 EXECUTIONS (Not Applicable)







TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Mobilization and demobilization.

B. Temporary Utilities.

C. Construction facilities.

D. Vehicular access and parking.

E. Temporary barriers and enclosures.

F. Protection of Work.

G. Temporary controls.

H. Project identification.


A. Drawings, General Provisions of the Contract and Division 1 Sections apply to work of this Section.

1.03 GENERAL

A. The limits of the site and areas designated for Contractor staging are shown on the Drawings.

B. The limits of the Owner’s property are shown on the Drawings.

C. In the event additional space is required for the Contractor’s operations, the Contractor shall make its own

arrangements and pay for such additional space.

1.04 PRIVATE LAND

A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements, except by written

permission of the property Owner. Furnish Architect with copies of all agreements the Contractor has

with property Owners to enter or occupy private lands.

1.05 PERMITS AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall obtain necessary permits, coordinate and provide all temporary facilities as required

for performing the work, including any facilities specified for the Owner’s or the Architect’s use.




1.06 CONTROL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. All temporary facilities shall be subject to the control and direction of the Owner.



3.01 MOBILIZATION

A. Provide all work necessary to move in personnel and equipment, set up Contractor's temporary offices,

buildings, facilities, utilities, prepare the site for construction.

B. Set up construction facilities in a neat and orderly manner within the Contractor’s staging area and at a

location acceptable to the Architect. Accomplish all required work in accordance with applicable portions

of these Specifications. Confine operations within the general work limits shown or established.

3.02 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

A. Completely remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials and

equipment prior to Substantial or when their use is no longer required.

B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.

C. Temporary sheds, utilities, barricades, signs and other appurtenances related to prosecution of the

Work and not incorporated in the permanent construction shall be completely removed from the site

prior to acceptance of work by Owner.

D. Upon completion of work of all trades and before final acceptance of entire Project, each trade shall

remove, at its own expense, all wiring, appurtenances and accessories used in performance of its

respective work.

E. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

F. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

3.03 DEMOBILIZATION

A. At the completion of the work and immediately prior to final inspection, clean the entire project area

removing all debris, soil and rubbish.

1. Should Contractor not remove rubbish or debris or not clean the facilities and site as specified above,

the Owner reserves the right to have final cleaning done by others at the sole expense of the

Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall:

1. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

2. Conduct final inspection of concealed spaces in preparation for Contract completion.

3. Remove from the property temporary structures and materials, equipment and appurtenances not

required as part of, or appurtenant to, the completed work.

4. Leave watercourse, gutters and ditches open and in condition satisfactory to Architect.




3.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall coordinate for and obtain the necessary permits for connection to these services.

3.05 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

A. Provide temporary heating when temperature falls below 50 deg. F and as otherwise required to:

1. Maintain working conditions acceptable to Architect.

2. Protect all work, materials and equipment against damage from dampness or cold.

3. Dry out structures. Maintain proper conditions for installation and curing of materials.

B. Ensure that heating equipment and fuels are compatible for particular purpose and include safety

devices in accordance with industry standards.

C. Do not use combustion type heaters without proper venting nor in areas where such equipment might

introduce a hazard.

D. Ensure that all enclosed areas are ventilated (using forced-draft equipment when necessary) as required

to maintain proper conditions for personnel, and work, and to avoid any accumulation of hazardous

dust or fumes.

E. Pay costs associated with furnishing, installing, maintaining, operating and removing of heating and

ventilation equipment.

3.06 TEMPORARY WATER

A. Owner will provide water supply as required for used in connection with Work to be done under this

Contract.

B. The Contractor shall pay for the cost of the water usage.

3.07 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND/OR LIGHTING

A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide all power for heating, lighting, operation of

equipment or for any other required use. Pay costs for service and for power used.

B. Install circuit and branch wiring, with area distribution boxes located so that power and lighting is

available throughout construction by use of construction-type power cords.

C. Provide artificial lighting for areas of work when natural light is not adequate for work, and for areas

accessible to public.

D. Furnish all extension cords, sockets, lamps, motors and accessories for work. Ground all outlets.

E. All temporary wiring, service equipment and accessories thereto installed shall be removed at expense

of Contractor after serving its purpose.

F. Contractor is required to pay for replacement of all lamps broken and/or removed from premises during

construction period and until date of Substantial Completion of Work and written acceptance by

Owner.




3.08 TELEPHONE SERVICE

A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization.

3.09 INTERFERENCE WITH EXISTING STRUCTURES

A. Whenever it may be necessary to cross or interfere with existing culverts, drains, water pipes or

fixtures, guardrails, fences, or other structures needing special care, due notice shall be given to the

Architect and to the various public and private agencies or individuals responsible for the utility or

structure that is interfered with.

B. Whenever required, all objects shall be strengthened to meet any additional stress that the work herein

specified may impose upon it, and any damage caused shall be thoroughly repaired.

C. The entire Work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and the Work shall be performed at no

additional expense to the Owner.

D. All damaged items of Work or items required to be removed and replaced due to construction shall be

replaced or repaired by the Contractor to the complete satisfaction of the property Owners and/or the

Architect at no additional expense to the Owner.

3.10 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. OFFICE: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment,

and equipped with sturdy furniture and drawing display table.

B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 8 persons.

C. Provide separate private office, similarly equipped and furnished, for use of Owner. This office may be

located in a job trailer, shared with the Contractor.

D. Coordinate locations of offices and sheds with the Owner and Architect.

E. Contractor’s project signage shall be subject to the direction and control of the Owner.

3.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Furnish temporary sanitary facilities at site for needs of all construction workers and others performing

work or furnishing services on project.

B. Ensure that sanitary facilities are:

1. Of a capacity acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction over the Project.

2. Maintained throughout construction period.

3. Obscured from public view to greatest extent possible and secured to prevent vandalism.

C. Furnish at least one toilet for each 20 workers if toilets of chemically treated type are used.

D. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.

E. Enforce use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at site.

F. Pay costs associated with furnishing, installing, maintaining, operating and removing sanitary facilities.

3.12 VEHICULAR ACCESS




A. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve construction area.

B. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow.

3.13 PARKING

A. Provide parking facilities for Contractor, Owner and Architect personnel working on the project.

B. Arrange for and provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel as required.

C. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking as required.

3.14 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary insulated weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable

working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of

required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of

unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

B. Provide temporary roofing as required.

3.15 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied

areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas and to prevent damage to

existing materials and equipment.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Framing, plywood and gypsum board sheet materials with closed joints and sealed

edges at intersections with existing surfaces; insulated to R-13, STC rating of 35 in accordance with

ASTM E90 and maximum Flame Spread Rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner occupied areas.

3.16 BARRICADES

A. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way

and for public access to existing building.

B. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage.

3.17 FENCING

A. Construct temporary fence as required for the protection of the Contractor's materials, tools and

equipment. Maintain fence during construction.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Commercial grade chain link fence, six feet in height..

C. Provide 6-foot high vehicular and gates with locks at access roads into site.

3.18 SECURITY BARRIERS

A. Provide security barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of

site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations

and demolition.




B. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent loss or damage caused by vandalism,

theft, burglary, pilferage or unexplained disappearance of property of the Owner or Contractor, whether

or not forming part of the Work, located within the limits of Work. The Contractor shall have full

responsibility for the security of such property located in such areas and shall reimburse the Owner for

any such loss, damage or injury, except such as may be directly caused by agents or employees of the

Owner.

C. Coordinate with Owner's security program.

3.19 PUBLIC SAFETY

A. At all times until final acceptance of Work by Owner, the Contractor shall protect Work and shall take

all precautions of preventing injuries to persons or damage to property on or about site.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations regarding safety of

persons or property or with regard to protecting them from damage, injury or loss and shall not load or

permit any part of Work to be placed so as to endanger safety of Work.

C. If Contractor constructs temporary bridges or provides temporary crossing of streams, Contractor's

responsibility for accidents shall include roadway and sidewalk approaches as well as structure of such

crossings.

D. Conduct work such that abutters shall have reasonable access to their property. Contractor shall be

responsible for providing such reasonable safe means of access to public way as Architect deems

essential. When it is necessary to leave materials and equipment upon highway or city or town way,

place them so as to cause least possible obstruction to drainage, pedestrian and other travel.

3.20 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property, and shall use

every precaution necessary to prevent damage thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to

public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect or misconduct in the execution

of the Work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by the Contractor, at his

expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing before the damage was done, or he shall make

good the damage in other manner acceptable to the Architect.

B. All sidewalks which are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be restored to their original

condition by the use of similar or comparable materials. All curbing shall be restored in a condition

equal to the original construction and in accordance with the best modern practice.

C. Along the location of this Work, all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery and other physical features

shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly workmanlike manner. All grass areas beyond the limits

of construction which have been damaged by the Contractor shall be regraded and seeded, subject to

the approval of the Architect.

D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury. The Contractor shall trim

all branches that are likely to be damaged because of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut

or removed without prior notification of the Architect. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs and roots of

trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting and painting according to approved methods, using only

approved tools and materials, subject to the approval of the Owner.

E. The protection, removal and replacement of existing physical features along the line of Work shall be a

part of the Work under the Contract, and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the unit

and/or lump sum prices established under the items in the proposal.




3.21 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all buildings, structures and

utilities, public or private, including poles, signs, services to buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes,

water pipes, hydrants, sewers, drains, electric and telephone cables and cesspools adjacent to trench

excavations, whether or not they are shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully support

and protect all such structures and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting from the

Contractor's operations shall be repaired by him at his expense, to the damaged items original

condition.

B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of underground structures and

utilities (including existing water, gas, electric and telephone services, drain lines and sewers).

Services to buildings shall be maintained, and all costs or charges resulting from damage thereto shall

be paid by the Contractor.

C. Protection and temporary removal and replacement of existing utilities and structures as described in

this section shall be a part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith shall be

included in the unit prices established in the proposal.

3.22 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall at all times protect excavations, trenches, new construction, old construction, all

job materials, apparatus and fixtures from rain, wind, snow, ice, dust, dirt, mud, groundwater, back-up

or leakage of sewers, drains or other piping, and from water of any other origin, and shall remove

promptly any accumulation of the above. He shall provide and operate all pumps, piping and other

equipment necessary to this end at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Thoroughly protect all completed work and all stored materials.

C. Provide boards, cloths, planks, waterproof paper, canvas or other approved protection and use as

necessary to prevent any damage.

D. Provide protective measures to prevent damage to lawns, trees and shrubs to remain after Project is

complete.

E. Protect, at end of each day's work, such Work that may be liable to damage by the elements.

F. Replace or rectify work or materials damaged by workmen, by the elements or by any other cause, to

the satisfaction of the Architect and at no additional expense to the Owner.

G. Repair streets, curbs, sidewalks, poles, grass, shrubs, trees or other existing site features, if disturbed by

building operations. Leave them in as good condition as they were before being disturbed.

H. Do not allow workmen, including those of any Subcontractor or supplier, to mark finish surfaces with

marking pens or other such devices that are not readily erasable.

I. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification

Sections.

J. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work

area to minimize damage.

K. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills and soffits of openings.

L. Protect finished floors, stairs and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage or movement of heavy

objects by protecting with durable sheet materials.




M. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary,

obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

N. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

3.23 OPEN EXCAVATIONS

A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary barricades, caution signs,

lights and other means to prevent accidents to persons and damage to property.

B. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for

accommodating travel by pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for access to private property

during construction shall be removed when no longer required.

C. The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular surrounding conditions, but shall always

be confined to the limits prescribed by the Architect and/or the local authorities having jurisdiction

over the Project.

D. If the excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic at any point, the Architect and/or

the local authority may require special construction procedures such as limiting the length of open

trench, prohibiting stacking excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not

remain open overnight.

E. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open trenches. All

trenches, excavated material, equipment or other obstacles which could be dangerous to the public shall

be well lighted at night.

3.24 LENGTH OF TRENCH TO BE OPENED, MAINTAINING PREMISES FREE FROM

OBSTRUCTIONS, CROSSOVERS, DIRECTIONAL SIGNS AND LIGHTS

A. The length of trench opened at any time, from the point where ground is being broken to completed

backfill and also the amount of space in streets or public and private lands occupied by equipment,

trench and supplies, shall not exceed the length or space considered reasonably necessary for

installation of Work.

B. In determining the length of open trench or spaces for equipment, materials, supplies and other

necessities, the Contractor will consider the nature of the lands or streets where work is being done,

types and methods of construction and equipment being used, inconvenience to the public or to private

parties, possible dangers and other proper matters.

C. All Work must be constructed with a minimum of inconvenience and danger to the public and all other

parties concerned. Trench excavations shall be completely backfilled at the end of each day, or

covered with steel traffic plates, as directed by the Architect and/or as required by authorities having

jurisdiction over the Project.

D. Whenever any trench obstructs pedestrian and vehicular traffic in or to any public street, private

driveway or property entrance, or on private driveway or property entrance, or on private property, the

Contractor shall take such means as may be necessary to maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic and

access.

E. Until such time as the Work may have attained sufficient strength to support backfill, or if for any other

reason it is not expedient to backfill the trench immediately, the Contractor shall construct and maintain

suitable plank crossings and bridges to carry essential traffic in or to the street, driveway or property in

question as specified or directed.

F. Suitable signs, lights and such required items to direct traffic shall be furnished and maintained by the

Contractor




G. The Contractor must keep streets and premises free from unnecessary obstructions, debris and all other

materials.

H. The Architect or local authority may, at any time, order all equipment, materials, surplus from

excavations, debris and all other materials lying outside that length of working space promptly

removed, and should the Contractor fail to remove such material within 24 hours after notice to remove

the same, the Architect or local authority may cause any part or all of such materials to be removed by

such persons as he may employ, at the Contractor's expense, and may deduct the cost thereof from

payment which may be or may become due to the Contractor under the Contract. In special cases,

where public safety urgently demands it, the Architect or local authority may cause such materials to be

removed without prior notice.

3.25 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

A. GRADE SITE TO DRAIN. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain

pumping equipment.

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil

erosion and accumulation of sediment in utility structures or other similar undesirable locations.

3.26 REMOVAL OF WATER AND PROTECTION FROM FLOODING

A. The Contractor shall construct and maintain, at no additional expense to the Owner, all pumps, drains,

well points or any other facility for the control and collection of groundwater and/or surface water and

provide all pumps and piping for the removal of water from the trenches and excavations so that all

trenches and excavations may be kept free from water at all times and so that all construction work may

be performed in the dry.

B. Any damage resulting from the failure of the dewatering operations of the Contractor and any damage

resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the areas of all work in a suitable dry condition

shall be repaired by the Contractor as directed by the Architect at no additional expense to the Owner.

C. The Contractor's pumping and dewatering operations shall be carried out in accordance with RIDEM

regulations and in such a manner as to prevent damage to existing structures and utilities and the

contract Work and so that no loss of ground will result from these operations.

D. Precautions shall be taken to protect existing and new Work from flooding during storms or from other

causes. Pumping shall be continuous where directed by the Architect to protect the Work and/or to

maintain satisfactory progress.

E. All pipelines or structures not stable against uplift during construction or prior to completion shall be

thoroughly braced or otherwise protected.

F. Water from the trenches, excavations and drainage operations shall be disposed of downstream of the

water course in such a manner as will neither cause public nuisance, nor cause injury to public health

nor to public or private property nor to the Work completed nor to the Work in progress.

G. No extra payment will be made for the removal of water, protection from flooding, drainage work,

diversion of existing water courses and such other work, but compensation therefore shall be

considered as having been included in the prices stipulated for the appropriate items of work as listed in

the bid.

H. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, maintain the flow of water courses during the progress of the

work.




3.27 SURFACE AND STORM WATER CONTROL

A. Provide for drainage of storm water and such water as may be applied or discharged on site in

performance of Work.

B. Ensure that drainage facilities are adequate to prevent damage to Work, site and adjacent property.

1. Clean, enlarge or supplement existing drainage channels to carry all increased runoff attributable

to operation.

2. Construct dikes to:

a. Divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except in natural channels).

b. Protect the Work.

c. Direct water to drainage channels or conduits.

3.28 DUST CONTROL

A. At no additional cost to the Owner, take measures to prevent unnecessary dust.

1. Keep earth surfaces subject to dusting moist with water only.

2. Cover dusty materials in piles or in transit to prevent blowing.

B. Protect buildings or operating facilities that may be affected adversely by dust.

C. Protect existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels or similar equipment with dust screens.

Include proper ventilation with dust screens.

3.29 NOISE CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall employ all reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise and ensure that noise

is appropriate for normal ambient sound levels in the work area during working hours. Where required

by agencies having jurisdiction, certain noise-producing work may have to be performed during

specified periods only. Noise control measures during normal work hours shall include but not be

limited to:

1. Operate machinery in a manner to cause least noise consistent with efficient performance of work.

2. Equip all construction machinery and vehicles with sound-muffling devices.

3. During construction adjacent to or near occupied buildings, erect screens or barriers to reduce

noise in building to limits in accordance with applicable codes. Conduct operations in such a

manner as to avoid unnecessary noise which might interfere with activities of building occupants.

B. When the Contractor’s work extends beyond normal working hours, the Contractor shall incorporate to

the complete satisfaction of the Owner and Architect, adequate noise prevention measures to insure

minimum noise impact on the surrounding areas. Noise prevention measures shall include, but not be

limited to:

1. Insulated enclosures.

2. Hospital grade silencers or mufflers.

3. Equipment modification.




4. Special equipment, as necessary to meet Town noise guidelines.

5. Any other noise prevention measures.

C. Should at any time the Owner and/or Architect determine that noise prevention measures are

inadequate, the Contractor shall suspend all such work in question until acceptable measures are

incorporated. Suspension of work due to inadequate noise prevention shall not be a cause for

additional cost to the Owner.

D. Prior to the start of any Work outside normal work hours, the Contractor shall submit a Noise Control

plan to the Owner and Architect for review. Noise Control plans shall be submitted for:

1. Night work.

2. All Pumping operations and work that may extend beyond normal work day.

3. Any other work as determined by the Architect that warrants special noise prevention measures.

E. All costs associated with noise control measures shall be considered part of the bid price for

appropriate work being completed.

3.30 POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Prevent pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris and other substances

resulting from construction activities.

1. Do not allow sanitary wastes to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers.

B. Do not allow sediment, debris or other substance to enter sanitary sewers and take measures to prevent

such materials from entering any drain or watercourse.

C. All earthwork, grading, moving of equipment, water control and other operations likely to create

silting, shall be planned and conducted so as to avoid pollution of any water courses. Water used for

any purpose that has become contaminated with oil, bitumen, salt or other pollutions shall be

discharged so as to avoid affecting nearby waters. Under no circumstances shall pollutants be

discharged directly into any water courses.

D. All concrete repair work requiring cleaning and removal of debris is to be contained as not to

contaminate the surrounding environment.

3.31 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide 8 foot wide x 6 foot high project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction,

painted, with exhibit lettering by professional sign maker, to Architect's design and colors.

B. List title of Project, names of Owner, Architect, professional sub-consultants and Contractor.

C. Erect on site at location established by Owner and/or Architect.

D. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.







PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Products, materials and equipment.

B. Transportation and handling.

C. Storage and protection.

D. Product options.

E. Substitutions.


A. Document 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures.

B. Document 00 22 13 – Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.

C. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring.

1.03 MANUFACTURED AND FABRICATED PRODUCTS

A. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices.

B. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable.

C. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer.

D. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.

E. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are

specifically reviewed by Architect.

F. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is

specified.

1.04 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK

A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.

B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified or as specifically reviewed by the Architect.




1.5 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When the Contract Documents require that installation of Work shall comply with manufacturer's

printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the

installation, as specified in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion.

C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions

and in conformity with specified requirements.

D. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with

Architect for further instructions.

E. Do not proceed with Work without clear instructions.

F. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or

installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by the Contract Documents.

1.06 CERTIFICATES OF CONFORMANCE AND MANUFACTURE

A. In addition to other requirements specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, as

specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, notarized certificates of conformance and manufacture that

all materials and/or equipment to be furnished under this Contract meet the specification requirements.

When directed, each shipment of material shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's notarized

certificates of conformance and manufacture. Unless otherwise specifically specified, all testing of

materials shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner.

B. Each manufacturer's certificate shall be endorsed or accompanied by the Contractor's certificate that the

material certified by the manufacturer will be the material incorporated in the Work.

1.7 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict

with Work and conditions at the site and also when two or more trades, contractors or suppliers are

involved.

B. Transport all materials and equipment on legally approved conveyances as required or recommended

by the respective manufacturer or supplier.

C. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging with

identifying labels intact and legible.

D. Receive and handle all materials and equipment, at the Project site, by conveyances or methods as

recommended by the respective manufacturer or supplier to prevent damage to products.

E. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract

Documents and reviewed submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.

F. Remove from the site any material or item of equipment damaged during the transportation or handling

process, and immediately replace at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.08 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and

legible.

B. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.




C. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.

D. Maintain all storage areas in a clean and orderly condition at all times.

1.09 EXTERIOR STORAGE

A. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids. Prevent soiling or staining. Cover

products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings and provide adequate

ventilation to avoid condensation.

B. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign

matter.

C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored

products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions and are free from damage or

deterioration.

D. Replace any material or item of equipment damaged due to inadequate storage or protection and

immediately replace at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.10 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and

subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.

1.11 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED BY REFERENCE STANDARDS OR BY DESCRIPTION ONLY: Any

product meeting those standards or description.

B. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED BY NAMING ONE OR MORE MANUFACTURERS: Products of

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED BY NAMING ONE OR MORE MANUFACTURERS WITH A

PROVISION FOR SUBSTITUTIONS: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not

named.

1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during the

bidding period to requirements specified in this Section.

B. Thereafter, Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of

the Contractor.

C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with

Contract Documents.

D. A REQUEST CONSTITUTES A REPRESENTATION THAT THE CONTRACTOR:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the

specified product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to

be complete, with no additional cost to Owner.

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.




5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities.

E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or

product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require

revision to the Contract Documents.

F. SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE

1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to

one proposed Substitution.

2. Submit shop drawings, product data and certified test results attesting to the proposed product

equivalence.

3. The Architect will notify the Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request.









MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION 01 71 13 - 1

SECTION 01 71 13 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Work necessary to move in personnel and equipment, set up Contractor's temporary offices, buildings,

facilities, utilities, prepare the site for construction and demobilize complete.


A. Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.

1.03 GENERAL

B. The limits of the site are shown on the Drawings. Areas designated for Contractor staging shall be

coordinated with the Owner in the field.

C. The limits of the Owner’s property is shown on the Drawings.

D. In the event additional space is required for the Contractor’s operations, the Contractor shall make its own

arrangements and pay for such additional space.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall obtain necessary permits, coordinate and provide all temporary facilities as required

for performing the work, including any facilities specified for the Owner’s or the Architect’s use.

2.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall coordinate for and obtain the necessary permits for connection to these services.

2.03 SECURITY FENCE

A. Construct temporary security fence as required for the protection of the Contractor's materials, tools and

equipment. Maintain fence during construction.

2.04 PARKING FACILITIES

A. Provide parking facilities for Contractor, Owner and Architect personnel working on the project, as

specified in Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls.



MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION 01 71 13 - 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LAYOUT

A. Set up construction facilities in a neat and orderly manner within the Contractor’s staging area and at a

location acceptable to the Architect. Accomplish all required work in accordance with applicable portions

of these Specifications. Confine operations within the general work limits shown.

3.02 DEMOBILIZATION

A. At the completion of the work and immediately prior to final inspection, clean the entire project area

removing all debris, soil and rubbish.

1. Should Contractor not remove rubbish or debris or not clean the facilities and site as specified above,

the Owner reserves the right to have final cleaning done by others at the sole expense of the

Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall:

1. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

2. Conduct final inspection of concealed spaces in preparation for Contract completion.

3. Remove from the property temporary structures and materials, equipment and appurtenances not

required as part of, or appurtenant to, the completed work.

4. Leave watercourse, gutters and ditches open and in condition satisfactory to Architect.







CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1

SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


A. Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination: Procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other

construction activities.

B. Section 02 41 13 - Selective Demolition: Demolition of selected portions of the building for

alterations.

C. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching

individual parts of the Work.

1. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to

Division 23 and 26 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and

patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. CUTTING AND PATCHING PROPOSAL: Submit a proposal describing procedures well in

advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed if the Owner requires approval of these

procedures before proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following information,

as applicable, in the proposal:

1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and

indicate why it cannot be avoided.

2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance

and other significant visual elements.

3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.

4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. UTILITIES: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List

utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how

long service will be disrupted.




6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit

details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original

structure.7. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive

the Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL WORK: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a

manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following

structural elements:

a. Foundation construction; Bearing and retaining walls.

b. Structural concrete; Structural steel and structural decking. Lintels; Miscellaneous structural

metals.

c. Stair systems.

d. Exterior wall construction.

e. Equipment supports; Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment.

B. OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a

manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch

operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or

decreased operational life or safety.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following

operating elements or safety related systems:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Air or smoke barriers; Water, moisture or vapor barriers.

c. Membranes and flashings.

d. Fire protection systems.

e. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.

f. Electrical wiring systems; Control systems; Communication systems.

C. VISUAL REQUIREMENTS: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in

occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic

qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting

and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. If possible, retain the original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch the exposed Work. If it is

impossible to engage the original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced

and specialized firm.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. EXISTING WARRANTIES: Replace, patch and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by

methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match

existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible, if identical materials are unavailable or cannot

be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be

performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective

action before proceeding.

1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching.

Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve

potential conflicts before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. TEMPORARY SUPPORT: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

B. PROTECTION: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Avoid cutting existing utilities serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until

provisions have been made to bypass them.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. GENERAL: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore

surfaces to their original condition.

B. CUTTING: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer;

comply with the original Installer's recommendations.

1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and

with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into

concealed surfaces.

3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carborundum saw or a

diamond-core drill.




4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 31 Sections where cutting and patching

requires excavating and backfilling.

5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services,

such as pipe or conduit before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting.

C. PATCHING: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerances.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining

construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair

floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and

appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if

necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire

unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat.

4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of

uniform appearance.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar,

oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying

paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.






Foster, Rhode Island 02825 AA16106

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 02 41 13 “Selective Demolition” for disposal of waste resulting from partial demolition of

building materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CONSTRUCTION WASTE: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes

packaging.

B. DEMOLITION WASTE: Building materials resulting from selective demolition operations.

C. DISPOSAL: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,

reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. RECYCLE: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for

reuse.

E. SALVAGE: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another

facility.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. GENERAL: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-

hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of

materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition

waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the

following:

HVAC Upgrades at The MET Center - Providence, RI Section 01 74 19 – BER Project #13104 Construction Waste Management & Disposal

HVAC Upgrades at The MET Center 01 74 19 - 2 Construction Documents Providence, RI January 24, 2014

1. Construction Waste:

a. Masonry. b. Lumber. c. Wood sheet materials. d. Wood trim. e. Metals. f. Roofing. g. Insulation. h. Piping. i. Electrical conduit. j. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph

above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice of Award.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for demolition waste. Include the following information:

1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes). 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes). 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes). 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes). 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL 01 74 19-2

Aharonian & Associates, Inc. - ArchitectsPonaganset High School - Athletic Facility Renovations North Scituate, RIOutdoor Bleachers & Concession StandMET Peace Street Building - HVAC Upgrades Providence, RI Justice & Unity Buildings - HVAC UpgradesCaptain Isaac Paine Elementary School - Mechanical System Renovations Foster, RI



F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2, signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met.

H. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator and refrigerant recovery technician.

I. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements, that employs a LEED-Accredited Professional, certified by the USGBC, as waste management coordinator.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of

containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and

disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-preparation and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form CWM-2 for site preparation waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste and Form CWM-4 for site preparation waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of





each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

2. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

5. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste and Form CWM-6 for site preparation waste. Include the following:

1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of

collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 5. Revenue from recycled materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of

waste. 9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Waste Management Coordinator: This can be the contractor’s project manager, superintendent or other qualified individual acceptable to the Engineer. Waste management coordinator shall be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.





2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

3.3 RECYCLING WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Contractor’s Option: As this construction site is very limited in area the use of a co-mingled collection system with off site separation is acceptable.

2. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

3. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

4. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

5. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 6. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.


Aharonian & Associates, Inc. - ArchitectsPonaganset High School - Athletic Facility Renovations North Scituate, RIOutdoor Bleachers & Concession StandMET Peace Street Building - HVAC Upgrades Providence, RI Justice & Unity Buildings - HVAC UpgradesCaptain Isaac Paine Elementay School - Mechanical System Renovations Foster, RI



2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

D. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 ATTACHMENTS

A. Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification.

B. Form CWM-2 for demolition waste identification.

C. Form CWM-3 for construction waste reduction work plan.

D. Form CWM-4 for demolition waste reduction work plan.

E. Form CWM-5 cost/revenue analysis of construction waste reduction work plan.

F. Form CWM-6 cost/revenue analysis of demolition waste reduction work plan.

G. Form CWM-7 for construction waste

H. Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.




Ma

ste

rSpe

c® -

Eva

lua

tions

05

/10

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T A

ND

DIS

PO

SA

L 01

7419

- E

7

FO

RM

CW

M-1

: C

ON

STR

UC

TIO

N W

AST

E I

DE

NT

IFIC

AT

ION

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

PO

INT

EST

. QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

MA

TE

RIA

LS

RE

CE

IVE

D*

(A)

EST

. WA

STE

- %

(B

)

TO

TA

L E

ST.

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F

WA

STE

* (C

= A

x B

)

EST

. VO

LU

ME

C

Y (

CM

) E

ST. W

EIG

HT

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

RE

MA

RK

S A

ND

A

SSU

MP

TIO

NS

Pac

kagi

ng:

Car

dboa

rd

Pac

kagi

ng:

Box

es

P

acka

ging

: P

last

ic S

heet

or

Film

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pol

ysty

rene

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pal

lets

or

Skid

s

Pac

kagi

ng:

Cra

tes

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pai

nt C

ans

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pla

stic

Pai

ls

Site

-Cle

arin

g W

aste

Mas

onry

or

CM

U

Lum

ber:

Cut

-Off

s

Lum

ber:

War

ped

Pie

ces

Ply

woo

d or

OSB

(sc

raps

)

Woo

d F

orm

s

Woo

d W

aste

Chu

tes

Woo

d T

rim

(cu

t-of

fs)

Met

als

Insu

lati

on

Roo

fing

Join

t Se

alan

t T

ubes

Gyp

sum

Boa

rd (

scra

ps)

Car

pet

and

Pad

(sc

raps

)

Pip

ing

Ele

ctri

cal C

ondu

it

Oth

er:

* In

sert

un

its o

f mea

sure

.

Ma

ste

rSpe

c® -

Eva

lua

tions

05

/10

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T A

ND

DIS

PO

SA

L 01

7419

- E

8

FO

RM

CW

M-2

: D

EM

OL

ITIO

N W

AST

E I

DE

NT

IFIC

AT

ION

MA

TE

RIA

L D

ESC

RIP

TIO

N

EST

. QU

AN

TIT

Y

EST

. VO

LU

ME

C

Y (

CM

) E

ST. W

EIG

HT

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

RE

MA

RK

S A

ND

ASS

UM

PT

ION

S

Asp

halt

ic C

oncr

ete

Pav

ing

Con

cret

e

B

rick

C

MU

L

umbe

r

P

lyw

ood

and

OSB

W

ood

Pan

elin

g

W

ood

Tri

m

Mis

cella

neou

s M

etal

s

St

ruct

ural

Ste

el

Rou

gh H

ardw

are

Insu

lati

on

Roo

fing

D

oors

and

Fra

mes

D

oor

Har

dwar

e

W

indo

ws

Gla

zing

A

cous

tica

l Tile

C

arpe

t

C

arpe

t P

ad

Dem

ount

able

Par

titi

ons

Equ

ipm

ent

Cab

inet

s

P

lum

bing

Fix

ture

s

P

ipin

g

P

ipin

g Su

ppor

ts a

nd H

ange

rs

Val

ves

Spri

nkle

rs

Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t

E

lect

rica

l Con

duit

C

oppe

r W

irin

g

L

ight

Fix

ture

s

L

amps

L

ight

ing

Bal

last

s

E

lect

rica

l Dev

ices

Sw

itch

gear

and

Pan

elbo

ards

T

rans

form

ers

Oth

er:

Ma

ste

rSpe

c® -

Eva

lua

tions

05

/10

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T A

ND

DIS

PO

SA

L 01

7419

- E

9

FO

RM

CW

M-3

: C

ON

STR

UC

TIO

N W

AST

E R

ED

UC

TIO

N W

OR

K P

LA

N

DIS

PO

SAL

ME

TH

OD

AN

D Q

UA

NT

ITY

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

PO

INT

TO

TA

L E

ST.

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

SA

LV

AG

ED

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

R

EC

YC

LE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

D

ISP

OSE

D T

O L

AN

DF

ILL

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

HA

ND

LIN

G A

ND

TR

AN

SPO

RT

ION

P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

Pac

kagi

ng:

Car

dboa

rd

Pac

kagi

ng:

Box

es

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pla

stic

She

et o

r F

ilm

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pol

ysty

rene

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pal

lets

or

Skid

s

Pac

kagi

ng:

Cra

tes

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pai

nt C

ans

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pla

stic

Pai

ls

Site

-Cle

arin

g W

aste

Mas

onry

or

CM

U

Lum

ber:

Cut

-Off

s

Lum

ber:

War

ped

Pie

ces

Ply

woo

d or

OSB

(sc

raps

)

Woo

d F

orm

s

Woo

d W

aste

Chu

tes

Woo

d T

rim

(cu

t-of

fs)

Met

als

Insu

lati

on

Roo

fing

Join

t Se

alan

t T

ubes

Gyp

sum

Boa

rd (

scra

ps)

Car

pet

and

Pad

(sc

raps

)

Pip

ing

Ele

ctri

cal C

ondu

it

Oth

er:

Ma

ste

rSpe

c® -

Eva

lua

tions

05

/10

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T A

ND

DIS

PO

SA

L 01

7419

- E

10

FO

RM

CW

M-4

: D

EM

OL

ITIO

N W

AST

E R

ED

UC

TIO

N W

OR

K P

LA

N

DIS

PO

SAL

ME

TH

OD

AN

D Q

UA

NT

ITY

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

PO

INT

TO

TA

L E

ST.

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

SA

LV

AG

ED

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

R

EC

YC

LE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

EST

. AM

OU

NT

D

ISP

OSE

D T

O

LA

ND

FIL

L

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

HA

ND

LIN

G A

ND

TR

AN

SPO

RT

ION

P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

Asp

halt

ic C

oncr

ete

Pav

ing

Con

cret

e

B

rick

C

MU

L

umbe

r

P

lyw

ood

and

OSB

W

ood

Pan

elin

g

W

ood

Tri

m

Mis

cella

neou

s M

etal

s

St

ruct

ural

Ste

el

Rou

gh H

ardw

are

Insu

lati

on

Roo

fing

D

oors

and

Fra

mes

D

oor

Har

dwar

e

W

indo

ws

Gla

zing

A

cous

tica

l Tile

C

arpe

t

C

arpe

t P

ad

Dem

ount

able

Par

titi

ons

Equ

ipm

ent

Cab

inet

s

P

lum

bing

Fix

ture

s

P

ipin

g

Su

ppor

ts a

nd H

ange

rs

Val

ves

Spri

nkle

rs

Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t

E

lect

rica

l Con

duit

C

oppe

r W

irin

g

L

ight

Fix

ture

s

L

amps

L

ight

ing

Bal

last

s

E

lect

rica

l Dev

ices

Sw

itch

gear

and

Pan

elbo

ards

T

rans

form

ers

Oth

er:

Ma

ste

rSpe

c® -

Eva

lua

tions

05

/10

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T A

ND

DIS

PO

SA

L 01

7419

- E

11

FO

RM

CW

M-5

: C

OST

/RE

VE

NU

E A

NA

LY

SIS

OF

CO

NST

RU

CT

ION

WA

STE

RE

DU

CT

ION

WO

RK

PL

AN

MA

TE

RIA

LS

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F

MA

TE

RIA

LS

(VO

L. O

R

WE

IGH

T)

(A)

EST

. CO

ST O

F

DIS

PO

SAL

(B)

TO

TA

L E

ST.

CO

ST O

F

DIS

PO

SAL

(C =

A x

B)

RE

VE

NU

E F

RO

M

SAL

VA

GE

D

MA

TE

RIA

LS

(D)

RE

VE

NU

E F

RO

M

RE

CY

CL

ED

M

AT

ER

IAL

S (E

)

LA

ND

FIL

L

TIP

PIN

G F

EE

S A

VO

IDE

D

(F)

HA

ND

LIN

G A

ND

T

RA

NSP

OR

TA

TIO

N

CO

STS

AV

OID

ED

(G

)

NE

T C

OST

SA

VIN

GS

OF

W

OR

K P

LA

N

(H =

D+E

+F+G

)

Pac

kagi

ng:

Car

dboa

rd

Pac

kagi

ng:

Box

es

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pla

stic

She

et o

r F

ilm

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pol

ysty

rene

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pal

lets

or

Skid

s

Pac

kagi

ng:

Cra

tes

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pai

nt C

ans

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pla

stic

Pai

ls

Site

-Cle

arin

g W

aste

Mas

onry

or

CM

U

Lum

ber:

Cut

-Off

s

Lum

ber:

War

ped

Pie

ces

Ply

woo

d or

OSB

(sc

raps

)

Woo

d F

orm

s

Woo

d W

aste

Chu

tes

Woo

d T

rim

(cu

t-of

fs)

Met

als

Insu

lati

on

Roo

fing

Join

t Se

alan

t T

ubes

Gyp

sum

Boa

rd (

scra

ps)

Car

pet

and

Pad

(sc

raps

)

Pip

ing

Ele

ctri

cal C

ondu

it

Oth

er:

Ma

ste

rSpe

c® -

Eva

lua

tions

05

/10

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T A

ND

DIS

PO

SA

L 01

7419

- E

12

FO

RM

CW

M-6

: C

OST

/RE

VE

NU

E A

NA

LY

SIS

OF

DE

MO

LIT

ION

WA

STE

RE

DU

CT

ION

WO

RK

PL

AN

MA

TE

RIA

LS

TO

TA

L Q

UA

NT

ITY

O

F M

AT

ER

IAL

S (V

OL

. OR

WE

IGH

T)

(A)

EST

. CO

ST O

F

DIS

PO

SAL

(B)

TO

TA

L E

ST.

CO

ST O

F

DIS

PO

SAL

(C =

A x

B)

RE

VE

NU

E F

RO

M

SAL

VA

GE

D

MA

TE

RIA

LS

(D)

RE

VE

NU

E F

RO

M

RE

CY

CL

ED

M

AT

ER

IAL

S (E

)

LA

ND

FIL

L

TIP

PIN

G F

EE

S A

VO

IDE

D

(F)

HA

ND

LIN

G A

ND

T

RA

NSP

OR

TA

TIO

N

CO

STS

AV

OID

ED

(G

)

NE

T C

OST

SA

VIN

GS

OF

W

OR

K P

LA

N

(H =

D+E

+F+G

)

Asp

halt

ic C

oncr

ete

Pav

ing

Con

cret

e

B

rick

C

MU

L

umbe

r

P

lyw

ood

and

OSB

W

ood

Pan

elin

g

W

ood

Tri

m

Mis

cella

neou

s M

etal

s

St

ruct

ural

Ste

el

Rou

gh H

ardw

are

Insu

lati

on

Roo

fing

D

oors

and

Fra

mes

D

oor

Har

dwar

e

W

indo

ws

Gla

zing

A

cous

tica

l Tile

C

arpe

t

C

arpe

t P

ad

Dem

ount

able

Par

titi

ons

Equ

ipm

ent

Cab

inet

s

P

lum

bing

Fix

ture

s

P

ipin

g

Su

ppor

ts a

nd H

ange

rs

Val

ves

Spri

nkle

rs

Mec

h. E

quip

men

t

E

lect

rica

l Con

duit

C

oppe

r W

irin

g

L

ight

Fix

ture

s

L

amps

L

ight

ing

Bal

last

s

E

lect

rica

l Dev

ices

Sw

itch

gear

and

P

anel

boar

ds

Tra

nsfo

rmer

s

O

ther

:

Ma

ste

rSpe

c® -

Eva

lua

tions

05

/10

C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

WA

ST

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T A

ND

DIS

PO

SA

L 01

7419

- E

13

FO

RM

CW

M-7

: C

ON

STR

UC

TIO

N W

AST

E R

ED

UC

TIO

N P

RO

GR

ESS

RE

PO

RT

Q

UA

NT

ITY

OF

WA

STE

SA

LV

AG

ED

Q

UA

NT

ITY

OF

WA

STE

RE

CY

CL

ED

MA

TE

RIA

L C

AT

EG

OR

Y

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

PO

INT

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(A)

EST

IMA

TE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

AC

TU

AL

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(B)

EST

IMA

TE

D

TO

NS

(TO

NN

ES)

AC

TU

AL

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(C)

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y O

F

WA

STE

R

EC

OV

ER

ED

T

ON

S (T

ON

NE

S)

(D =

B +

C)

TO

TA

L

QU

AN

TIT

Y

OF

WA

STE

R

EC

OV

ER

ED

%

(D

/ A

x 1

00)

Pac

kagi

ng:

Car

dboa

rd

Pac

kagi

ng:

Box

es

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pla

stic

She

et o

r F

ilm

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pol

ysty

rene

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pal

lets

or

Skid

s

Pac

kagi

ng:

Cra

tes

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pai

nt C

ans

Pac

kagi

ng:

Pla

stic

Pai

ls

Site

-Cle

arin

g W

aste

Mas

onry

or

CM

U

Lum

ber:

Cut

-Off

s

Lum

ber:

War

ped

Pie

ces

Ply

woo

d or

OSB

(sc

raps

)

Woo

d F

orm

s

Woo

d W

aste

Chu

tes

Woo

d T

rim

(cu

t-of

fs)

Met

als

Insu

lati

on

Roo

fing

Join

t Se

alan

t T

ubes

Gyp

sum

Boa

rd (

scra

ps)

Car

pet

and

Pad

(sc

raps

)

Pip

ing

Ele

ctri

cal C

ondu

it

Oth

er:






STARTING AND ADJUSTING 01 75 00 - 1

SECTION 01 75 00

STARTING AND ADJUSTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Starting systems.

B. Demonstration and instructions.

C. Testing, adjusting and balancing.


A. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports.

B. Section 01 77 99 – Closeout Procedures and Submittals: System operation and maintenance data and

extra materials.

C. Division 23 Sections pertaining to HVAC systems.

D. Division 26 Sections pertaining to Electrical systems.

1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Architect and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation,

belt tension, control sequence or other conditions which may cause damage.

D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the

equipment or system manufacturer.

E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractors' personnel in accordance with

manufacturers' instructions.

G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to

start-up and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 45 00 that equipment or system has been properly

installed and is functioning correctly.


Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School – Mechanical System renovations Foster, RI

STARTING AND ADJUSTING 01 75 00 - 2

1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of

final inspection.

B. Demonstrate Project equipment, instructed by qualified Contractor’s representative who is

knowledgeable about the Project.

C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within

six months.

D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with

Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance and

shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location.

F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data

becomes apparent during instruction.

G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in

individual Sections.

1.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. Contractor will appoint and employ services of an independent firm, acceptable to the Owner and

Architect, to perform testing, adjusting and balancing. Contractor shall pay for services specified in

Section 01 21 00.

B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Division 23 Sections.

C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect indicating observations and results of

tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the

requirements of the Contract Documents.









CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AND SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 1

SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AND SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Closeout Procedures.

B. Requirements.

C. Substantial Completion.

D. Final Review.

E. Additional Reviews.

F. Submittals.

G. Final Adjustment of Accounts.

H. Final Application for Payment.

I. Final Cleaning.

J. Adjusting.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data.

L. Warranties.

M. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.


A. Section 01 21 00 – Allowances.

B. Section 01 75 00 - Starting and Adjusting: System start-up, testing, adjusting and balancing.

C. Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents.

1.03 REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements stated in conditions of the Contract and in specifications for administrative

procedures in closing out the Work.

1.04 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION




A. When Contractor considers the work is Substantially Complete, he shall submit to the Architect:

1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is Substantially Complete.

2. A list of items to be completed or corrected.

B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Architect will review the Work to determine the

status of completion.

C. Should Architect determine that the Work is not Substantially Complete:

1. Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons therefor.

2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send out another written notice of

substantial completion to the Architect.

3. Architect will again review the work.

D. When Architect concurs that the Work is Substantially Complete, he will:

1. Prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, accompanied by Contractor's list of items to be

completed or corrected, as verified and amended by the Architect.

2. Submit the certificate to Owner, Contractor and manufacturer for their written acceptance of the

responsibilities assigned to them in the certificate.

1.05 FINAL REVIEW

A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed.

2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.

4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are

operational.

5. Work is completed and ready for final review.

B. Architect will make final review to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after

receipt of such certification.

C. Should Architect consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:

1. Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work.

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send out another

written certification to Architect that the work is complete.

3. Architect will again review the Work.

4. Should Architect consider that the Work is still incomplete or defective, all subsequent reviews

shall be considered as Additional Reviews, subject to the provisions listed in 1.06 below.

D. When the Architect finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents and that all Punch

List items have been accomplished to his satisfaction, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout

submittals.




1.06 FEES FOR ADDITIONAL REVIEWS

A. Should Architect perform additional reviews due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of

status of completion made by the Contractor:

1. Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services.

2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the Contractor.

1.07 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ARCHITECT

A. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA: Submit documentation as described in 1.12 below.

B. WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES AND BONDS: Submit documentation as described in 1.13 below.

C. SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS FOR OWNER: Submit documentation as

described in 1.14 below.

D. Contractor's affidavit of payment of debts and claims.

E. Contractor’s affidavit of release of liens.

F. Consent of surety to final payment.

G. Certificate of insurance for products and completed operations.

H. PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS: Submit documentation as described in Section 01 78 39.

1.08 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS

A. Submit a final statement of accounting to Architect.

B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum:

1. The original Contract Sum.

2. Additions and deductions resulting from:

a. Previous Change Orders, allowances and unit prices.

b. Deductions for uncorrected work, liquidated damages and re-inspection payments.

c. Other adjustments.

3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.

4. Previous payments.

5. Sum remaining due.

C. Architect will prepare a final change order reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract sum that

were not previously made by Change Orders.


A. Contractor shall submit the final application for payment in accordance with procedures and

requirements stated in the General Conditions.




1.10 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.

B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and

foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum resilient, carpeted and soft surfaces.

C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.

D. Replace filters of operating equipment.

E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems.

F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site.

1.11 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 5 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be

returned with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final

submittal.

B. Submit Operation and Maintenance Data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side-ring

capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers. Prepare binder covers with printed title

"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project and subject matter of

binder when multiple binders are required.

C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described

below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. CONTENTS: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description

identified, type on 24 pound white paper.

E. PART 1: Directory, listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of Architect, Engineers,

Contractor, Subcontractors and major equipment suppliers.

F. PART 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification

section. For each category, identify names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and

suppliers. Identify the following:

1. Significant design criteria.

2. List of equipment.

3. Parts list for each component.

4. Operating instructions.

5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.

6. Maintenance instructions for all finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials

and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

G. PART 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:




1. Shop drawings and product data.

2. Air and water balance reports.

3. Certificates.

4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

H. Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after final inspection.

1.13 WARRANTIES

A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.

1. In addition to the Warranty and Guarantee Requirements of the General Conditions, provide all

other guarantees, bonds, affidavits and certifications required throughout the Project Manual.

B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers.

C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side-ring binder with durable plastic cover.

D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.

E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within

ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

1.14 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual

specification Sections.

B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by the Owner; obtain receipt prior to final

payment.









PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


1. Project Record Documents required for Contract closeout.


A. Section 01 77 99 – Closeout Procedures and Submittals.

1.03 REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of:

1. Drawings

2. Specifications

3. Addenda

4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract

5. Architect field orders or written instructions

6. Reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples

7. Field test records

B. The Contractor will be required to furnish, at no additional expense to the Owner, the services of a

surveyor and/or Engineer registered in the state where the project is located and under whose direction

shall be obtained and recorded all surveys, measurements and such other data required for the

determination of the as-built records of the construction of all site work.

1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES

A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction.

B. Provide locked file cabinet for storage of documents and samples.

C. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI/CSC format.

D. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use Record

Documents for construction purposes.

E. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect and Owner.




1.05 MARKING DEVICES

A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by Architect.

1.06 RECORDING

A. Label each document "Project Record" in neat large printed letters.

B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.

C. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.

D. DRAWINGS: Principal dimensions, elevations and other data as required shall be recorded for all

work, such as:

1. Deviations of any nature made during construction.

2. Location of underground utilities.

3. Field changes of dimension and detail.

4. Changes made by field order or by Change Order.

5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

E. The marked-up prints shall be inspected weekly by the Architect and shall be corrected immediately if

found either inaccurate or incomplete.

F. SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA: Legibly mark each Section to record:

1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment

actually installed.

2. Changes made by field order or by Change Order.

1.07 FINAL MEASUREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel and equipment for taking final measurements for

quantities and Record Documents.

1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. At the completion of the Project, the Record Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for final

review and comment.

B. The Contractor shall correct, amplify and do all other work as may be required by the Architect to

complete the drawings in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Upon approval, the Contractor shall provide a final Record Drawing set to the Architect on

heavyweight bond and electronic format (PDF). The bond and electronic version shall be submitted to

the Owner by the Architect.

1.09 SUBMITTAL

A. At Contract close-out, deliver Record Documents to Architect for the Owner.

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:




1. Date.

2. Project title and number.

3. Contractor's name and address.

4. Title and number of each record document.

5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)







NE-CHPS Sustainable Design Requirements 01 81 13-1

SECTION 01 81 13

NE-CHPS SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this section..

B. Northeast Collaborative for High Performance Schools (NE-CHPS) New Construction and Major

Renovations Version 3.0 applies to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general requirements and procedures for achieving NE-CHPS credits.

B. Sustainable Design Intent: Comply with project requirements intended to achieve NE-CHPS credits,

measured and documented according to the NE-CHPS Rating.

1. Refer to NE CHPS Scorecard

2. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements

C. Contractor is responsible for compliance with and completion of all required documentation for all the

following NE-CHPS Requirements:

1. Indoor Environmental Quality EQ7.0: Low Emitting Materials.

2. Water WE1.0: Minimum reduction in indoor potable water use.

3. Material and Waste Management MW 2.0: Minimum Construction site waste management.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect the work of this Section. Other Specification

Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but not limited to:

1. Section 017419: Construction Waste management and Disposal.

2. Section 099100: Painting

3. Section 224200: Plumbing Fixtures

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes solid wastes, such as building materials, packaging,

rubbish, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations.

A construction waste management plan is to be provided by the Contractor as defined in section

017419.

B. NE-CHPS: Northeast Collaborative for High Performance Schools New Construction and Major

Renovations Versions 3.0.


Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School – Mechanical System Renovations Foster , RI

NE-CHPS Sustainable Design Requirements 01 81 13-2

C. Sealant: Any material that fills and seal gaps between other materials.

D. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s): Any compound of carbon, excluding carbon monoxide, carbon

dioxide, carbon acid, metallic carbides or barbonates, and ammonium carbonate, which participates in

atmospheric photochemical reaction. Compounds that have negligible photochemical reactivity, listed

in EPA 40 CFR 51, 100(s), are also excluded from this regulatory definition.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. GENERAL: Additional Sustainable Design Submittal requirements are included in other section of the

Specification

B. SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS:

1. Interior Paints and Coatings: Submittal for all field-applied paints and coatings, which have a

potential impact on indoor air, must include manufacturer’s MSDS’s or other Product data

highlighting VOC Content.


A. Preconstruction Meeting: After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work,

schedule and conduct meeting with Owner, Engineer, and all Subcontractors to discuss the

Construction Waste Management Plan, the required Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)

Management Plan, and all other Sustainable Design Requirements. The purpose of this meeting is to

develop a mutual understanding of the Project’s Sustainable Design Requirements and coordination of

the Contractor’s management of these requirements.

B. Construction Job Conferences: the status of compliance with the Sustainable Design Requirements of

these specifications will be an agenda item at all regular job meetings conducted during the course of

work at the site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – (Not Used)

PART 3 EXECUTION – (Not Used)

310

Current Phase:

Website:

City: Zip:

Phone: E-mail:

Notes:

Project Manager (Signature)

Name, Title, Date (Please print)

Criteria Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Po

ints

Po

ssib

le

Po

ints

Tar

gete

d

Po

ints

Cla

ime

d

Re

spo

nsi

ble

Te

am

Me

mb

er

Re

ady

for

De

sign

Re

vie

w

Re

ady

for

Co

nst

ruct

ion

Re

vie

w

Pe

rfo

rman

ce R

evi

ew

Re

qu

ire

me

nts

Re

ady

for

Pe

rfo

rman

ce R

evi

ew

Documentation

II 1.0 Integrated Design P 3 CD A

II 1.1 Enhanced Integrated Design 2 A

II 2.1 District Level Commitment 1 A

II 3.1 School Master Plan 1 A

II 4.1 High Performance Transition Plan 1 A A

II 5.0 Educational Display P 1 CD A

II 5.1 Demonstration Area 1 CD A

II 6.1 Educational Integration 2 A A

II 7.1 Climate Change Action / Carbon Footprint Reporting 3 A A

II 8.0 Crime Prevention through Environmental Design P 2 A A

II 9.1 Innovation 4 VARIES

Subtotal

OM 1.0 Facility Staff and Occupant Training P 3 CD A

OM 2.1 Post Occupancy Transition 2 A A

OM 3.0 Performance Benchmarking P 2 A A A

OM 4.1 High Performance Operations 4 A A A

OM 5.1 Systems Maintenance Plan P 1 A

OM 6.0 Indoor Environmental Management Plan P 2 A

OM 7.1 Green Cleaning 2 A A

OM 8.0 Integrated Pest Management P 1 PS A

OM 9.0 Anti-Idling Measures P 1 CD A

OM 10.1 Green Power 2 A

OM 11.0 ENERGY STAR Equipment and Appliances P 2 A

OM 12.1 Computerized Maintenance Management System 1 PS A

Subtotal

EQ 1.0 HVAC Design - ASHRAE 62.1 P 8 PS

EQ 1.1 Enhanced Filtration 2 CD A

EQ 1.2 Dedicated Outdoor Air System 3 CD A

EQ 2.1 Polluntant and Chemical Source Control P 2 CD A A

EQ 3.0 Outdoor Moisture Management P 1 CD A

EQ 4.1 Ducted Returns 2 CD

EQ 5.1 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management 5 CD A

EQ 5.2 Construction Moisture Management 1 CD A

EQ 6.1 Post Construction Indoor Air Quality 1 CD A

EQ 7.0 Low Emitting Materials P 2 PS CD PS A

EQ 7.1 Additional Low Emitting Materials 5 PS CD PS A

EQ 8.1 Low Radon 1 CD A

EQ 9.1 Thermal Comfort - ASHRAE 55 4 PS CD

EQ 10.1 Individual Controllability 1 CD A

EQ 10.2 Controllability of Systems 1 CD A

EQ 11.0 Daylighting: Glare Protection P 4 CD A A

EQ 11.1 Daylight Availability 5 PS CD A A

EQ 12.0 Views P 3 PS CD

EQ 13.1 Electric Lighting Performance 3 CD A

EQ 13.2 Superior Electric Lighting Performance 5 CD A

EQ 14.0 Acoustical Performance P 7 PS CD A A A

EQ 14.1 Enhanced Acoustical Performance 6 PS CD A A A

EQ 15.1 Low-EMF Wiring 1 CD A

EQ 15.2 Low-EMF Best Practices 2 CD A A

EQ 16.1 High Intensity Fluorescent Fixtures 1 CD A

Subtotal

Operations & Metrics

Indoor Environmental Quality

Name, Title, Date (Please print)

Registered Principal Architect (Signature)

Approximate Square Feet:

Student Capacity:

School Contact:

Expected Completion:

School Name:

De

sign

Re

vie

w

Re

qu

ire

me

nts

Co

nst

ruct

ion

Re

vie

w

Re

qu

ire

me

nts

VARIES VARIES

Integration and Innovation

Use this scorecard to track expected scores. Note that prerequisites have points associated with them even though they are required. This enables project teams to talk more meaningfully about the

effort being put into each section of the Criteria. Prerequisite point columns are also highlighted for reference. Mark each credit as ready for review by using the appropriate column for each phase of the

review.

Key: P - Prerequisite; PS - CHPS Plan Sheet Required; CD - Construction Documents Required; A - Attachment Required

Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS)

Project Scorecard: NE-CHPS Version 3.0

State:

VerificationIs this the final CHPS Scorecard?

School Address:

School District:

1


160 Foster Center Road Foster RI 02825

311

EE 1.0 Energy Performance P 6 CD A

EE 1.1 Superior Energy Performance 40 CD A

EE 2.1 Zero Net Energy Capable 3 CD

EE 3.0 Commissioning P 4 CD A A

EE 3.1 Additional Commissioning Qualifications 1 CD A A

EE 3.2 Building Envelope Commissioning 1 CD A A

EE 3.3 Enhanced Commissioning 1 CD A A A

EE 4.0 Enviornmentally Preferable Refrigerants P 1 CD

EE 5.1 Energy Management System 2 CD

EE 5.2 Advanced Energy Management System and Submetering 2 CD

EE 6.1 Natural Ventilation and Energy Conservation Interlocks 2 PS CD A

EE 7.0 Local Energy Efficiency Incentive and Assistance P 2 A A

EE 8.1 Variable Air Volume Systems 1 CD

EE 9.1 Renewable Energy Performance Monitoring 1 CD A

EE 10.1 Electric Vehicle Charging 1 CD A

Subtotal

WE 1.0 Minimum Reduction in Indoor Potable Water Use P 5 PS CD A

WE 2.1 Reduce Potable Water Use for Sewage Conveyance 3 PS CD A

WE 3.1 Irrigation and Exterior Water Budget - Use Reduction 3 CD A

WE 4.1 Reduce Potable Water Use for Non-Recreational Landscaping 3 CD A A

WE 5.1 Recuce Potable Water Use for Recreational Landscaping 2 CD A

WE 6.0 Irrigation Systems Commissioning P 1 A A

WE 7.1 Rainwater Collection and Storage 2 PS CD

WE 8.1 Water Management System 2 CD A

Subtotal

SS 1.0 Site Selection P 2 A

SS 2.1 Enviornmentally Sensitive Land 3 PS CD A

SS 3.1 Minimize Site Distrubance 1 PS CD

SS 4.1 Construction Site Runoff Control and Sedimentation 1 CD A

SS 5.1 Poste Construction Stormwater Management 1 PS CD A

SS 6.1 Central location 2 PS A

SS 7.1 Located Near Public Transportation 1 A

SS 8.1 Joint-Use of Facilities 1 CD A

SS 9.1 Human-Powered Transportation 2 PS CD A

SS 10.1 Reduce Heat Islands - Landscaping and Sites 1 CD

SS 11.1 Reduce Heat Islands - Cool Roofs and Green Walls 1 CD A

SS 12.1 Avoid Light Pollution and Unnecessary Lighting 2 CD A

SS 13.1 School Gardens 1 CD A A

SS 14.1 Use Locally Native Plants for Landscape 1 PS CD

SS 15.0 Site and Building Best Practices P 2 PS CD A

Subtotal

MW 1.0 Storage and Collection of Recyclables P 2 CD A

MW 2.0 Minimum Construction Site Waste Management P 2 CD A

MW 2.1 Construction Site Waste Management 2 CD A

MW 3.1 Single Attribute - Recycled Content 2 CD PS A

MW 4.1 Single Attribute - Rapidly Renewable Materials 1 CD PS A

MW 5.1 Single Attribute - Certified Wood 1 CD PS A

MW 6.1 Single Attribute - Materials Reuse 1 CD PS A

MW 7.1 Multi-Attribute Materials Selection 2 PS CD PS A

MW 8.1 Building Reuse - Exterior 2 CD PS A

MW 9.1 Building Reuse - Interior 1 CD PS A

MW 10.1 Health Product Related Information Reporting 1 CD PS A

MW 11.1 Locally Produced Materials 2 CD PS A

Subtotal

250Total

Energy

Water

Sites

Materials and Waste Management






GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIRMENTS 01 91 13-1

SECTION 01 91 13

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section presents general commissioning requirements for the Captain Isaac Paine Elementary

School Mechanical System Renovations project to be met in addition to specific commissioning

requirements for work on the commissioned systems in Divisions 23 and 26.

B. The Owner requires participation in comprehensive commissioning of selected systems, assemblies,

and components. This section includes general requirements that apply to all commissioned

systems, assemblies, or components. Additional specific requirements are found in Divisions 23

and 26. Systems and components to be commissioned on this project are listed in Paragraph 1.6

below.

C. This section includes the following Appendices:

“Appendix A” – Sample Training Agenda

“Appendix B” – Sample Commissioning Checklists

“Appendix C” – Sample Commissioning Test Procedures

“Appendix D” – Sample Component Commissioning Schedule

D. All requirements on drawings and in the general provisions of the Contract, including but not

limited to the Agreement and General Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED COMMISSIONING SECTIONS

A. Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC

B. Section 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A. BOD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, operational

performance criteria and product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable

regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative

descriptions and lists of specific items required to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements.

B. Commissioning Authority: The reviewing entity employed directly by the Owner to verify that the

Owner’s Project Requirements are met, and to assist the Owner by providing quality improvement

services.




C. Commissioning Issues Log: The primary document for recording and communicating issues

identified through the commissioning process.

D. Design Professional: The design professional or professionals of record responsible for sealing the

construction documents, permit applications and for consultations with the authority having

jurisdiction at various stages of plan review and construction. They are referred to separately when

they perform distinct functions with respect to commissioning, such as considering commissioning

comments during formal review of product data and other submittals.

E. FPT: Functional Performance Testing, including testing of individual components, entire systems,

and intersystem performance.

F. O&M: Operations and Maintenance.

G. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a

project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals,

measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting

information. The commissioning process verifies and documents whether the final built

commissioned systems in the project meet the OPR.

H. PFC: Pre-Functional Checklists developed by Stephen Turner Inc. for completion by Trade

Contractors.

I. Submittals: Documents required by the contract documents including product data and other formal

submittals.

J. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or

separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

K. Systems Checklists: Checklists developed and completed by Stephen Turner Inc.

L. TAB: Test, Adjust and Balance.

1.4 COMMISSIONING PROCESS

A. For this project, Stephen Turner Inc. is the commissioning authority contracted directly by the

Owner to lead the commissioning process. The design team, construction manager, and contractors,

along with the Owner (Project Manager, Users, and Operations), form the commissioning team.

B. The commissioning process, including Functional Performance Tests, is separate from and does not

reduce or replace the requirements of the formal acceptance process by the Owner and Design

Professional or the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. Stephen Turner Inc. will

accept documented testing performed as part of the formal acceptance process that is witnessed by

the Owner, Design Professional or the authorities having jurisdiction in order to avoid duplicate

testing where possible.

C. Sampling

1. Generally, representative samples of the work will be periodically verified by Stephen Turner

Inc. as an indicator of the quality of the work.

2. This sampling method will be used as a quality check for equipment, piping, redline or record

drawings, etc. The intent is that commissioning verification occurs when each aspect of

commissioned work first begins, so that any resulting changes required are made after only a

small portion of the work is put in place, not all of it.

D. Problem Solving




1. Stephen Turner Inc. will suggest solutions to issues but does not assume the burden of

responsibility to solve and correct issues that are found.

E. Communication During Construction Phase

1. Coordination of Trade Contractor participation in the commissioning team is through the

Construction Manager. Comments, observations, etc. resulting from commissioning activities

will be recorded in the Commissioning Issues Log and relayed directly to the responsible party

whenever possible, with copies to the Owner, Design Professional and Construction Manager,

as applicable. This includes submittal comments, site observation reports, test reports, etc.

This direct communication approach is intended to avoid delays from traditional remote paper

exchanges, will encourage dialogue and discussion of options and alternatives, and generally

maintain an atmosphere of cooperation and quality.

2. Stephen Turner Inc. is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with

codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating, or construction management.

3. Stephen Turner Inc. may assist with problem solving, non-conformance or deficiencies, but

ultimately that responsibility resides with the construction manager.

4. The primary role of Stephen Turner Inc. is to develop and coordinate the execution of the

commissioning plan including testing, to observe and document performance, and to document

whether systems are functioning in accordance with the documented Owner’s Project

Requirements.

5. Stephen Turner Inc. does not direct or redirect the Construction Manager or the Trade

Contractors in their contracted work, and no communication shall be construed as such

direction.

6. Stephen Turner Inc. is not authorized to:

a. Release, revoke, alter or expand requirements of Contract Documents.

b. Approve or accept any portion of the work.

c. Perform any duties of the Construction Manager, its consultants, or its contractors.

F. Response Times

1. Timeliness in delivering information or forming responses to Stephen Turner Inc., and back,

are essential to providing the built project to the Owner on time, as well as to implementing

commissioning.

2. The following are guidelines established to meet this objective, and should be followed unless

there are extenuating circumstances – in which case the delay shall be explained to each party

in advance of the delay. Failure to avoid delays means that the delayed work product may not

be incorporated into the commissioning reporting process, requiring a separate resolution

process with the Owner without commissioning assistance.

a. Construction schedule by the Construction Manager incorporating separate activities for

commissioning activities, as a minimum including pre-functional checklists, equipment

start-ups, controls completion, TAB, and functional performance testing.

1) Within 10 business days after award of Division 23 and 26 work.

2) Appendix C shows a typical component-level commissioning schedule by Stephen

Turner Inc. with the dependencies between construction activities and

commissioning activities.

b. Project-specific comments from Stephen Turner Inc. on how commissioning activities

and dates are incorporated into the schedule:

1) Within 10 business days after receiving component schedule for Division 23 and 26

work and updates throughout project.

c. Submittal comments by Stephen Turner Inc.:




1) 7 business days from date of receipt by Stephen Turner Inc. for typical product

submittals; 15 business days for Controls, TAB, energy recovery equipment, and

other selected complex submittal packages. Stephen Turner Inc. will identify other

selected complex submittal packages in advance if provided with the submittal

register.

2) For this paragraph’s purposes, “receive” means electronic or hard copy in the hands

of Stephen Turner Inc.

d. Approved submittals to Stephen Turner Inc.:

1) Within 5 business days of receipt by construction manager.

e. Commissioning checklists by Stephen Turner Inc. to Construction Manager:

1) 10 business days before scheduled delivery of commissioned equipment, provided

that the schedule and the approved submittals have been provided to Stephen Turner

Inc. 20 business days in advance.

f. Delivery of draft O&M manuals for Stephen Turner Inc. to review:

1) 30 business days after approved submittals.

g. Delivery of final O&M manuals and training materials to Stephen Turner Inc.:

1) 10 business days prior to each scheduled owner training session.

h. Delivery of record drawings marked to as-built conditions to Stephen Turner Inc.:

1) Prior to each scheduled training session.

i. Delivery of final as-built drawings to Stephen Turner Inc.:

1) Within 20 business days of start of warranty period(s).

j. Commissioning Issues Log entries by Stephen Turner Inc.:

1) Within 5 business days after observation.

k. Response by Construction Manager and Trade Contractor to commissioning Issues Log

entries and field comments:

1) 5 business days after receipt of Issues Log where other parties are not involved, or

at the next commissioning meeting.

l. Delivery of functional performance testing procedures by Stephen Turner Inc. to

Construction Manager:

1) 20 business days before scheduled testing provided that schedule and draft O&M

manuals have been provided to Stephen Turner Inc. at least 40 business days in

advance of scheduled testing.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND TRADE CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction Manager

1. The Construction Manager’s responsibility for construction safety is unaffected by this section.

2. The Construction Manager’s responsibility for the quality of the installed work is unaffected by

this section.

3. The Construction Manager shall establish at least one contact person, plus alternates where

appropriate, for each trade or system involved in the commissioning process. This requirement

facilitates effective communication during commissioning.

4. The Construction Manager shall communicate to the commissioning team the construction

schedules, milestones, completion schedules, planned testing, etc., including updates. The

Construction Manager shall incorporate commissioning activities closely tied to the




construction activities into the project schedule as agreed by the Construction Manager, the

Owner, and Stephen Turner Inc.

5. Stephen Turner Inc. has no authority to change the contract or direct the Construction Manager

in any of their work, only to provide comments and suggestions. Any issues that Stephen

Turner Inc. cannot be resolved with the Construction Manager and the Trade Contractors will

be jointly presented to the Owner for resolution.

6. As each commissioning issue is identified, the Construction Manager shall consider it with the

Trade Contractors and respond to Stephen Turner Inc. The Construction Manager shall

cooperate in resolving commissioning issues that are within the project scope.

7. The Construction Manager shall ensure that each required Trade Contractor and direct Supplier

participates and cooperates in commissioning, and provides information, assistance, and

responses within the time frames in this section.

8. The Construction Manager shall ensure that each required trade supports integrated testing and

commissioning of inter-related work.

9. Warranty

a. The Construction Manager shall provide a summary of warranty items as specified,

delineated by specification section number, title, and description. Stephen Turner Inc.

will use this as part of the commissioning comparison and verification of warranty items.

This step is intended to assure the Owner that the intended warranty protection will be

provided.

b. For each warranty item, include the date when the warranty is to begin, the duration of

the warranty, and Owner’s obligations to maintain to protect warranty.

10. The Construction Manager shall schedule in advance and coordinate execution of seasonal or

deferred commissioning testing by the Trade Contractors, which shall be witnessed by Stephen

Turner Inc. The Construction Manager and the Trade Contractors shall correct deficiencies

and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues

identified in seasonal testing.

B. Trade Contractors

1. The Trade Contractors’ responsibility for construction safety in their work is unaffected by this

section.

2. The Trade Contractors’ responsibility for the quality of their installed work is unaffected by

this section.

3. The Trade Contractors for commissioned systems and related work will be required to perform

certain tasks to assist in the commissioning process. These tasks are described in this section

and the commissioning section of each Division that includes commissioned systems. Sample

documents relating to these tasks are included in the appendix section of this specification to

further clarify this work.

4. The responsibility for safe operation of components, equipment, and systems during

commissioning testing rests with the Trade Contractors.

5. Stephen Turner Inc. has no authority to change the contract or direct the Trade Contractors in

any of their work, only to provide comments and suggestions. Any issues that Stephen Turner

Inc. cannot resolve with the Construction Manager and the Trade Contractors will be jointly

presented to the Owner for resolution.

6. As each commissioning issue is identified, the Trade Contractors shall, with the Construction

Manager, consider the issue and respond to Stephen Turner Inc. Trade Contractors shall

cooperate in the resolution of commissioning issues that are within their contracted scope.




7. PFCs to verify components and work will be provided by Stephen Turner Inc. for completion

on-site by Trade Contractors, preferably by the person performing the work. PFCs shall be

completed as the work progresses.

8. FPT procedures will be developed and led by Stephen Turner Inc. and performed by the Trade

Contractors on each commissioned system.

9. Inter-related work is subject to integrated inter-system functional performance testing and

participation of each related trade is required. This includes seasonal performance testing.

1.6 INCLUDED SYSTEMS

A. For the following tables listing systems and their components by Division, Stephen Turner Inc. will

develop Pre-Functional Checklists (PFC) that are completed by the Trade Contractors and

Functional Performance Tests (FPT) that are executed by the Trade Contractors with Stephen Turner

Inc. The installing contractors must complete Pre-Functional Checklists developed by Stephen

Turner Inc. for components and systems listed; no sampling is allowed. Installing contractors are

required to participate in all Functional Performance Testing. Functional Performance Testing will

be performed using the progressive sampling approach described later in this section for systems

where 25% sampling rate is indicated.

Building Systems to be Commissioned Pre-Functional Checklists

Functional Performance Testing

HVAC Systems and Associated Controls

Fan Coil Units Yes 20 % Sampling

Energy Recovery Units Yes 100%

Duct Mounted Heating Coils Yes 100%

Heating Hot Water Pumps Yes 100%

New Controls for Heating Hot Water System

Yes 100%

Electrical Systems

Connections to Equipment Listed in Section 019113

Yes Support

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout, and required testing shall be

provided by the Contractor, and shall remain the property of the Contractor.

B. System-specific test equipment, tools and instruments (e.g. test equipment specific to a piece of

equipment) required shall be included in the base bid price by the Contractor.

C. Equipment and software provided by Stephen Turner Inc. to test equipment shall not become the

property of the Owner.

D. Testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to measure system performance with

the tolerances listed in the system or product specifications.




E. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available. Equipment shall be calibrated

according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals, recalibrated when dropped, and repaired

and recalibrated when damaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM

A. The Construction Manager and each Trade Contractor performing work on commissioned systems or

equipment shall designate personnel to the commissioning team. Such personnel, including

knowledgeable sub-contractors or equipment suppliers, shall be responsible for coordinating

commissioning activities with Stephen Turner Inc. and attending meetings.

3.2 COMMISSIONING TEAM RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Commissioning Personnel for the Construction Manager and each Trade Contractor and

equipment supplier for commissioned systems or equipment shall have expertise and authority to act

on their firm’s behalf and shall be scheduled to participate in and perform commissioning activities

including, but not limited to:

1. Cooperate with Stephen Turner Inc. for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log.

2. Attend commissioning team meetings. Construction Manager and Trade Contractors for

commissioned systems to attend each commissioning meeting.

3. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities into the construction schedule.

4. Review and complete component pre-functional checklists provided by Stephen Turner Inc.

5. Consider and respond to commissioning issues in the Issues Log, which shall be the central

communication and record for the commissioning team’s efforts and progress.

6. Review commissioning process test procedures provided by Stephen Turner Inc.

7. Prepare and pre-check components and systems to ensure successful functional performance

testing.

8. Execute commissioning functional performance test procedures.

9. Evaluate performance issues identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity

responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action.

10. In the event retesting is required, pre-check components and systems to ensure successful re-

testing. Stephen Turner Inc. provides effort for initial and final testing. The Construction

Manager and Trade Contractors shall provide the efforts required to ensure that subsequent

additional re-testing is not required.

3.3 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

A. One hour commissioning meetings including one Construction Phase kick-off meeting will be held

throughout the construction period and will be a separate meeting series, not as part of another

meeting such as Owner’s, Design Professional, OAC Meetings, Coordination Meetings, etc.).

Commissioning activities and issues will be handled during these regularly scheduled

commissioning meetings.

B. At least one (1) representative from the Construction Manager and each Trade Contractor of the

systems being commissioned shall participate in scheduled construction phase commissioning

activities. These persons should be prepared and qualified to discuss system items relevant to

commissioning.




C. Commissioning meetings will be held quarterly during demolition and rough-ins, monthly until

system start-up, biweekly during system start-up, and weekly during functional performance testing,

and as required by Owner to resolve issues after move-in.

3.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The Construction Manager and the Trade Contractors shall provide a submittal log from which

Stephen Turner Inc. will determine what system/component submittals should be forwarded to

Stephen Turner Inc. for review in addition to the copies sent to the Design Professional. Stephen

Turner Inc. will review selected submittals with respect to the Owner’s Project Requirements.

1. The Construction Manager and the Trade Contractors will coordinate and execute a submittal

review process that results in formal submittal actions and records for each component of each

commissioned system in advance of delivery of each component to the project site.

B. Submittals shall show evidence that they have been reviewed and approved for submittal by the

Construction Manager and the Trade Contractors prior to circulation to Owner, Stephen Turner Inc.,

the Design Professionals, and others for review or action. The Construction Manager’s and the

Trade Contractors’ pre-review shall include a technical review of the material compared to the

drawings and specifications, by persons familiar with that field. Submittals that do not meet the

specifications are to be corrected prior to sending to Stephen Turner Inc. for review.

C. Submittals for products that are a substitution shall be clearly indicated on the cover page.

D. Submittals shall be marked to show exact items, sizes, components, electrical characteristics,

operating characteristics, details required for this project, service clearances, and shall be annotated

to match drawing schedules.

1. Product data sheets not showing clearly marked the individual specific type, model, and

options intended for use on the project will be returned by Stephen Turner Inc. as not suitable

for further review until revised.

E. Catalog information which makes reference to several options, variations, sizes, etc. shall be clearly

marked (arrow, underline, circled, etc.) to indicate exactly the intended item. Generic cut sheets are

not acceptable.

F. Provide Manufacturers’ detailed installation requirements clearly marked (arrow, underline, circled,

etc.) to exactly indicate the intended item.

G. Provide Manufacturers’ detailed start-up requirements and procedures clearly marked (arrow,

underline, circled, etc.) to indicate only the intended item.

H. Provide Manufacturers’ operation instructions clearly marked (arrow, underline, circled, etc.) to

indicate only the intended item.

I. Provide Manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and troubleshooting procedures clearly marked

(arrow, underline, circled, etc.) to indicate only the intended item.

J. Provide Warranty and clear statement of Owner’s obligations to maintain equipment to preserve

warranty.

K. Product data submittals for any OEM Variable Speed Drives shall include details of compliance

with the Owner’s standards for VSDs.

L. Stephen Turner Inc. shall be provided commissioning-related submittals for review in parallel with

the Design Professional review. The focus of this commissioning review will be to:

1. Verify that the equipment or system meets the Owner’s Project Requirements.




2. Verify that equipment or system includes provisions and accessories for access, maintenance,

start-up and functional performance testing.

M. Stephen Turner Inc. will forward review comments to the Owner with copies sent simultaneously to

the Design Professional. The Design Professional will select which of these commissioning

comments are appropriate to incorporate in their submittal actions.

N. Training Agendas, O&Ms, As-Builts, and BAS programming files shall be provided as formal

submittals.

3.5 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

A. The intent of the commissioning pre-functional checklists is to detect and reduce or eliminate

problems in delivery and installation.

B. Stephen Turner Inc. will produce Pre-Functional Checklists for certain commissioned components.

1. Upon receipt of comments, to Stephen Turner Inc. will modify checklists to address the

Construction Manager and Trade Contractors comments, as applicable. Where inconsistencies

occur between the PFCs and the contract documents, the contract documents take precedence.

2. Stephen Turner Inc. will develop component-based Pre-Functional Checklists and provide the

Construction Manager with all PFCs (for individual Trade Contractors responsible) printed out

and in a dedicated filing cabinet for use on the jobsite.

3. Each installing contractor’s personnel actually performing the installation work is responsible

for completing that trade’s checklist for each component.

C. Timely completion of checklists is required within two business days of completing the related

work.

D. Each Contractor is responsible for picking up checklists from the Construction Manager’s jobsite

office, completing them, and returning them to the Construction Manager’s jobsite office.

E. The Construction Manager is responsible for managing and checking the checklists for timely,

accurate completion.

F. Stephen Turner Inc. will provide the Construction Manager and Trade Contractors with training on

the checklist process. Stephen Turner Inc. will review the checklist for each type of equipment with

the respective Trade Contractor(s) prior to installation of the equipment to ensure the Trade

Contractors understand the checklist process and the specific items on the checklists.

G. The completion of the component checklist does not eliminate the Construction Manager and Trade

Contractors responsibility for meeting other requirements in the specifications and drawings.

H. Stephen Turner Inc. will periodically verify the accuracy, completeness and tracking of the

component checklists. If persistent errors are found, the responsible Trade Contractor shall re-

validate 100% of the component checklists for the problem equipment or system type.

3.6 O&M MANUALS

A. General

1. O&M manuals in electronic format shall be submitted to Stephen Turner Inc. for review in

addition to the other parties.

2. Stephen Turner Inc. will provide their review comments to the Design Professional, who will

select which of these commissioning comments are appropriate to incorporate in their

submittal actions.




3. The Construction Manager and Trade Contractors shall make changes to the O&M manual

based on the comments of the Design Professional and Owner.

4. After delivering final copies of O&M manuals to the owner, confirm in writing the person who

took delivery of the manuals and the date and time they were received.

B. Content

1. Include in the O&M Manuals all information required elsewhere, but not less than the

following:

a. A one-page informational sheet with:

1) Tag number or system name

2) Location / room number

3) Manufacturer, model number, serial number, and other informational data

listed on the nameplate

4) Name, address, and telephone number of installing Contractor and

equipment vendor

5) Names, telephone numbers, and URL (internet address) of sources of

service and repair parts

6) Date of installation and of start-up

7) Operational and performance data per installed conditions

8) Setpoints at time of start-up

b. A copy of equipment specifications

c. A copy of the approved submittal (and/or RFI or change order if applicable)

d. Manufacturer’s installation, operation, and maintenance manuals, including:

1) Installation instructions

2) Operation instructions, including start-up, break-in, shutdown, seasonal,

emergency, and special operation procedures

3) Maintenance instructions, including intervals, procedures and instructions

for problem corrections, preventive maintenance, testing, alignment,

adjustment, and repair

4) Removal and replacement instructions, including removal, replacement,

disassembly, and assembly instructions, including any specific tools

required, required tolerances, settings, or adjustments

5) Troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures, including troubleshooting and

diagnostic procedures for common component malfunctions and the tools

required for these procedures

e. Manufacturer’s recommended preventive maintenance tasks for the component in a

timeline fashion. Includes:

1) Preventive maintenance task

2) Procedure for the task




3) Special tools and instruments required for the task

4) Frequency of the task

f. Inspection and testing reports, including all documentation related to the start-up,

balancing, and certification of the component

g. Maintenance records, indicating maintenance performed by the Construction Manager

and Trade Contractors prior to operation of the component being turned over to the owner

h. A copy of the warranty, including the covered items, date of inception, and date of

expiration

i. A single page document listing any special tools or testing equipment required for the

operation, testing, or maintenance of the component

j. The sequence of operation and control diagrams for components controlled by the

building automation system, or other commissioned controls

k. Wiring diagrams

C. Electronic O&M Manual Edits and Mark-Ups

1. O&M manual data should be edited and marked up to clearly indicate which products, model

numbers, accessories, and options were provided with the equipment for this project.

2. The O&M manual shall be organized by system, equipment type, and component name (tag

number).

D. Electronic O&M Manual Format

1. If a paper O&M Manual is also submitted, the electronic O&M should be labeled and

organized so that all its sections appear in the same order in both versions.

2. All documents shall be submitted in standard formats acceptable to the Owner.

3. All electronic O&M data is to be delivered on CDs or DVD-ROM disks that are formatted for

reading from a standard drive.

4. CDs are to be contained in durable plastic cases.

5. The CDs or DVD-ROM disks shall be labeled permanently in legible ink with the project

name, “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL – VOLUME _ OF _” and a

description of the contents, e.g., which systems are contained on the CD or DVD-ROM disks.

6. The O&M data shall be organized by the following naming structure for the electronic files:

a. (Equipment Type Name)_(DOCUMENT TYPE IN CAPS).(file extension)

b. Example: a manufacturer’s O&M manual for air handling unit AHU-1 would be named:

AHU-1_OM.pdf.

c. Example: a chilled water piping submittal would be named CHW Pipe_SUB.pdf.

d. The following are additional examples of documentation type abbreviations:

1) O&M Manual: OM

2) Installation Instructions: INSTL

3) Submittal: SUB

4) Specification Section: SPEC

5) Change Order: CO

6) Sequence Of Operation: SOO

7) Control Diagrams: CRTLD

8) Preventive Maintenance Instructions: PM




9) Warranty: WTY

10) Parts List: PL

11) Tools List: TL

12) Inspection/Test Reports: ITR

13) Maintenance Records: MR

14) Spare Parts List: SPL

15) Wiring Diagrams: WD

7. The files on each CD or DVD-ROM disk should be organized by system according to the

following folder structure:

a. System name (e.g., Chilled Water System)

1) Component Type / System Type (e.g., pumps, chilled water piping)

2) Tag number or system name (e.g., Pump P-1, chilled water piping)

3) For numerous, repetitive equipment such as terminal units, the O&M

documentation does not need to be separated by tag number. Rather, similar types

of the equipment (e.g., fan powered with reheat, fan powered without reheat, etc.)

can be grouped into one file and a table provided to document the tag numbers,

model numbers, and capacity/performance data.

8. Where more than one CD or DVD-ROM disk is required, do not split the documentation for a

system apart and include parts on two different CDs or DVD-ROM disks.

9. All documentation provided shall be clearly marked to indicate the installation for the present

project. Unedited general cut sheets and manuals for multiple models, installations, etc. are not

acceptable.

3.7 EQUIPMENT START-UP

A. The Construction Manager will coordinate start-up of commissioned systems and equipment by the

Trade Contractors, and provide at least two working days notice to Stephen Turner Inc.

B. Stephen Turner Inc. will witness selected start-up of commissioned systems and equipment for

compliance with the Owner’s Project Requirements.

C. For all commissioned systems and equipment, one copy of the start-up report shall be forwarded to

Stephen Turner Inc. for review and to document that the equipment is installed, operational, and

ready for commissioning testing.

3.8 COMMISSIONING FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. All Pre-Functional Checklists, start-ups, adjustments, controls programming, and verification of

proper operation shall be completed by the Contractors prior to Functional Performance Testing.

1. While components can be tested as work is completed, system functional performance testing

requires completion of all testing prerequisites: checklists, start-up, start-up forms, controls

point-to-point checks, controls sequences programming and debugging, TAB, and other

contractual requirements.

B. In general, Functional Performance Testing shall include testing each sequence in the sequence of

operations, and other significant modes, sequences and control strategies not mentioned in the

written sequences; including, but not limited to startup, shutdown, unoccupied and manual modes,

modulation up and down the unit’s range of capacity, power failure, alarms, component staging and

backup upon failure, interlocks with other equipment, and sensor and actuator calibrations.

1. All interlocks and interactions between systems shall be tested.




2. All larger equipment will be individually tested.

3. Like units or assemblies that are numerous (many smaller rooftop packaged units, air terminal

units, exhaust fans, windows, etc.) may have an appropriate sampling strategy applied per the

list in the Table in Paragraph 1.6 above.

4. Heating equipment must be tested appropriately during winter and air conditioning equipment

must be tested appropriately during summer to demonstrate performance under near-design

conditions.

C. For systems and components in the Table in Paragraph 1.6 above, perform Functional Performance

Tests as developed and led by Stephen Turner Inc. with the commissioning team.

1. Stephen Turner Inc. will provide draft Functional Performance Test procedures for review by

the commissioning team members. Stephen Turner Inc. will incorporate any comments

received into revised procedures. No response within five business days indicates approval.

2. The contractors will provide all tools or the use of tools to start, access equipment, check-out

and functionally test equipment and systems, except for specified testing with portable data-

loggers, which shall be supplied and installed by Stephen Turner Inc.

D. If major problems are discovered during any test (i.e. problems that will delay the completion of the

test), the Construction Manager, with the responsible Trade Contractors, will fix the problem after

the conclusion of testing. Once the Construction Manager and Trade Contractors have resolved the

problem, testing shall be rescheduled and redone. If the issue is still not resolved, Stephen Turner

Inc. shall determine with the Owner how Stephen Turner Inc.’s cost for subsequent retesting will be

borne.

E. For identical or near-identical components (e.g., terminal units, diffusers, traps, valves, etc.): if 10%,

or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces of equipment fails to perform (size alone does not

constitute a difference), not allowing it to meet its designed performance specification, all identical

units may be considered unacceptable by the Owner. In such cases, the Contractor shall provide the

Owner with the following:

1. Within one week of notification from the PM, the Contractor or manufacturer’s representative

shall examine all other identical units, making a record of the findings. The findings shall be

provided to the PM and Construction Manager within two weeks of the original notice.

2. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall provide a

signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed

solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not

significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation.

3. The Owner will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable.

Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed for examination by the Owner and

Stephen Turner Inc.

4. Stephen Turner Inc. will be allowed to test the installations for up to one week, after which the

Owner will decide whether to accept the solution.

5. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items,

at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had

begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one

week from when parts can be obtained.

6. For any functional performance testing issue identified that is not related to any issue identified

on a pre-functional checklist or to a start-up fault, Stephen Turner Inc. will direct the retesting

of the equipment once after the Construction Manager indicates the issue has been resolved. If

the issue is still not resolved, Stephen Turner Inc. shall determine with the Owner how Stephen

Turner Inc.’s cost for subsequent retesting will be borne.




F. Any required retesting shall not be considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time

extension by the Contractor.

G. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while

not compromising the integrity of the testing procedures. As tests progress and an issue is

identified, Stephen Turner Inc. will discuss the issue with the appropriate Trade Contractor who is

performing the test to determine how to proceed.

1. Corrections of minor issues identified may be made during testing at the discretion of Stephen

Turner Inc. In such cases the issue and resolution will be documented on the test procedure

form.

2. Major issues shall be corrected after the completion of testing. In such cases the issue and the

Construction Manager and Trade Contractors proposed resolution will be documented on the

test procedure form. Upon re-testing, the actual resolution will be documented.

H. Seasonal Commissioning Tests

1. Portions of the final commissioning test procedures including but not limited to FPTs will be

seasonally dependent (e.g., cooling system needs to be tested in late spring, summer, or early

fall) and will need to be performed at a different time of year than the rest of the final

commissioning testing.

3.9 SITE OBSERVATIONS AND VERIFICATION

A. The Commissioning Authority will periodically visit the site to observe the work in progress.

Observations and recommended corrective measures will be tracked in the commissioning issues

log and communicated to the Construction Manager and Owner.

B. Any commissioning observation that does not meet the Owner’s Project Requirements is a

commissioning issue and will be included in the Commissioning Issues Log or other reports as

appropriate. Each observation is intended to improve the project quality and achieve the Owner’s

Project Requirements.

3.10 DOCUMENTATION OF COMMISSIONING ISSUES

A. The Commissioning Issues Log focuses on systemic issues and is not a complete “punch list”

containing all occurrences of the issue, i.e., all pieces of the equipment type mentioned in the issue

may not have been individually verified.

B. The Construction Manager shall respond to the Commissioning Authority and PM at least as often

as commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each outstanding issue

identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements and

proposals for their resolution.

1. If issues remain open for more than two commissioning meetings without steps taken toward

resolution or without a plan communicated for resolving the issue, Stephen Turner may

request, and the Construction Manager shall provide, a response in writing including

explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution.

C. To aid in issue resolution, any commissioning issues identified during commissioning testing will be

noted in the Issues Log.

D. If the commissioning team cannot reach a resolution to an issue or disagree on whether an item

should be an issue, Stephen Turner Inc. and the Construction Manager will present the issue jointly

to the Owner for direction.




3.11 TRAINING

A. General

1. The Construction Manager, with input from the Owner, shall be responsible for training

coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that training is completed.

2. Stephen Turner Inc. will verify that the Construction Manager provides the training schedule in

advance to the Owner.

3. The Trade Contractor for the respective system is responsible for the development and

implementation of the training material for the system.

4. Training shall be completed and accepted by the Owner prior to occupancy.

5. Training as specified shall be videotaped with reasonable video/audio quality by the

Construction Manager for future reference and training. Final training videos shall be labeled

and provided in DVD format.

B. Scope of Training

1. The Construction Manager shall provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive

orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance

of each piece of equipment.

2. The training topics shall include all equipment and systems. The Construction Manager shall

provide training on each piece of equipment. Training syllabus shall include a breakdown of

the time allotted for each system.

3. Training shall include hands-on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate all

modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, emergency, power failure, seasonal

changeovers, etc.

4. Training topics shall include safety, proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance,

special tools needed, recommended spare parts, common troubleshooting problems and

solutions, and any equipment or system peculiarities.

C. Preparation for Training

1. Training agenda forms shall be prepared by the relevant Trade Contractors. The agenda shall

be followed to assure efficient training and a knowledge level that meets or exceeds the

owner’s intent.

2. Training materials and O&M manuals must be submitted to Stephen Turner Inc. 5 calendar

days prior to each training session.

3. Stephen Turner Inc. will review the proposed training material from the Construction Manager

and the Trade Contractors and will provide comments and suggestions to supplement the

training material for operations and maintenance personnel, if and where appropriate.

4. The Construction Manager and Trade Contractors training material shall include:

a. Detailed agenda

b. Trade Contractor contact sheet, including address, phone number, fax number and e-mail.

c. Detailed training material, divided by sections.

d. Maintenance checklists/ log sheets.

D. Implementation of Training

1. The trainer, prior to and during each training session, shall complete the prepared training

record form. The trainer is responsible for checking the subjects covered from the training

agenda and for obtaining signatures from the trainees in attendance.




2. All trainers shall have an in-depth working knowledge of the specific installation or system to

be covered.

3. All trainers shall be in place, set up, and ready to provide training as scheduled for each

training session.

E. Prior to the end of the Construction Manager and Trade Contractors warranty period (typically the

ninth or tenth month for a one year warranty), Stephen Turner Inc. will review operational issues

reported by the owner’s operation and maintenance personnel and building users, to help determine

if there are any operational problems which have construction or manufacturer’s deficiencies as

their root cause. If any such problems are identified, Stephen Turner Inc. will work with the

Contractor to identify a recommended course of action to correct the deficiencies. The contractual

responsibility of the subcontractor or supplier to remedy the problem shall not be diminished by

Stephen Turner Inc.’s cooperation.

F. Any resolutions to warranty issues shall be incorporated as changes to as-built, O&M and other

required documentation.

3.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Redline or record drawings shall be kept up to date at all times.

B. The Construction Manager shall ensure that accurate red-line or record drawings of as-built

conditions are maintained by each trade, at the job site, throughout the construction phase. The

record drawings shall be available for review by Stephen Turner Inc.. If discrepancies are noted on

the Trade Contractor’s record drawings, the Construction Manager will review the Trade

Contractors’ recording procedures and adjustments to ensure that the record drawings are kept up to

date and accurate. The record drawings shall be corrected promptly to ensure the accuracy of the as-

built drawings throughout the project.

C. The redline or record drawings maintained by the Trade Contractors will be periodically reviewed

and verified during construction by Stephen Turner Inc. Discrepancies in the drawings will be

documented and the Trade Contractors shall verify the as-built drawings against the installed system

for all similar problems for correction.

D. As-built drawings in compliance with the Owner’s requirements for electronic drawings shall be

formally submitted, and provided to Stephen Turner Inc. for review, within 30 days of training.




APPENDICES




APPENDIX A - SAMPLE TRAINING AGENDA

Date: Equipment / System:

SECTION 1. AUDIENCE AND GENERAL SCOPE

Intended audience type: ___facility engineer, operations, maintenance, technician

__occupant, user, or other:________________

General scope of training: ___ Overview ___ Intermediate ___ Detailed

SECTION 2. INSTRUCTORS

Attach qualifications for each trainer

ID Trainer Company Qualifications Attached ()

1) __________________________ _____________________________

2) __________________________ _____________________________

etc. as needed

SECTION 3. AGENDA

Subjects to be covered (see next page for Owner's requests; attach additional sheets if needed)

Session 1 Date:____________ Location:_____________________________

Duration Instructor(s) (hrs) ID(s)__

Session 2 Date:____________ Location:______________________________

Duration Instructor(s) (hrs) ID(s)__

etc. as needed

Total duration of training (hrs) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------->

SECTION 4. APPROVALS

This plan has been approved by the following individuals, subject to any additions and clarifications noted. (This is not an approval of training completion.)

__________________________________________ _________________________

Owner’s Representative Date

__________________________________________ _________________________

Commissioning Authority Date

Session Subject Date

Duration

(hrs)

Instructor

(ID#)

Completed

()

1. Safety issues for the system and components




2. Overview and description of the purposes of the system

3. Troubleshooting: description of diagnostic step by step procedures for determining the source of problems on the system and component level; review technical service manual in detail

4. Maintenance: instruction of required procedures for weekly, monthly and annual preventative checks and timely repairs to preserve system and component integrity. Any special issues to maintain warranty.

5. Review of control drawings and schematics (have copies for attendees)

6. Startup, loading, normal operation, unloading, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, etc, as applicable

7. On-board controls (for skid or packaged equipment): Programming, troubleshooting, alarms, manual operation

8. Building automation controls (BAS): Programming, troubleshooting, alarms, setpoints, manual operation, interface with integral controls

9. Critical BAS sensors and recommended recalibration intervals for each

10. Interactions with other systems, operation during power outage and fire

11. Utility metering

12. Energy conserving operation and strategies

13. Question and Answer Period

14. Additional Topic: ___________________________________



Total Duration of training (hrs) ------------------

END OF APPENDIX A




APPENDIX B – SAMPLE COMMISSIONING CHECKLISTS

1.2 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST: SAMPLE PROVIDED AS AN EXAMPLE OF THE LEVEL OF RIGOR REQUIRED

AHU-1 - DELIVERY AIR HANDLING UNIT AHU-1

Note: Complete upon arrival of unit

Shipment Inspected: __________________________________________

Date checklist completed: ______________________________________

ITEM SPECIFIED SUBMITTED ACTUAL

Manufacturer YORK TRANE

Model Number YSWU025 LPCAA21D

Total CFM / Minimum OA 8500 / 2300 8500 / No Spec

External Static (in) 2.0 2.0

Motor Manufacturer n/a n/a

Model Number n/a n/a

Serial Number n/a n/a

Nameplate HP 15 10

Volts/Phase/Amps 208V/3ph/42A 208V/3ph/32.2A

Preheat MBH 223.5 223.5

Cooling Coil 5 Row 12 Fins per Inch 6 Row 14 Fins per Inch

Cooling MBH (Total/Sensible) 333/248 333/257.45

VFD Manufacturer/Model No Spec No Spec

Serial Number n/a n/a

VFD HP Rating No Spec No Spec

VFD Line Reactor % No Spec No Spec

Additional observations & notes___________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________




1.3 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST: AIR HANDLING UNIT AHU-1 - CONNECT

Note: Complete after installation & connections

Date checklist completed: _________________________________

Installation Check (Y/N) Notes

1. Equipment tag & nameplate permanently affixed

2. Unit on concrete pad with vibration isolators, isolators released from

shipping bolts.

3. Casing condition good - (no dents, no leaks, gaskets installed, access

doors close)

4. Duct connections to unit tight, fully sealed without leaks, and in good

condition

5. Duct flex connectors and sound attenuators provided and installed per

drawings

6. Hydronic piping complete and in compliance with plans & specs,

including gauges, sensor wells and PT test plugs

7. Preheat valve and actuator provided and properly installed

(VG1241DN+936GGA)

8. Cooling valve and actuator provided and properly installed

(VG1241ER+956GGA)

9. Condensate drain complete, trapped and pitched per, plans, specs &

mfgr’s rec.

10. Adequate access for maintenance and removal/replacement of coils,

shafts, etc.

11. Acoustic insulation properly installed according to specification

12. Clean up of equipment completed per contract documents

13. Fan bearings lubricated (checked by installer)

14. Belts properly aligned, tensioned and all guards in place

15. Filters installed per specifications

16. No unusual vibration or noise


_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________




1.4 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST: AHU-1 - POWER ELECTRICAL

AIR HANDLING UNIT AHU-1

Note: Complete after wiring complete


Installation Check (Y/N)? Note or #

1. Feeders and devices adequately sized per code to serve fan and VFD

2. Feeders and devices supported per code

3. Power disconnect in place and labeled

4. Input and output VFD feeders in separate conduits

5. All electrical connections tight

6. Fan rotation correct (in both VFD and bypass mode if bypass provided)

7. Electrical feeders, VFD and devices labeled per Brown requirements


_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________




1.5 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST: AHU-1 - CONTROLS CONTROLS

AIR HANDLING UNIT AHU-1

Note: Complete after controls are installed, wired and fully tested


Installation Check (Y/N)? Note or #

1. Damper actuators adequately sized; dampers operate smoothly and close tightly

2. Damper actuators and EMS damper outputs adjusted to stroke simultaneously

3. Filter dP switch properly installed, wired, calibrated and tested

4. Mixed air averaging sensor located per specs and tested

5. Preheat discharge averaging sensor located per specs and tested

6. Low temperature cutout located per specs, interlocked with VFD’s and EMS input, adjusted correctly, and tested

7. Air flow station properly located per specifications and calibrated to TAB results

8. High static cutout interlocked with VFD’s & EMS input, adjusted properly & tested

9. Discharge air temperature sensor properly located and tested

10. Duct static sensor properly located 2/3 down duct at location appv’d by engineer, calibrated & tested

11. VFD interface points (S/S, Speed modulation, run status and smoke detector interlock) all installed completely and tested.

12. Fan status CT adjusted to indicate run status reliably at minimum fan speed

13. Controls fully tested, defect-free and ready for functional performance testing


_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

END OF APPENDIX B




APPENDIX C – Sample Commissioning Test Procedures

FUNCTIONAL PERFOMANCE TEST PROCEDURE: SAMPLE PROVIDED AS AN EXAMPLE OF THE LEVEL OF RIGOR REQUIRED

AHU CONTROL SEQUENCE TESTS

Date / Time: Test Observed By:

EQUIPMENT SAFETIES

PROCEDURE

Test 1: High Static Pressure. Install a manometer in the ductwork to read static pressure. Fan off during this test. Determine the design shutdown setting. If not specified on the drawings, get this information from the design engineer. Using a manometer and a squeeze bulb, slowly apply pressure to the switch sensing input until the threshold pressure is achieved. Verify that the switch activates. Release the pressure and verify that the switch remains activated (manual reset). Verify that the fan will not start in automatic or manual modes, either through the BAS, motor starter, or VFD as applicable. Press the manual reset and verify that the equipment will re-start.

This portion of the test will be considered successful if the high static switch shuts down the fan unconditionally, and cannot be bypassed by any manual controls.

Test 2: Low Temperature (Freeze Stat). Lower the temperature of the freeze stat sensing element. Verify that the switch activates. Raise the element temperature and verify that the switch remains activated (manual reset). Verify that isolation and outdoor air dampers close, that preheat valve opens, coil heats up, and that the fan will not start in automatic or manual modes, either through the BAS, motor starter, or VFD as applicable. Press the manual reset and verify that the equipment will re-start.

This portion of the test will be considered successful if the freeze stat shuts down the fan unconditionally, heating coil temperature rises, and the fan cannot be bypassed by any manual controls.

Test 3: AHU Fire Alarm Shutdown. Disconnect one end of the wire at the duct detector or fire alarm relay that is intended to shutdown the AHU. Verify that the fan will not start in automatic or manual modes, either through the BAS, motor starter, or VFD as applicable. Replace the wire and verify that the equipment will re-start.

This portion of the test will be considered successful if the control circuit as wired shuts down the fan unconditionally, and cannot be bypassed by any manual controls. NOTE: this is not a fire alarm test, this only tests that the interface method used will shut down the fan unconditionally.

When finished, return all overridden points, modes and sequences to their original state.

RESULTS & NOTES:

Test # Acceptance Criteria Tolerance

Accepted ? (Y / N) Remarks

1 High Static Shutdown: The high static switch shuts down

Shutdown at +/- 0.2 in.w.c. from






the fan unconditionally, and cannot be bypassed by any manual controls.

setting

2 Freeze Stat Shutdown: the freeze stat shuts down the fan unconditionally, and cannot be bypassed by any manual controls.

Shutdown at +/-

2F from setting

3 Fire Alarm Shutdown: The control circuit as wired shuts down the fan unconditionally, and cannot be bypassed by any manual controls.

None

SUPPLY FAN VFD “RAMP-UP” AND “RAMP-DOWN”

PROCEDURE

Begin the test with the VFD driven motor in the off position. With the fan in manual control, cause a step change from 0 to 50% commanded output. Verify that the VFD “ramp up” settings cause the motor to slowly increase in speed, and do not cause a abrupt change in speed. Cause a step change from 50 to 25% commanded output. Verify that the VFD “ramp down” settings cause the motor to slowly decrease in speed, and do not cause a abrupt change in speed.

Once the test is completed, return all overridden points, modes and sequences to their original state.

This portion of the test will be considered successful if the motor speed changes gradually after a step change output from the control system, indicating the “ramp-up” and “ramp-down” controls have been set in the VFD.

1.1

RESULTS

Acceptance Criteria Tolerance Accepted ? (Y / N) Remarks

The motor speed changes gradually after a step change output from the control system, indicating the “ramp-up” and “ramp-down” controls have been set in the VFD.

Abrupt changes not allowed

SUPPLY FAN STATIC PRESSURE CONTROL TEST

PROCEDURE

Complete the high static pressure safety and VFD “Ramp-Up” and “Ramp-Down” tests before beginning this test.

Set up trends for the supply air static pressure, setpoint, and VFD percentage.




Begin the test with the fan at 0% capacity. With the duct static setpoint at 1.0 in. w.c., start the fan. Observe the VFD and motor to see if the control action is smooth and does not hunt. Allow sufficient time for the control system to stabilize, approximately 2 or 3 minutes maximum. Read the static pressure and verify that the setpoint was achieved. Decrease the static pressure setpoint by 0.5 in. w.c. and observe the control system reaction to the step change.

Return all overridden points, modes and sequences to their original state.

This portion of the test will be considered successful if the controls are stable and the duct static pressure controls achieve their setpoint.

RESULTS

Acceptance Criteria Tolerance AHU Accepted ? (Y / N) Remarks

The controls are stable and the duct static pressure controls achieve their setpoint.

+/-0.1 in. w.c. B4

C2

AIR-SIDE ECONOMIZER CONTROL TEST

PROCEDURE

High static pressure and freeze protection shutdown safety controls must be verified prior to this test, to avoid equipment damage during the test. For VAV system, open VAV boxes to permit unrestricted flow of the supply fan.

The relationship between the outside air temperature, return air temperature, and mixed air temperature setpoint must be appropriate for utilizing the outdoor air for cooling purposes. In general, the OAT should

be 55F or less in order to conduct this test, and colder is better. In general, this test can be conducted if the OAT meets these requirements: OAT below RAT, OAT above freezing. If the OAT is not in the proper range, a complete test of the mixed air system will require a subsequent visit when the conditions are appropriate (seasonal test).

Control the supply fan capacity for VAV air handlers manually during this test.

Set up trends for OA, MA, and RA temperatures; OA cfm and setpoint; and OA and RA damper positions.

Test 1: Override the outside air temperature value to a point just above the lower limit of the economizer enable threshold value (temperature or enthalpy as applicable). When the threshold value is crossed, the control should respond by entering and leaving the economizer mode. When entering the economizer mode, observe the dampers begin to modulate to maintain mixed air temperature setpoint. When leaving the economizer mode, observe the dampers revert to minimum outside air position.




This portion of the test will be considered successful if the system enters and leaves the economizer mode according to outside air temperatures at the specified thresholds, and maintains the minimum ventilation rate when the economizer is disabled.

Test 2: If there is an economizer “enable” or “lockout” temperature or enthalpy, temporarily manipulate this point as required to keep it from interfering with the test (e.g. enable the economizer without regard to OAT or enthalpy). Based on (OAT) and (RAT), determine a reasonable mixed air setpoint that will set the controls into motion. Observe the mixing dampers to see if the control action is smooth and does not hunt. Allow sufficient time for the control system to stabilize, approximately 2 or 3 minutes maximum. Read the mixed air temperature and verify that the setpoint was achieved. Select a different mixed air temperature setpoint, preferably at least 10 degrees different than the original setpoint, and observe the control system reaction to the step change.

Return all overridden points, modes and sequences to their original state.

This portion of the test will be considered successful if the controls are stable and the mixed air controls achieve their setpoint.

RESULTS

SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEST

PROCEDURE

High static pressure and freeze protection shutdown safety controls must be verified prior to this test, to avoid equipment damage during the test. For VAV system, open VAV boxes to permit unrestricted flow of the supply fan.

Temporarily disable the Air-Side Economizer Control operation before beginning this test.

Test 1: Temporarily disable the HW heating controls. Start the SA fan, and gradually increase the speed

until 50 % capacity is reached. Adjust the SA heating temperature setpoint to 80F and be sure it is higher than the SA temperature at this point. Release the HW controls. Observe the HW valve to see if the control action is smooth and does not hunt. Allow sufficient time for the control system to stabilize, approximately 2 or 3 minutes maximum. Read the SA temperature and verify that the setpoint was achieved. Gradually increase the SA fan capacity to 100 % and observe the control system reaction to the step change.

Test # Acceptance Criteria

Tolerance AHU


1 The system enters and leaves the economizer mode according to outside air conditions at the specified thresholds, and maintains the minimum ventilation rate when the economizer is disabled.

Event occurs at specified temp.

B1

C2

2 The mixed air controls are stable and achieve their setpoint.

+/- 10 % of setpoint

B1




This portion of the test will be considered successful if the controls are stable and the SAT controls achieve their setpoint.

Test 2: Temporarily disable the CW cooling controls. Start the SA fan, and gradually increase the speed

until 50 % capacity is reached. Adjust the SA cooling temperature setpoint to 55F and be sure it is lower than the SA temperature at this point. Release the CW controls. Observe the CW valve to see if the control action is smooth and does not hunt. Allow sufficient time for the control system to stabilize, approximately 2 or 3 minutes maximum. Read the SA temperature and verify that the setpoint was achieved. Gradually increase the SA fan capacity to 100 % and observe the control system reaction to the step change.

Return all overridden points, modes, and sequences to their original state.

This portion of the test will be considered successful if the controls are stable and the SAT controls achieve their setpoint.

RESULTS

POWER FAILURE TEST

Date / Time: Investigator(s):

This test must follow the regulations and requirement of local Fire Department. Perform this test before the building is occupied. Notify the Fire Department before this test is started.

1.1 OBJECTIVES

The purpose of this test is to verify that the generator starts within the designed time period after a power failure and supplies the power required by the systems. All systems and equipment must operate as intended after the power is restored and the power will maintain the specified quality as equipment start up. The circuit must be switched to supply generated power to all system and equipment required to be on emergency power. When power goes back to the normal condition the equipment and systems shall operate as normal without interruptions and the generators shall shut off.

1.2 PROCEDURE

Verify the generator start up time, voltage, and shut down. Verify that a random selection of equipment operates as intended.

The power failure procedure is as follows:



1 The HW controls are stable and the SAT controls achieve their setpoint.

+/- 2F, no hunting

2 The CW controls are stable and the SAT controls achieve their setpoint.

+/- 2F, no hunting




1. Notify the local fire department 2. Disconnect the electrical power supply to the building 3. Verify that all emergency functions are operable until the generator supplies power 4. Verify that the generator and all equipment operate as required 5. Connect the building to the electrical supply 6. Verify that the equipment continues to operate as intended 7. Notify the local fire department that the testing is completed

This test will require several observers (with 2-way radios) in different locations to verify when the equipment and systems are operational unless the building automation system is able to monitor all the equipment and systems.

1.3 MEASURING EQUIPMENT

Prepare following measuring equipment, which shall have been calibrated less than 12 months before these tests:

Stop watch

Voltmeter

Light meter




1.4 RESULTS

Emergency Lighting

Room number Emergency Lighting ? Room number Emergency Lighting ?

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Emergency Functions

Equipment Power available ? Equipment Power available ?

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Generator

Start Up duration ( ) Sec.

Maintains required voltage during start-up

Yes / No

Maintains required voltage during power restoration

Yes / No

Shut Down duration ( ) Sec.




Equipment

Equipment type and #

Start up time after

power failure

(s)

Operates as intended during

external power outage

?

Operates as intended after

external power is

restored ?

Comments

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

Yes / No Yes / No

1.5 GENERAL COMMENTS:

END OF APPENDIX C




APPENDIX D: SAMPLE COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE

END OF APPENDIX D END OF SECTION 01 91 13

ID Tasks1

2 CD

3 Owner's Project Requirements and Basis of Design Documentation

4 Construction

5 Submittal transmitted for processing

6 Approved submittal transmitted to Cx A

7 Draft O&Ms transmitted to CxA

8

9 "Set"

10 "Connect"

11 Start-up/Controls/TAB

12 Complete checklists, start-up and controls on major components

13 Complete all controls, TAB, & programming

14 Complete O&Ms, submit Training Plan

15 Contractor Provided Training

16 Seasonal Performance Testing

17 Occupancy

18 First year warranty

19

20 Commissioning Specifications

21 Commissioning Plan

22 First Construction Documents Design Review

23 Backcheck Construction Documents Design Review

24 Contractor Submittal Review

25 Checklist(s) finalization

26 Contractor checklist performance monitoring

27 Functional Performance Test Development

28 Component Level Functional Performance Test Execution

29 System & Inter-System Functional Performance Test Execution

30 Task 2-4: Develop Systems Manual

31 Task 2-5: Systems Manual & Commissioning Training

32 Task 2-6: Post-Occupancy Review

33 Task 1-7: Commissioning Report

May July Septe Novem Januar March May July Septe Novem Januar March May July Septe Novem Januar

Task

Progress

Milestone

Summary

Rolled Up Task

Rolled Up Milestone

Rolled Up Progress

Split

External Tasks

Project Summary

Group By Summary

Deadline

Page 1

Project: Sample Component Cx ScheduleDate: Wed 9/9/09






SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 13 - 1

SECTION 02 41 13

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building elements.

B. Patching and repairs.


A. Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work: Use of the building.

B. Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. REMOVE: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged or

to remain the Owner's property.

B. REMOVE AND SALVAGE: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's

property. Remove, clean and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of

containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area.

C. REMOVE AND REINSTALL: Remove items indicated; clean, service and otherwise prepare them for

reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.

D. EXISTING TO REMAIN: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during

selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected

storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.

1.04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled or otherwise indicated to

remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be

removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option.


A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction.




B. PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

preinstallation conference requirements of Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy the nearby buildings on campus in proximity to the selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72

hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of building elements to be selectively

demolished.

C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

1.08 SCHEDULING

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. EXISTING SPECIAL WARRANTY: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or

damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing

warranties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.

1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials

that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective

demolition required.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and

salvaged.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements that conflict with the intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to the Architect.

E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in

structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during

selective demolition.

F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.




3.02 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during

selective demolition operations.

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized

in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during

interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities.

a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during

changeover.

B. UTILITY REQUIREMENTS: Locate, identify, disconnect and seal or cap off indicated utility services

serving building to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

3. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

4. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated or abandoned, provide bypass

connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with

selective demolition.

5. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the

remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

C. UTILITY REQUIREMENTS: Refer to Divisions15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting,

removing and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility

disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Drain, purge or otherwise remove, collect and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids,

flammables or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.

B. Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before and

during selective demolition operations.

C. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,

walks and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without

permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed

or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

D. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and

facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.

1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies and covered passageways,

where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances and landscaping to remain.

3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of

groups of trees to remain.




4. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of existing

construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage

occurs to structure or interior areas.

5. Protect walls, ceilings, floors and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed

during selective demolition operations.

6. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings and equipment that have not been removed.

E. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to

separate areas from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard

with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood on the demolition side.

2. Insulate partition to provide noise protection to occupied areas.

3. Seal joints and perimeter.

4. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.

5. Protect air-handling equipment.

6. Weatherstrip openings.

F. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing or structural support to preserve stability and

prevent movement, settlement or collapse of building to be selectively demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.04 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt.

Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.

1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable

conditions, such as ice, flooding and pollution.

B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist or other device that will convey

debris to grade level.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by selective demolition

operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.

3.05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as

indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as

follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective

demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on lower levels.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square and true to dimensions required. Use cutting

methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize




disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,

not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing

finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,

such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting

flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting

operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly

dispose of off-site.

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and

to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials so

as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is

prohibited.

10. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of

selective demolition operations.

C. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with

construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact

tools.

D. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain.

E. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient Floor

Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor

Coverings" and Addendum.

F. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods

recommended by RFCI.

G. Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing.

See Section 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles for new roofing requirements.

H. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.

3.06 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective

demolition operations.

B. Patching is specified in Section 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching.

C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.

1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved

masonry patching material, applied according to manufacturer's printed recommendations.




D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to

remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

E. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend

one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance.

1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.

2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.

3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface

containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat.

4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve

uniform color and appearance.

5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible.

F. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform

appearance.

3.07 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. GENERAL: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to

accumulate on-site.

B. BURNING: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. DISPOSAL: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.08 CLEANING

A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.

B. Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations.







CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00-1

SECTION 04 22 00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Concrete masonry units for single wythe construction.

B. Mortar for masonry units.

C. Reinforcement, anchorage and accessories.

D. Masonry flashings.

E. Masonry sealer coating.


A. Section 07 21 13 – Board Insulation.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM A82 - Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.

B. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

C. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

D. ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.

E. ASTM C129 – Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.

F. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.

G. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.

H. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

I. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.

J. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete.

K. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.

L. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry.


Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School- Mechanical System Upgrades Foster , RI


M. ASTM C780 – Pre-construction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit

Masonry.

N. ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.

O. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide

Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

P. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

C. Submit four samples of masonry veneer units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range.

D. Include mortar design mix; indicate Proportion or Property method used, required environmental

conditions and admixture limitations.

E. SAMPLES: Submit two ribbons of mortar color, illustrating color and color range.

F. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01 33 00 that products meet or exceed

specified requirements.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. INSTALLER: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum ten years

documented experience.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements for masonry construction.

1.07 MOCK-UP (Not Used)

1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

C. Accept masonry units on site. Inspect for damage.

1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Strictly comply with recommendations of the International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council –

Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold (Hot) Weather Masonry Construction; the

Brick Institute of America –Technical Notes on Brick Construction, Parts 1, 2 and 3; The Portland

Cement Assoc.

1.11 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 13.




B. Coordinate the masonry work with brick veneer and installation of window anchors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS – CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Park Avenue Cement Block Company (specified below).

B. Manufacturers meeting or exceeding the requirements specified herein.

C. SUBSTITUTIONS: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. HOLLOW NON-LOAD BEARING CMU: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type I - Moisture Controlled;

normal weight. Nominal modular sizes 4 x 16 x 8 inches, 6 x 16 x 8 inches and 8 x 16 x 8 inches as

indicated on the Drawings. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels and

control joints.

2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS – CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM C150, Type I.

B. AGGREGATES: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean, dry, protected against dampness,

freezing and foreign matter.

C. HYDRATED LIME: ASTM C207, Type S.

D. WATER: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious

material.

E. Use no admixtures unless written approval is obtained from Architect.

F. COLOR: As selected by Architect.

2.04 MORTAR MIXES – CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. MORTAR FOR NON-LOAD BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS: ASTM C270, Type N, using

the Property Method, 750 psi compressive strength.

B. MORTAR FOR ENGINEERED MASONRY: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property Method, 1800

psi compressive strength.

2.05 GROUT MIXES

A. GROUT: ASTM C476; consistency which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.

2.06 MORTAR MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM

C270.

B. Add mortar color, if required, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of

mix and coloration. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.

C. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within two hours of mixing.

D. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or two-and-one-half

hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F.




2.07 ADMIXTURES

A. The use of air entraining, antifreeze compounds or calcium chloride admixtures or other substances is

not allowed, unless otherwise approved by the Architect.

2.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. CMU PARTITIONS: Ladder type, welded wire units fabricated from 9 gage ASTM A82 cold-drawn

steel wire with deformed side wire and smooth cross wire; ASTM A641 mill galvanized; Hohmann &

Barnard, Inc. “Lox-All” Reinforcement #220.

B. JOINT STABILIZING ANCHORS: To connect new masonry walls to existing masonry walls at

vertical control joints; Cold-drawn steel; hot dip galvanized; spaced at 2’ –0” on center vertically;

“D/A 2200,” manufactured by Dur- O-Wall, Inc.”

C. REINFORCING STEEL: ASTM A615, 60 ksi 276, 414, 517 MpA yield grade, deformed billet bars,

unprotected finish..

D. SUBSTITUTIONS: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS (Not Used)

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. CLEANING SOLUTIONS: EaCo Chem “NMD 80 New Masonry Detergent”.

B. SUBSTITUTIONS: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

C. Provide block filler prior to finishing to match existing cmu finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building

structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels and coursing indicated; protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.

C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

Form concave mortar joints.




3.04 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head, bed and collar joints, uniformly jointed

with other work.

B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

C. Buttering courses of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.

D. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air

space or to plug weep holes

E. Interlock intersections and external corners.

F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be

made, remove mortar and replace. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper tools to

provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

G. Cut mortar joints flush where insulation bitumen damp proofing is applied.

3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES – SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement at 16 inches on center vertically.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend

minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first joint below top of walls.

D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings.

E. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with prefabricated corner pieces 16 inches oc.

3.6 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Reinforce bond beams as shown on Drawings, placed 1 inch from bottom of web.

B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.

C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of

dimensioned position.

D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

3.7 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, build in metal door frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts,

plates, lintels and other items furnished by other Sections.

B. Build in items plumb and level.

C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill

adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.

D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. MAXIMUM VARIATION FROM UNIT TO ADJACENT UNIT: 1/32 inch.




B. MAXIMUM VARIATION FROM PLANE OF WALL: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or

more.

C. MAXIMUM VARIATION FROM PLUMB: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two

stories or more.

D. MAXIMUM VARIATION FROM LEVEL COURSING: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet;

1/2 inch in 30 feet.

E. MAXIMUM VARIATION OF JOINT THICKNESS: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.

F. MAXIMUM VARIATION FROM CROSS SECTIONAL THICKNESS OF WALLS: 1/4 inch.

3.9 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for concealed items as required. Coordinate with other Sections of Work to provide

correct size, shape and location.

B. Obtain Architect approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance

or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01 74 00.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.

C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

F. Use of acid or acid base cleaners or abrasives are strictly prohibited.

3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 52 00.

B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may

be damaged by construction activities.





MECHANICAL SYSTEM RENOVATIONS


FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 1

SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Coordinate work of this Section with the work of the following Sections to properly execute the

work in order to maintain the hourly ratings of the walls and floors. 1. Division 1 General Conditions 2. Division 23 Mechanical

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards (ASTM): 1. ASTM E 814 - 88: Standard Test method For Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestop

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops (Consult UL Fire Resistance

Directory) 1.03 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing firestopping for fire-rated construction, this includes: 1. All openings in fire-rated floors and wall assembles, both blank (empty) and those

accommodating penetrating items such as cables, conduits, pipes ducts, etc. 2. Gaps (openings) between exterior curtain walls and the outer perimeter edge of the

structural floor. 3. Openings at each floor level in shafts or stairwells.

B. Perform all work required, and furnish all materials necessary, to complete proper installation of firestops and firestop systems in fire-rated walls, floors, and partitions, around penetrations of pipe, duct, cable, other electrical/mechanical devices or in blank openings. Refer to Architectural Drawings for locations of all fire-rated construction. All penetrations of fire-rated construction shall be firestopped in a manner which is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.


A. Firestopping systems (materials and design) shall conform to both Flame (F) arid Temperature (T) ratings as required by local building code and as tested by notionally accepted test agencies




per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating when required by code authority shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column.

B. Firestopping materials & systems must be capable of closing or filling through-openings created

by 1) the burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation materials, or 2) deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion (electrical & mechanical duct work).

C. Firestopping material shall be asbestos free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of

hazardous solvents. D. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back

from contact surfaces.

E. Do not use any Firestop products which after curing dissolve in water.

F. All Firestopping materials shall be manufactured by one manufacturer (to the maximum extent possible).

G. Installation of Firestopping systems shall be performed by a contractor (or contractors) trained

or approved by the Firestop manufacturer.

H. Equipment used shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of Firestop material to be installed. Literature shall indicated product characteristics, typical uses, performance and limitation criteria and test data.

B. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit MSDS for each firestop product. C. Shop drawings: Show typical installation details for the methods of installation. Indicate which

firestop materials will be used where and thickness for different hourly ratings

D. Submit manufacturer's installation procedures for each type of product.

E. Installer documentation,: Submit document form Firestop Manufacturer wherein Manufacturer recognizes, i.e. approves Installer for said Manufacturer's Firestop products.

F. Upon completion, installer shall provide written certification that materials were installed in

accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and details. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver material in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with the manufacturer's name, product identification, lot number, UL label, and mixing and installation instructions as applicable.

B. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions

recommended by the manufacturer.

C. All Firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life.




1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conform to Manufacturer's printed instructions for installation and when applicable, curing in accordance with temperature and humidity. Conform to ventilation and safety requirements.

1.08 SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate this work as required with the work of other trades.

B. Firestopping shall precede gypsum board finishing. 1.09 PROTECTION

A. Where firestopping is installed at locations which will remain exposed in the completed work, provide protection as necessary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finishes, and protect as necessary against damage from other construction activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. Firestopping materials and systems shall meet the requirements specified herein. Architect

must approve in writing any alternates to the materials and systems specified herein.

B. All firestop products and systems shall be designed and installed so that the basic sealing system will allow the full restoration of the thermal and fire resistance properties of the barrier being penetrated with minimal repair if penetrants are subsequently removed.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Specified Technologies Inc.(STI), Somerville, NJ 08876 B. Dow Corning Corp., Midland, Ml

C. 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, MN

D. Nelson Firestop Products, Tulsa, OK 2.03 MATERIALS

A. Firestop Mortar 1. Specified Technologies Inc. SpecSeal Mortar

B. Firestop Sealants and Caulks 1. STI SpecSeal Sealant

2. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant No. 2000 3. 3M CP25WB- Caulk 4. Nelson Firestop Products - all listed sealants and caulks

C. Firestop Putty

1. STI SpecSeal Firestop Putty Bars & Pads 2. 3M MPS-2 Moldable putty Stix & Putty Pads

3. Nelson Firestop Products FSP Fireseal putty




D. Firestop Collars 1. STI SpecSeal Firestop Collars 2. 3M PPD Collars

3. Nelson Firestop Products PCS preformed collars

E. Wrap Strips 1. SpecSeal WrapStrip

2. 3M FS-1 95 Wrap Strip 3. Nelson Firestop Products wrap strips

F. Accessories

1. Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type recommended by Manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions where Firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of Firestop products.

3.02 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING

A. General 1. All through-penetrations, construction gaps, joints and through openings occurring in,

adjacent to or between fire-rated floor/ceilings and walls shall be firestopped as per the requirements of this specification.

2. Insulation types specified in other Sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping material specified herein.

3. All combustible penetrants (I.E. non-metallic pipes or insulated metallic pipes) shall be firestopped using products and systems tested in a configuration representative of the field condition.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General 1 . Installation of Firestops shall be performed by an applicator/installer qualified and trained

by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures.

2. Apply Firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire-rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of Firestops. Schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other construction which would conceal penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of Firestops.

4 . Unless specified and approved, all insulations used in conjunction with through-penetrants shall remain intact and undamaged and may not be removed.

B. Dam Construction




1. When required to properly contain Firestopping materials within openings, damming or packing materials may be utilized. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Noncombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the Firestop system.

C. Field Quality Control

1. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations.

2. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets. 3. Finish surfaces of firestopping which are to remain exposed in the completed work to a

uniform and level condition. 4. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code Authorities.

5. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent surfaces.

B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to

adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 07 84 00






JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-1

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.

B. Sealant and backing.


A. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry.

B. Section 07 21 13 – Board Insulation.

C. Section 08 41 13 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.

D. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

E. Section 12 32 00 – Manufactured Wood Casework.

F. Division 22 Sections: Plumbing Fixtures.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

B. ANSI/ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-

Cell Foam).

C. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds.

D. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.

E. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component.

F. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color

and availability.

C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.


Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School- Mechanical System Renovations Foster , RI


D. Submit two samples 1/2 x 1/2 inches in size illustrating colors selected. Submit manufacturer's

installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.


A. MANUFACTURER: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section

with minimum ten years documented experience.

B. APPLICATOR: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum ten years


C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation.


A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building specs.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 13.

B. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. SUBSTITUTIONS: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.02 SEALANTS

A. TYPE 1: Not Used

B. TYPE 2: Tremco Tremflex 834 Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant

1. General purpose, interior, one-part, paintable, pure acrylic latex sealant.

2. Conforms to ASTM C834.

3. +/- 12 1/2% joint movement capability.

4. Acceptable for use where an acoustical sealant is required.

C. TYPE 3: Tremco Tremsil 200

1. One-part, acetoxy silicone sealant.

2. Conforms to ASTM C920, use NT, G, A and O and US Federal Specifications TT-S-00230, Class

A and TT-S-001543A Class A.

3. White and clear colors; containing fungicide.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. PRIMER: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.




B. JOINT CLEANER: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials.

C. JOINT BACKING: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to

50 percent larger than joint width, No. 92 Green Rod Closed Cell Polyurethane manufactured by

Pecora Corporation.

D. BOND BREAKER: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

2.04 COLORS

A. Colors to be selected by Architect from sealant manufacturer's standard range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work and are as shown on Drawings and as recommended by

sealant manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Thoroughly clean joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove loose materials and

foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

C. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. Apply masking

tape to each exposed surface of joints.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install sealant in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions; ASTM C804 for solvent release

sealants and ASTM C790 for latex base sealants.

B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve a 2 to 1width/depth ratio. Sealant depth shall

not be more than 3/4 inch and not less than 3/8 inch.

C. Joints in excess of 3/4 inch in depth that have no means of providing a backup for sealant, shall receive

joint backing material. Place backing material in joints taking care to maintain a constant depth 1/8

inch greater than the sealant depth tolerances specified.

1. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.

2. Do not stretch backing into joints. Backing shall be continuous, no voids allowed.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

1. Apply sealants using a hand caulking gun or power gun with a nozzle of proper size and sufficient

power to completely fill joints.

F. Install sealant in neat manner in true lines free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges

or sags.

G. Tool joints with a dry or water wet tool only. Do not use detergents or soapy water for tooling

operations. Tool joints slightly concave, creating an hourglass sealant profile within the joint.




1. Fillet beads are not acceptable unless approved by the Architect or shown as such on the

Drawings. Sealant shall not lap over the face of adjacent work being sealed.

H. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling or before sealant has taken initial set.

3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

B. Protect sealants until cured.

3.06 SEALANT SCHEDULE

TYPE 1: Not Used.

TYPE 2: All interior conditions unless noted otherwise; at countertop and wall intersections.

TYPE 3: Interior: Around fixtures in toilet rooms, kitchens, janitor's closets and other "wet" locations.







ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-1

SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling systems.

B. Acoustical panels.

C. Non-fire rated assemblies.

D. Perimeter trim.


A. Division 23 Sections: Mechanical Equipment.

B. Division 26, 27 and 28 Sections: Electrical.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.

C. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength

Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

D. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

E. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip

Process

F. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room

Method

G. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior

Coatings in an Environmental Chamber

H. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

I. ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material

J. ASTM E 580 Installation of Metal Suspension Systems in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic

Restraint

K. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.





A. TOLERANCES

1. DEFLECTION

a. Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting light fixtures,

ceiling grilles and acoustical units shall have a maximum deflection 1/360 of the span.

b. DEFLECTION TEST: ASTM C635.

c. STRUCTURAL CLASSIFICATION: Intermediate duty.

2. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE OF FINISHED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM: Level

within 1/8" in 12'-0".

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. SAMPLES:

1. Submit two 12" x 12" samples of each acoustical unit.

2. Submit two 6" long samples of main and cross runners and splines.

C. MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE: Manufacturer's recommendation for installation of suspension

system.

D. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL: Furnish extra materials, two boxes of each acoustical material

installed.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging, with manufacturer's labels indicating

brand name, pattern, size, thickness and fire rating as applicable, legible and intact.

B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.

C. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.

D. Do not begin installation until sufficient materials to complete a room are received.


A. Maintain humidity of 65% - 75% in area where acoustical materials are to be installed, 24 hours

before, during and 24 hours after installation.

B. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 F. - 70 F. prior to and during installation of

materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: Basis of Design: Armstrong.

B. ACOUSTICAL MINERAL UNITS: Basis of Design: Armstrong World Industries, United States

Gypsum Corp.




C. SUBSTITUTIONS: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. HANGERS: Wire hangers provided to be not less than 12 gauge galvanized soft annealed steel.

B. SYSTEMS:

1. CG-1: Exposed tee grid Armstrong Prelude Plus XL:

a. WEB DESIGN: Double-web aluminum with pre-painted aluminum cap.

b. Baked Polyester paint

c. EXPOSED FLANGE: 15/16 inch width.

a. Color: White

2.03 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. ACT-1

1. PATTERN: Armstrong Cirrus #533.

2. SIZE: 24" x 24" x 5/8".

3. EDGE: Tegular.

4. COLOR: White.

5. NRC : .70 Minimum

B. ACT-2

1. PATTERN: Match Existing

2. SIZE: 24" x 24" x 5/8".

3. EDGE: Match Existing

4. COLOR: Match Existing

5. NRC: .70 Minimum

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities, and

dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR TILE AND PANELS

1. HANGERS

a. Select hanger wires 4 ft. o.c. each direction.

b. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member, 6 in. from vertical surface.

c. Do not splay wires more than 5 in. in a 4 ft. vertical drop.




d. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where ducts or other

equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hanger and

related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

e. Wrap wire a minimum of three times horizontally, turning ends upward.

2. MAIN AND CROSS RUNNERS

a. Space main runners at 4 ft. or 5 ft. o.c.; as indicated.

3. Wrap wire minimum of three times.

4. Level and square to adjacent walls.

a. Space cross runners at 2 ft. o.c.

b. Do not support lighting fixtures, other equipment or components on main runners or cross

runners if light causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads

by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components

independently.

5. WALL MOLDING

a. Install wall molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces.

b. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.

c. Attach to vertical surface with mechanical fasteners.

d. Install spring spacers at wall molding to hold acoustical unit snug on flange of wall molding.

6. Install hold down clips on all tiles within 10 feet of an exterior door.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation.

B. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces.

C. Remove and replace damaged, mismatched finish or improperly installed units.







PAINTING 09 91 00 - 1

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Surface finish schedule.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products.

B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.


A. PRODUCT MANUFACTURER: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish

products with 20 years experience.

B. APPLICATOR: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 10 years


1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes.


A. Low VOC Requirement (NE CHPS EQ7.0 Low Emitting Materials) – Affected Products - All Wall

Paint, primers, coatings, sealers, Floor Sealers and coatings. 90% or more, of the total volumes of such

products shall meet the applicable VOC content requirements of the California Air Resources Board

(CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for architectural coatings, or the South Coast Air

Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Effective June 3, 2011. Compliance shall be

documented by product data sheets or equivalent. Use definitions and table values in the selected

VOC content standard and clearly identify the standard selected for each product.

B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures

above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless

required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.


Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School – Mechanical Systems Renovations Foster , RI

PAINTING 09 91 00 - 2

C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent

unless allowed or required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. MINIMUM APPLICATION

TEMPERATURES FOR LATEX PAINTS: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless

allowed or required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

D. MINIMUM APPLICATION TEMPERATURE FOR VARNISH AND URETHANE FINISHES: 65

degrees F for interior or exterior, unless allowed or required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.07 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide product data on all finishing products and special coatings.

C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

D. Submit two samples 1 x 1 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each

surface finishing product scheduled, for selection.

E. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

1.08 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Provide one field sample panel for each type of coating, 4 feet square, illustrating coating color, texture

and finish.

C. Locate where directed by Architect.

D. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work.


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.

D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage,

surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation and instructions for mixing and reducing.

E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees

F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.

1.10 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide a five gallon container of each color and surface texture to Owner.

B. Label each container with color, texture and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label.



PAINTING 09 91 00 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Except as otherwise specified, materials shall be the first line products of the following manufacturers:

1. Benjamin Moore.

2. Pittsburgh Paints.

3. Sherwin Williams.

B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of a single

manufacturer.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Products specified are as manufactured by paint companies identified with manufacturers listed in

Paragraph 2.01.

B. Select primary products of the coating system from the products of a single manufacturer.

C. Secondary products not specified by name and required for the job, such as shellac, thinners, putty,

shall be "best grade" or "first line" products of a reputable manufacturer.

D. COATINGS

1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings; tile-like gloss finish.

2. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a

homogeneous coating.

3. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

E. ACCESSORY MATERIALS: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not

specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule.

B. In addition to the finish systems specified in the painting schedule, materials shall be lead-free.

2.04 TINTING AND MIXING

A. Job mixing or tinting may be done only when approved by the Architect.

2.05 COLORS AND PATTERNS

A. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s standard range of colors.

B. The Architect reserves the right to select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the

building.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that surfaces or substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product

manufacturer.



PAINTING 09 91 00 - 4

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that

may potentially affect proper application.

C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless

moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:

1. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY: 12 percent.

D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surfaces or substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixtures trim and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or

finishing.

B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.

C. IMPERVIOUS SURFACES: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and

bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

D. UNIT MASONRY SURFACES SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE PAINT FINISH: Remove dirt, loose

mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of

tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding

metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.

C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring

other surfaces.

D. Remove empty paint containers from site.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.

D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.

G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set.

Wipe excess from surface.

H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.

I. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss

varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.



PAINTING 09 91 00 - 5

3.05 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Paint shop primed equipment.

B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers and access panels on mechanical and electrical components

and paint separately.

C. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,

brackets, collars and supports except where items are prefinished.

D. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.

E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible

through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers

exposed behind louvers, grilles and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.

G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before

installing equipment.

H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.06 CLEANING

A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed or spattered.

B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,

surplus materials and debris.

C. Collect cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal

containers and remove daily from site.

D. Touch up and restore finish where damaged. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned.

E. Leave storage space clean and in condition required for equivalent spaces in project.

3.07 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES

A. GYPSUM BOARD WALLS

PRIME COAT: Alkyd Primer Seal

1ST FINISH COAT: Alkyd Eggshell

2ND FINISH COAT: Alkyd Eggshell



310 George Washington Highway- Suite 100 - Smithfield, Rhode Island 02917 T 401-232-5010 F 401-232-5080




METAL STORAGE CABINETS 10 56 00 - 1

SECTION 10 56 00

METAL STORAGE CABINETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

other sections regarding related specifications, apply to this Section.

1.2. SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Cantilever fixed shelving units, fabrication and installation including leveling.

B. Related Work, Not Furnished:

1 Structural floor system capable of supporting loads required by prevailing building codes,

including loads of storage units to be installed. Provide a maximum allowable sub floor deflection

of L/480 under specified storage loads.

C. Related Sections:

D. Allowances:

E. Alternates:

1.3. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Due to the user’s preference, requirements for safety, performance, and flexibility, all following

specification line items are mandatory.

B. Seismic Performance: Provide fixed shelving capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions

as determined according to IBC 2006 and local building codes.

C. Color Samples: Provide sample for each exposed product and for each color required.

D. Selection Samples: For selection of colors and textures, submit manufacturer’s color charts consisting

of actual product samples, showing full range of colors and textures available. Vendors must provide a

minimum of 12 color selections in powder coat paint finish.

E. Installer Qualifications: Employ an experienced installer who is the manufacturer’s authorized and

certified representative.

1 Minimum Qualifications: 1-year experience installing systems of similar size and complexity to

specified project requirements

2 Manufacturer Certification: Required by manufacturer on manufacturer’s letterhead required at

time of bid. Certifications by sales representatives, dealers, or distributors are unacceptable.

Qualification must include resume of certified installation supervisor.

3 Provide support within 24 hours for service call.

F. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor, installer and manufacturer, agreeing

to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.




This warranty shall be in addition to, no limitations of other rights the owner may have against the

contractor under contract documents. Lifetime Limited Warranty: The entire shelving installation

will be warranted against defects in materials for the life of the installation from the date of acceptance

by the Owner.

G. Reference List: Provide a list of three (3) minimum fixed storage installations to be contacted or visited

by owner, architect and contractor. Installation must be of similar size, scope of specified system. Visit

is intended to inspect operation, quality of installation and verify the suitability of manufacturer’s

products and comparison with materials and products specified. Manufacturer is required to address all

issues raised by owner, architect and contractor. List must include contact names, phone numbers or

e-mails, size and quantity of shelving units.

I. LEED & CHPS Data: Provide complete environmental data including recycled material content, VOC

data, and other product related information. Describe all manufacturing processes or policies that

contribute to environmental sustainability.

J. Project Schedule: Provide a project achievement plan detailing all critical elements necessary to plan,

manufacture, ship, and install shelving product. Include critical project milestones and risk mitigation

plan.

1.4. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, schematics, testing data, and other items as

described in this specification. Include data substantiating that products to be furnished comply

completely with requirements of the contract documents and specifications. Include installed weight,

load criteria, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepared and detailing fabrication, assembly, and installation of storage shelving, as

well as procedures and diagrams. Include details of layout and installation, as well as clearances,

spacing, relation to adjacent construction in plan, elevation, and section, components, assemblies,

connections, attachments, reinforcements, and anchorage. Furnish floor layouts, technical, and

installation manuals for every unit shipment.

1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE (Submissions due from all bidding contractors at time of bid, failure to do so

shall be cause for disqualification.)

A. Manufacturer Certifications: Provide written certification by manufacturer on manufacturer’s letterhead

at time of bid required stating compliance with all specifications of shelving systems. Shelving

certifications must confirm compliance with all shelf sizes and gauges as noted in these specifications.

1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify shelving unit location by field measurements before fabrication and

indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress

to avoid delaying the Work.

1 Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,

establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating shelving units without field measurements.

Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

B. Delivery, Storage, & Handling: Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for

special delivery, storage and handling requirements.

C. Sequence & Scheduling: Sequence storage shelving system installation with other work to minimize

possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and procedures

related to installation of fixed storage units including, but not limited to, the following:

1 Inspect and discuss condition and levelness of flooring and other preparatory work

performed under other contracts.

2 In addition to the Contractor and the installer, arrange for the attendance of the following :

a. Other installers affected by the work of this section.

b. The Owner’s representative.




c. The Architect

d. Manufacturer’s representative.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS

A. General: Products are based on cabinet unit’s products manufactured by Ocean State Heating

Representatives, Inc. Contingent on meeting all specification requirements; other acceptable

manufacturers may be included.

2.2. MANUFACTURED COMPONENTS – STORAGE SHELVING

A. STORAGE CABINET SPECIFICATIONS -Base Unit

1 Cabinets are shipped fully assembled. Base and Side panels are constructed of 18-ga. cold-rolled

steel. Side panels have seven adjustable slots to support shelves and additional 12 ga. steel internal

side supports that are welded for additional vertical rigidity. Bottom base is supported by two 14

ga. horizontal continuous angles the length of the cabinet. Two support bases are fabricated from

14-ga. steel and four adjustable feet allowing for a 1″ vertical adjustment.

2 One fully adjustable shelf from 16-ga. steel is supported by a 16 ga. continuous welded angle for

additional strength. Each cabinet is supplied with front and side adjustable floor kick plates to

conceal cabinet legs and a back wall F-channel from 18-ga. steel to support the length of the

cabinet and deliver a uniform continuous appearance. All cabinet parts are cleaned and

phosphatized prior to applying a baked on polyester powder coat finish.

B. Standard Steel Top –

1 Cabinet steel tops are assembled to the base cabinet and are fabricated from 16 ga. furniture quality

cold-rolled steel and two 16 ga. support channels are welded to the top underside for additional

support. Tops are sanded to remove all blemishes prior to being cleaned and phosphatized before

applying a baked on polyester powder coat finish.

C. ACCESSORIES

1 End Covers

1” Standard End Panels can be installed to finish off cabinets when needed. End panels are

fabricated from 18-ga. furniture quality cold-rolled steel. Internal 16 ga. steel side stiffeners are

welded for additional support. Top corners are sanded to remove all blemishes prior to being

cleaned. End panels will be cleaned and phospatized prior to applying a baked on polyester powder

coat finish to match cabinets.

2 Fill-In Sections

a. Filler sections are available in 12″, 18″ or 24″ wide. Filler sections come with side and top

F-channels to hide field cut sections. Filler sections tops are fabricated from 16-ga. furniture

quality cold-rolled steel. Filler sections are designed to be cut in the field and include required

angels and hardware for a proper installation. Filler sections will be cleaned and phospatized

prior to applying a baked-on polyester powder coat finish to match cabinets.

3 Corners

a. Corner sections are fabricated form 16 ga. furniture quality cold-rolled steel and come with

two top F-channels to secure corner to the wall. Corner sections will be cleaned and

phospatized prior to applying a baked on polyester powder coat finish to match cabinets.

4 Utility Compartments

a. Pre-assembled and free standing with a removable front panel. Utility compartments are used

to conceal additional piping and valve tops and are fabricated from 16-ga. furniture quality




cold-rolled steel. Utility Compartments will be cleaned and phospatized prior to applying a

baked-on polyester powder coat finish to match cabinets.

D. OPTIONS

1 Sink

a. Cabinet comes with sliding doors for storage and to conceal piping. Sink and cabinet top is

fabricated from type 304, 18-8 stainless steel and has fully coated underside insulated for

sound and to reduce condensation. Chrome placed faucet, and drain fitting are provided for

field installation.

2 Solid Steel Tops (standard)

a. -Steel Top Stamped Pencil Proof Louvers

b. Steel Top with Pencil Proof Anodized Aluminum Grill (grill to be clear anodized 204-R

finish)

c. Steel Top with Pencil Proof Anodized Aluminum Slide Damper Grill (grill to be clear

anodized 204-R finish).

2.3. FINISH SPECIFICATIONS

A. Shall be the finest of their respective kinds and those best adapted to the construction for which they

are employed to meet ISO 9001:2008 quality standards. All steel shall be superior quality mild, cold

rolled, pickled, and double annealed, free from scale and buckle. All gauges are U.S. standard. The

design of all parts shall be such that the completed installation shall present a neat and finished

appearance and shall be free from exposed sharp edges or projections. All other special materials shall

be as hereinafter specified.

B. All components shall be painted with an electrostatically applied powder coat finish. All steel parts

shall be machined smoothed and thoroughly cleaned by a process of completely washing in a

phosphatizing solution to insure removal of oil, grease or other foreign material which could interfere

with the adhesion of the priming coat in any way. Following the cleaning process, all parts shall be

coated and confirming every part is thoroughly and completely covered with fine powder coat, and

baked to the paint manufacturer’s recommendation. The finish for powder coat shall be medium gloss,

giving a reading of 35 to 65 degrees on a standard gloss meter and must be capable of withstanding

severe hammer and bending tests without flaking. The finish for epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat

shall be a minimum 1.2 mil thickness capable of resisting methyl ethyl ketone, salt spray, abrasion and

printing, and all normal usage resistant requirements of a good finish. In addition, powder coat shall not

be off gassing to prevent deterioration of collection and other stored materials. Colors to be selected by

owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine subfloor surfaces, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fixed storage units.

1 For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of fixed storage units.

2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2. INSTALLATION

A. Install components and accessories after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

Install shelving units to comply with final layout drawings, in strict compliance with manufacturer’s

printed instructions and structural calculations. Position unit's level and plumb at proper location

relative to adjoining units and related work.

B. Field Quality Control: Remove and replace components that are chipped, scratched, or otherwise

damaged and which do not match adjoining work. Provide new matching units, installed as specified

and in manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.




C. Adjust: Adjust components and accessories to provide smoothly operating, visually acceptable

installation.

D. Cleaning: Immediately upon completion of installation, clear components and surfaces. Remove

surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and leave

areas of installation in neat, clean condition.

E. Protection: Protect system against damage during remainder of construction period. Advise Owner of

additional protection required to ensure shelving units will be without damage or deterioration at time

of substantial completion.

3.3. DEMONSTRATION/CUSTOMER TRAINING

A. Provide complete training to end-user’s staff. Training shall include general safety and operation

instructions, and basic preventative maintenance procedures.







PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00- 1

SECTION 22 10 00

PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Pipe and pipe fittings.

B. Valves.

C. Sanitary piping system.

D. Domestic water piping system.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 22 07 00 - Piping Insulation.

B. Section 22 14 00 - Plumbing Specialties.

C. Section 22 42 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.

D. Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment.


A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. All valves shall be totally lead-

free.

B. Fittings: All domestic water piping fittings shall be totally lead-free.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations.

D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec 9.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site.

B. Store and protect products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE




A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN

compression type with ASTMC-564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum.

B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Pipe and fittings joined

with clamp-and-shield couplings constructed of Type 304 stainless steel and incorporating a neoprene

gasket meeting ASTM C564. Use only in accessible locations. The couplings shall be torqued to 100-125

inch-pounds, and shall be approved to Factory Mutual Standard Class I, 15 psi rated working pressure;

each coupling shall bear FM approval mark, and shall be equal to couplings as manufactured by Clamp-

All Corporation.

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, Schedule 40. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. Use only if

approved by local authority having jurisdiction.

D. Copper Pipe: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn; Fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints:

ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.02 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn. Fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints:

Use lead-free solder on all joints. Use one-piece Type K copper for water piping encased within floor

slab.

B. Cast Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness. Joints: ANSI/AWWA

C111, rubber basket with 3/4 inch diameter rods.

2.03 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; lead-free

bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints.

B. Pipe Size over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; lead-free bronze flanges

for copper piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene bonded to

asbestos.

C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,

designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shape composition sealing

gasket; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.

D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water

impervious isolation barrier.

2.04 GATE VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or

disc, solder or threaded ends.

B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged ends.

2.05 GLOBE VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable

composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity.

B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends,

renewable seat and disc.

2.06 BALL VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever




handle, and balancing stops where required or shown on drawings, solder or threaded ends.

B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle,

flanged.

2.07 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder or screwed ends.

B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

2.08 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged

ends.

2.09 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm,

strainer, threaded or single union ends.

B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomer diaphragm and seat disc, flanged.

2.10 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME

certified and labeled.

2.11 SUPPLY STOPS

A. Chrome plated rigid or flexible supply stops with angle valves with threaded inlet connections, wheel

type handles, reducers, and escutcheons. Provide new rigid or flexible supply stops to all new fixtures,

including kitchen equipment supplied by others.

2.12 AIR CHAMBERS AND SHOCK ARRESTORS

A. Provide air chambers at far end of each hot and cold water supply branch, to each single fixture and group

of fixtures. Air chambers shall be full size of branch connection or 1 inch diameter minimum (whichever

is the larger) and 18 inches long for single fixtures, with measured distance from tee connection at fixture

supply to top of air chamber.

B. In place of air chambers, stainless steel metal bellows type shock arrestors with sealed-in air charge may

be used, if approved by Engineer prior to installation. All parts which come in contact with water shall be

stainless steel. Shock arrestors shall be sized in accordance with PDI WH-201. Note that the contractor

shall be responsible for installing shock arrestors wherever quick-closing valves or devices are used in the

plumbing system, although these shock arrestors may not be explicitly identified and located on the

Project Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.




3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.

F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply

one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting.

K. Establish invert elevations, with slopes for drainage at 1/4 inch per foot minimum for pipe sizes up to 2

1/2" and at 1/8 inch per foot minimum for pipe sizes above 2 1/2". Maintain gradients.

L. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

N. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sized 2 inches and smaller, minimum of one.

Provide each plug cock sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench with set screw.

O. Use lead-free solder and flux for all domestic hot and cold water piping joint connections.

P. Use Type K, one-piece copper piping insulated with 1/2 inch thick flexible closed-cell polyethylene

insulation for all water piping which is installed within concrete block walls or buried within the floor

slab. Refer to Section 15260 for piping insulation.

Q. Horizontal waste piping branches shall connect to the base of a stack or horizontal stack offset a

minimum of ten pipe diameters from the stack in the direction of flow.

R. Do not "bullhead" any piping systems.

S. Install all piping at elevations indicated on Project Drawings. Where no elevations are indicated, install

piping as high as possible.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Use mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. Provide adequate clearances for

service.

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

C. Install lead-free bronze male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters

to pipe.

D. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.




E. Install globe or ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

F. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

G. Install shock arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve.

H. Do not use PVC piping as part of the building sanitary waste piping system whenever service water

temperatures exceed 140 degrees F. Kitchen waste and vent piping shall be cast iron throughout. If not

certain whether PVC piping will be acceptable, consult Architect/Engineer prior to submission of bid.

3.04 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid

(hydrochloric).

C. The complete piping system, or parts thereof, shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at

least 50 mg/l (ppm) of chlorine, and then the piping system, or parts thereof, shall be valved off and

allowed to stand for 24 hours.

D. Bleed water from outlets and flush system with clean potable water until chlorine does not remain in the

water coming from the system.

E. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and

analyze in accordance with methods prescribed by the health authority having jurisdiction. Repeat the

entire procedure if it is shown by a bacteriological examination made by the testing authority that

contamination is still present in the system.

3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations

required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with

slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

B. Provide new water service, complete with reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-

pass valves. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge.

Caulk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete

wall. Verify main system water pressure from source to new water service, and, where new water service

pressure exceeds 80 PSI, also provide line-size pressure reducing valve downstream of new water meter.







PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 14 00- 1

SECTION 22 14 00

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Cleanouts.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 22 10 00 - Plumbing Piping.

B. Section 22 42 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.

C. Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment.


A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CLEANOUTS

A. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.

B. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed

cover.

C. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep

holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in

service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.

D. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed

cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.

E. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical

rainwater leaders.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate cutting and forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.



PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 14 00- 2

3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of

graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Provide and install a backflow preventer at domestic cold water service entrance to the building. Use

double check valve type, unless required to use reduced pressure type by local authority having

jurisdiction.

E. Provide and install backflow preventers at cold water makeup connections to boilers and water heaters.

Use continuous pressure type for these applications.

F. Provide and install one hose bibb with vacuum breaker in each public toilet room, beneath one public

lavatory.

G. Provide and install trap primer valve, complete with 1/2 inch cold water piping connection from trap

primer valve to primer connection at trap, for each individual installed floor drain (all types). Install trap

primer valves in concealed, accessible locations. Note that trap primers are not indicated on the Project

Drawings, but shall be included as part of work scope for all floor drains and floor sinks.







PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 42 00- 1

SECTION 22 42 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Hand Sink.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 23 05 29 - Anchors and Supports.

B. Section 22 10 00 - Plumbing Piping.

C. Section 22 14 00 - Plumbing Specialties.

D. Related Division 1 Specifications.


A. Fixtures: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout.

B. Trim: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout.

C. All fixtures and trim shall comply with Federal and State regulations regarding maximum permissible

content of lead in these products. More stringent of these requirements shall apply in all cases. It shall be

the Contractor's responsibility to verify that the lead content of all fixtures and trim used on this Project

comply with all applicable regulations.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Include fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.

B. Fixtures submitted for use on the Project, substituted for those fixtures as herein specified, shall be

verified by the contractor to have equal or lesser requirements in regard to pressures required for proper

fixture operation. Particular attention shall be paid to fixtures with flush valve trim. The contractor shall

accept all responsibility for any resulting inadequate operating pressures which result from substitution of

fixtures as specified herein.


A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1 Specifications.

B. Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 42 00- 2

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HAND SINK

1. Lavatory: ANSI A112.19.2; Powder coated steel cabinet with #304 18 ga brushed stainless steel

countertop, integral sink and 4” stainless backsplash with sound deading coatings on the underside – see

construction documents for design.

2. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply, fitting with open grid strainer, rigid/swing

gooseneck spout, 0.5 GPM aerator, with wrist blade handles, chrome plated 17 gage brass offset drain

with cleanout plug and arm with escutcheon;

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and

installation.

B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to all fixtures, with angle valves with wheel handles or

loose key locking shield handles, screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons.

C. Install components level and plumb.

D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports, wall carriers and bolts.

E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant.

F. Cover all exposed waste and water piping beneath handicapped use lavatories and sinks with form-fitted

vinyl plastisol insulation, equal to Brocar Products "Trap Wrap".

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

C. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended to hold fixture in place.




CAPTAIN ISAAC PAINE ELEMENTARY SCHHOL



BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 03 00 - 1

SECTION 23 03 00

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to

Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.02 WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in phases to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during the

construction period. Coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Architect/Engineer. 1.03 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's

option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Schedule of Alternates - see Division 1 Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. Provide submittals, including

specifications, design data, and calculations (as required) for all equipment and materials relating to Division 15 Specifications which are proposed for use on the project. No work will be allowed to proceed until the Architect/Engineer's submittal review is completed.

B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related

systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.

D. Products which are submitted for use on the Project must be equal in quality, performance and serviceability to the products as shown on the Project Drawings and Specifications, including any accessories as noted or specified. It shall be the mechanical contractor's responsibility to verify product equality to the Architect/Engineer's satisfaction before substitution of products will be allowed. If requested, the contractor shall furnish samples of any submitted equipment and materials for general inspection to check for conformity with the requirements of the Specifications.

E. Where the contractor proposes to use items and equipment other than those specified and/or

detailed on the Project Drawings, which may require any redesign of the structure, partitions,


Captain Isaac Paine Elementary School- Mechanical System Renovations Foster, RI


foundation, piping, wiring, or any other parts of the mechanical, electrical, and/or architectural layouts, all such required redesign, including new drawings and detailing necessary, shall be prepared by the contractor at the contractor's expense, and shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

F. The mechanical contractor shall prepare and submit As-Built drawings of all systems and

equipment at the completion of all systems installation. These drawings shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer for review and approval. Any deviations from the original Project Drawings shall be so noted.

G. If requested, the mechanical contractor shall submit a schedule of values, reflecting reasonable

and true line item costs, to the Architect/Engineer as part of the Project records. This schedule of values will be submitted prior to the start of construction.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authorities having jurisdiction. All permits,

inclusive of their associated costs, are the responsibility of the contractor who performs the related work. The contractor shall verify availability of utility services, including water and natural gas pressures required, invert elevations for connection to sanitary waste systems, etc., and obtain authorization and approval from the respective utility for connections as required for this Project. Any fees required by the respective utilities for installation and connection to these services shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Satisfactory proof of final inspection and approval by all authorities having jurisdiction shall be presented to the Architect/Engineer before work is accepted.

B. All materials and equipment shall be designed, constructed, installed and tested in strict

accordance with these specifications and the latest editions of all of the following applicable standards:

Rhode Island State Building Code RISBC National Environmental System Contractors Assoc. NESCA American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASME American Society of Testing Materials ASTM National Electric Code NEC National Fire Code NFC National Fire Protection Association NFPA Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA Occupational Health and Safety Act OSHA Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Inst. ARI Air Moving and Conditioning Association AMCA American Society of Heating, Refrigeration

and Air Conditioning Engineers ASHRAE National Sanitation Foundation NSF Rhode Island Department of Health RIDH Environmental Protection Agency EPA Building Officials Conference of America BOCA Federal Construction Safety Standards FCSS American Gas Association AGA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors

National Association SMACNA All applicable local ordinances and codes

C. The above listed codes and standards shall be followed as minimum requirements and shall not

relieve the mechanical contractor from any additional requirements as indicated on the Project Drawings or as herein specified. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict




with Division 15 Specifications, the more stringent provisions shall govern and shall be conformed to.

D. Any materials or workmanship called for in the above referenced requirements not specified or

shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed by the contractor as though same had been specifically indicated or mentioned. Any work installed in conflict with these requirements shall become the sole responsibility of the contractor, who shall assume the expense to rectify the installation to the Architect/Engineer's satisfaction.

E. The contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any deviations from the above referenced

requirements pertaining to work indicated or specified before the installation of this work is affected.

F. The contractor is strongly urged to visit jobsite and review existing conditions which may affect

contractor's work, prior to submission of bid. Contractor shall be advised that no extra compensation will be provided for any additional work required to be done to provide complete functional systems, if a site review would have identified the necessity for the additional work. This condition will be strictly conformed to, even if all required work is not explicitly indicated on the Project Drawings.

1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. As the

drawings are diagrammatic and approximate, unless fixed by dimensions, actual field conditions shall govern the exact location of ductwork and piping installation locations. Do not scale Drawings for exact locations. Maintain all required clearances from and around all new and existing mechanical and electrical equipment and apparatus, as noted in equipment or apparatus manufacturer's installation requirements or applicable standards and codes.

B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions,

including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding. No additional compensation will be allowed for these changes as required by Project conditions.

C. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to review all Project Drawings which may affect the

location of any equipment and apparatus installation locations and/or permit full coordination of work with other trades. The right to make any reasonable change in location of apparatus and equipment up to the time of rough-in is reserved by the Architect/Engineer. Such changes shall be made without additional expense to the Owner.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. 1.08 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. The general contractor shall be responsible for providing the services of an AABC or NEBB certified testing, adjusting and balancing firm. This balancing firm shall be responsible for testing, adjusting and balancing all systems and equipment to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. This work shall be performed by a balancing firm that is not directly or indirectly employed by the mechanical contractor.

B. All required tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer, or their

representatives. 1.09 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS




A. Only the latest editions and revisions of standards and codes referenced in Division 15 Specifications shall apply to the work.

B. The Specifications and Project Drawings are complementary, one to the other. Any items

mentioned or called for by one shall be considered as being indicated in both the Specifications and the Project Drawings.

C. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for complete and

satisfactory installation. D. All materials and equipment shall be delivered to the job site wrapped in protective covering,

and shall be stored in a clean, dry location free from dust and water, in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling. Damaged items shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Any items subject to moisture or condensation shall be completely replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible for providing starters and disconnects for all

equipment specified under Division 15 Specifications, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Starters shall be Cutler Hammer or equal with push buttons, HAND-OFF-AUTO switches, overload and low voltage protection, and auxiliary contacts as required by operational sequences as specified in Section 15985. Starters for three-phase motors shall be magnetic type, unless stated otherwise. When automatic or interlocking control of single phase motors is required, provide with magnetic starters. Manually controlled single-phase motors shall be provided with two-pole manual thermal switch. Starters and disconnects for outdoor use shall be of weatherproof type (NEMA Type 3R).

1.10 DEFINITIONS

A. "Contractor" means specifically sub-contractor working under his respective section of specifications.

B. "Furnish" and/or "Provide" means to supply, erect, install and connect up complete in readiness

for regular operation, particular work referred to, unless otherwise specified.

C. "Piping" includes in addition to pipe, all fittings, valves, hangers and other accessories relating to such piping.

D. "Ductwork" includes in addition to pipe, all fittings, valves, hangers and other accessories

relating to such piping.

E. "Concealed" means hidden from view, in chases, walls or underground.

F. "Exposed" means not installed underground, or concealed as defined above.

G. "Supply" means purchase and delivery of material to the site.

H. "Install" means to erect in place the supplied item. 1.11 GUARANTEE

A. The mechanical contractor shall guarantee, in writing, the quality of all materials, equipment and workmanship furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of this installation by the Owner, and shall replace any defective apparatus, material and equipment at the mechanical contractor's expense. This guarantee shall be endorsed and shall be submitted to the Owner by the General Contractor.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used END OF SECTION 23 00 00






SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 05 29 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29

SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Equipment bases and supports. C. Sleeves and seals. D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon steel,

adjustable, clevis. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron

roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp;

adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe

saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. I. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over

insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support. J. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering

protective saddles.




K. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness.

L. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection

with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.

B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb/sq ft sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.05 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:

Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping, Fire Protection System Piping, Cast Iron,

PVC and Copper DWV Piping, Electrical and Communications Conduit through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves. All openings shall have been tested and approved by UL. Utilize proper rated penetrations equal to or greater than the barrier assembly at which the penetration occur. Firestop openings in accordance with Specification Section 15100.

D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for

continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 2.07 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl




spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts to for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced

concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with

recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab. 3.02 PIPE AND DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 2-1/2 to 3 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 4 inch 4'-0" 5/8"

6 inch 4'-0" 3/4" PVC (All Sizes) 4'-0" 3/8" C.I. Bell and Spigot 4'-0" 1/2" (or No-Hub) and at joints B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent

work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between

hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.




I. Provide rigid support sway bracing (restraints) and hanger rod stiffeners on all vertical risers

and horizontal piping runs at changes in direction 45 degrees or greater, for all pipe sizes 4 inch diameter and larger. Restraints shall be equal to B-Line B22 channel with B335-2 adjustable hinges; hanger rod stiffeners shall be equal to B-Line B22 channel with SC228 or SC-UB rod stiffener assembly.

J. Provide piping restraints as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. TRANSVERSE MAX. LONGITUDINAL SPACING SPACING 1 inch 14'-0" 28'-0" 1-1/4 inch 16'-0" 32'-0" 1-1/2 inch 18'-0" 36'-0" 2 inch 20'-0" 40'-0"

2-1/2 inch 22'-0" 44'-0" 3 inch 24'-0" 48'-0" 4 inch 28'-0" 56'-0" 6 inch 34-0" 68'-0"

K. Support all ductwork in accordance with SMACNA standards, latest edition(s).

L. All piping and ductwork shall be supported independently from the building structure. In no circumstance will supports and/or hangers be allowed to be attached from adjacent piping and/or ductwork.

3.03 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

B. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

C. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

D. Provide six inch high concrete pad for each boiler and water heater set on floor. Overall pad dimensions shall be equal to equipment dimensions plus six inches all around.

3.04 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate

weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead

worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash and seal.

C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides




with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal all drains, cleanouts, and all other floor and/or roof penetrations watertight to adjacent

materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface.

Flexible sheet flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight. 3.05 SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth and

provide floor plate. C. Where piping, conduit or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between

pipe or duct and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. Refer to Specification Section 15100 for approved firestopping materials and methods.

D. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

E. All firestopping and waterproofing devices installed at penetrations and openings through fire resistive walls and floors shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.




CAPTAIN ISAAC PAINE ELEMENTARY SCHHOL



VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 23 05 48 - 1

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Inertia bases.

B. Vibration isolation.

C. Seismic restraints. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE - Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition.

1.04 CERTIFICATES

A. Submit manufacturer's certificate that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.05 SEISMIC ANALYSIS AND CERTIFICATION

A. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork shall be seismically supported, including all roof-mounted equipment, floor-mounted equipment, and equipment, piping and ductwork supported from the building structure. The contractor shall retain a specialty consultant or equipment manufacturer to develop a seismic restraint system, and perform seismic calculations in accordance with the state and local codes, as well as additional requirements as specified in this section. Calculations, restraint selections, and installation details shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer, registered in the state where the work will be performed, experienced in the design and installation of seismic restraint systems.

B. The seismic restraint design, consisting of calculations, restraint selection, installation details,

and other pertinent documentation, shall be submitted in accordance with these specifications. Submittal shall be signed and sealed by the professional engineer, as stated above. This submittal will become part of the project design calculations, included in the project records, and, where required, shall be submitted to the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. The seismic restraint design shall clearly indicate the attachment points to the building structure

and all design forces (in X, Y, and Z directions) at the attachment points. The seismic restraint




engineer shall coordinate all attachments with the building's structural engineer of record, who shall verify the attachment methods and the ability of the building structure to accept the loads imposed.

D. The seismic restraint design shall be based on the actual equipment data (dimensions, center of

gravity, weight, etc.) obtained from submittals or from the equipment manufacturers. The equipment manufacturers shall verify that the attachment points on the equipment can accept the combination of seismic, weight, and other loads imposed. For life safety systems and other systems that must remain operational during and after an earthquake (and for design under IBC 2000), the manufacturer shall provide certification that the equipment can accept the loads imposed and remain operational.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ISOLATION PRODUCTS A. TYPE A - MOUNTINGS Double deflection neoprene mounting shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.35". All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided for these areas where bolting is required. On equipment such as small vent sets and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mountings to compensate for the overhang. Mountings shall be type ND or rails type DNR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. B. TYPE B - MOUNTINGS Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflections, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. C. TYPE C - MOUNTINGS Equipment with operating weight different from the installed weight such as chillers, boilers, etc. and equipment exposed to the wind such as cooling towers shall be mounted on spring mountings as described in Type B above, but a housing shall be used that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection and cooling tower mounts shall be located between the supporting steel and roof or the grillage and dunnage as shown on the drawings. The installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance of 1/2" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operations. Mounting used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. D. TYPE D - HANGERS Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing thru a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have




a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. E. TYPE E - HANGERS Vibration hangers shall be as described in Type D above, but they shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Hangers shall by type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. F. TYPE F - HANGERS Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short circuiting of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to wing thru a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of rated deflection. Hangers shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end and provision to attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be type W30 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. G. TYPE G - BASES Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases. Bases shall be rectangular in shape for all equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases which may be 'T' or 'L' shaped. Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14" provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of one inch. Bases shall be type WF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. H. TYPE H - BASES Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide steel members welded to height saving brackets to cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. Members shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment. Inverted saddles shall be type ICS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. I. TYPE I - BASES Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish rectangular structural beam of channel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12" unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. In general, bases shall be a minimum of 1/12th of the longest dimension of the base, but not less than 6". Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of half-inch bars or angles welded in place on 6" centers running both ways in a layer 1 1/2" above the bottom, or additional steel as is required by the structural conditions. Forms shall be furnished with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the anchor bolts fall in concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1" clearance below the base. Bases shall be type K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal.




J. TYPE J - FLEXIBLE HOSES Flexible neoprene connectors shall be used on all equipment as indicated on the drawings or on the equipment schedule. They shall be manufactured of multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded and cured in hydraulic rubber presses. No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement. Straight connectors shall have two spheres. Connectors up to and including 1 1/2" diameter may have threaded ends. Connectors 2" and larger shall be manufactured with floating galvanized flanges recessed to lock the connector's raised face neoprene flanges. Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves. Connectors shall be rated a minimum of 150 psi at 220 F. Flanged equipment shall be directly connected to neoprene elbows in the size range 2 1/2" through 12" if the piping makes a 90 degree turn at the equipment. All straight through connections shall be made with twin spheres properly pre-extended as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent additional elongation under pressure. 12" and larger sizes operating above 100 psi shall employ control cables with end fittings isolated by means of 1/2" thick bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings designed for a maximum of 1000 psi. Submittals shall include two test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies. Elbows shall be Mason-Flex type MFNEC, straight connectors Mason-Flex type MFTFU or MFTNC, and control cable assemblies type ACC, all as manufactured by Mason Industries Inc., or equal. K. TYPE K - FLEXIBLE HOSES Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3" and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Lengths shall be as tabulated: Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. L. TYPE L - ACOUSTICAL FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL SEAL Where piping passes through equipment walls, floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1" past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 F, 10# density fiberglass may be type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. M. TYPE M - PIPE ANCHORS Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide an all directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum half inch thickness of heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation material. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. all-directional anchors shall be type LADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. N. TYPE X - HORIZONTAL THRUST RESTRAINTS Air handling equipment shall be protected against excessive displacement which might result from high air thrusts in relation to the equipment weight. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene pad as described for Type B mountings with the same deflection as




specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4" movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and ductwork or the equipment and the structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrically on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall WB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. O. TYPE Y - ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT BASES Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit over the roof curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The aluminum members shall house cadmium plated springs having 1 inch minimum deflection with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. Submittals shall include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details. Curb mounted based shall be Typed CMAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or equal. P. TYPE N - HORIZONTAL PIPE ISOLATION The first three pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described for Type E hangers. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described for D hangers. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described for Type C mountings. Heat exchangers shall be considered part of the piping run. All Type E Hangers or the first three Type C mounts as noted above, will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. (Note: If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceiling under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75" deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3", 1.5" deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6", and 2.5" deflection thereafter.) All other hangers and mounts will have a minimum steel spring deflection of 0.75 ". Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead supports as practical. Equipment Room Seals. All piping passing through the equipment room walls, floors or ceilings, shall be protected against sound leakage by means of an acoustical wall seal as described in specification for Type M anchors. Q. TYPE O - RISER ISOLATION Risers shall be suspended from or supported by Type E hangers or Type C mountings and the piping anchors, all as indicated on the riser drawings. Steel spring deflections shall be a minimum 0.75" except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load changes to plus or minus 25% of the initial stress. R. TYPE P - DUCT ISOLATION All discharge runs for a distance of 50' from the connected equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of Type F hangers or Type C floor supports. Spring deflections shall be a minimum of 0.75". 2.02 FABRICATION

A. Provide pairs of neoprene side snubbers or restraining springs where side torque or thrust may develop.




B. Color code spring mounts. C. Select springs to operate at 2/3 maximum compression strain, with 1/4 inch ribbed neoprene

pads.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install vibration isolators for motor driven equipment. See Schedule below for type to be used for each piece of equipment.

B. Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. Adjust equipment

level. C. Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated equipment as follows: Up to 4 inch

diameter, first three points of support; 5 to 8 inch diameter, first four points of support; 10 inch diameter and over, first six points of support. Static deflection of first point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment.

3.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE Ground 20'span 30'Span 40'Span 50'Span Supported Possible Possible Possible Possible Slab or Defl Defl Defl Defl Basement 0.67" 1.0" 1.33" 1.67" Engineering Spec & Min. Static Defl (inch) PUMPS (note 2) Close Coupled Thru 5 HP A-J-K 0.35 B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 1.5 B-J-K 1.5 7 1/2 HP and larger B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 1.5 B-J-K 1.5 B-J-K 2.5 Base Mounted Up to 60 HP B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 0.75 B-J-K 1.5 B-J-K 1.5 B-J-K 2.5 FACTORY ASSEMBLED HVAC UNITS Curb Mounted Rooftop Units -- -- Y 1.0 Y 1.0 Z 2.5 Z 3.5 Suspended Units Thru 5 HP D 1.0 D 1.0 D 1.0 D 1.0 D 1.0

NOTES 1. The minimum deflections called for in this specification are not 'nominal' but certifiable minimums.

The 0.75", 1.5", 2.5", 3.5", and 4.5" minimums should selected from manufacturers nominal 1", 2", 3", 4", and 5" series respectively. Our 1965 callouts of 1" deflection for floor mounts was seldom, if ever, met because of infinite load and limited spring selection. The 0.75" is an attainable minimum from a 1" deflection series and should be insisted upon.

2. If flexible spherical connectors are not to be used omit the letters K or L from the Engineering Spec.

If stainless steel hose is required, substitute L for K. If stainless steel hose is not to be used with air compressors omit L.

3. Floating concrete inertia bases do not reduce vibration transmitted to the structure through the

mountings. These bases will reduce vibratory motion, provide a very rigid machine base and minimize spring reactions to fan thrust. Engineers preferring steel bases rather than the concrete




mentioned above in Specification B-J should change the designation to B-G. Concrete is preferred for all fans operating at static pressure above 4" and on roof tops.

4. When floors or roofs are lighter than 4" solid concrete it is desirable to introduce a localized mass

under the vibration mountings in the form of a sub-base. This sub-base should be 12" thick and 12" longer and wider than the mechanical equipment above it. When this mass is provided the 30' minimum static deflection requirements will suffice even in longer bays. The mass is also useful for unusually large bays over 50'.

When floors are lighter than the 4" concrete or the location is in a particularly sensitive area and the mass described above cannot be introduced, select deflection requirements for the next larger span.







TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems. C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 ALLOWANCES A. Adjusting and balancing of systems as specified in this Section shall be included as part of the

Contract Sum. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B. ASHRAE - 1984 Systems Handbook: Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of

Contract. B. Submit test reports as a submittal under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. C. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment

data required. D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies

for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and

indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

F. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms prior to commencing system balance.




1.05 REPORT FORMS A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms. B. Forms shall include the following information: 1. Title Page: a. Company name b. Company address c. Company telephone number d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude 2. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 3. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Air flow, specified and actual e. Return air flow, specified and actual f. Outside air flow, specified and actual g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual h. Inlet pressure i. Discharge pressure j. Fan RPM 4. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Outside air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature l. Design outside/return air ratio m. Actual outside/return air ratio 5. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. HP/BHP c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load. d. RPM e. Service factor f. Starter size, rating, heater elements 6. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM




c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 7. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor 8. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow 9. Pump Data: a. Identification/number b. Manufacturer c. Size/model d. Impeller e. Service f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP h. Discharge pressure i. Suction pressure j. Total operating head pressure k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures l. Shut off, total head pressure 10. Heating Coil Data: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Water flow, design and actual g. Water pressure drop, design and actual h. Entering water temperature, design and actual i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual j. Entering air temperature, design and actual k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual l. Air pressure drop, design and actual 11. Duct Leak Test: a. Description of ductwork under test b. Duct design operating pressure c. Duct design test static pressure d. Duct capacity, air flow




e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor f. Test apparatus 1) Blower 2) Orifice, tube size 3) Orifice size 4) Calibrated g. Test static pressure h. Test orifice differential pressure i. Leakage 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. Accurately record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in

this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC. Perform Work under supervision of Certified Test and Balance Engineer.

B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field

Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work

before Substantial Completion of Project. 1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final

filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Correct fan rotation. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.




10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage has been minimized. 12. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Correct pump rotation. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open. B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Architect/Engineer. C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system

balance. D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed. E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments

available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10

percent for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated. B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed condition. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings

to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such

disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing

doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or

areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and

exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of

duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.




D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts

and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not

create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.

Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or

inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure

drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design

conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check

leakage. 3.06 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to determine

flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements

prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and

fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts,

full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. END OF SECTION 23 05 93






DUCTWORK INSULATION 23 07 13 - 1

SECTION 23 07 13

DUCTWORK INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork insulation. B. Insulation jackets. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with three years minimum

experience. B. Materials: Flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating in accordance with NFPA 255

and UL 723. Fiberglass insulation shall have flame spread rating of 25/smoke developed rating of 50.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions with product data.

PART 1 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C553; commercial grade, 0.75 lb/cu ft density; 'R'

value of 5.0 at 75 degrees F; 0.002 inch foil scrim facing for heating, ventilation and air conditioning ducts.

B. Type B: Rigid glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3 lb/cu ft

with 0.002 inch foil scrim facing for heating, ventilation and air conditioning ducts within structure; 6 lb/cu ft with all-service jacket (maximum vapor transmission rate of .02 perms) for heating, ventilation and air conditioning ducts installed outdoors.




C. Type C: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C1071; 1.5 lb/cu ft density; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density; black, acrylic-coated mat on airstream side for maximum 4,000 ft/min air velocity.

D. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type. E. Indoor Jacket: Presized glass cloth, minimum 7.8 oz/sq yd. F. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to NFPA 255. G. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, and self-adhesive pad. H. Joint and Covering Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh. I. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after ductwork has been tested and approved. B. Clean surfaces for adhesives. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient temperature. C. Exterior Insulation (Type A or Type B) Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier

adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners

where necessary to prevent sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

4. For ductwork installed outdoors, completely seal all joints, breaks, punctures, and protruberances using vapor barrier adhesive and minimum 3 inch wide strip of material similar to insulation facing. Completely cover duct insulation with PVC jacket; overlap outer PVC jacketing a minimum of 2 inches on the down side, so as to shed water. Seal all outer PVC jacketing joints with solvent type PVC sealer.

D. Liner (Type C) Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with

mechanical fasteners on 15 inch centers maximum on top and side of ductwork with dimension exceeding 20 inches. Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.

2. Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase ductwork to allow for insulation thickness.

E. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.

F. Apply insulation after all ductwork has been inspected by Architect/Engineer for visible defects




and faulty installation. 3.03 SCHEDULE INSULATION DUCTWORK TYPE THICKNESS Concealed Exhaust Ducts within A 3" 10 ft of Exterior Openings and Concealed Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air, Concealed Outdoor Air Intake Ducts Exposed Exhaust Ducts Within 10 B 2" ft of Exterior Openings and Exposed Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air, Exposed Outdoor Air Intake Ducts Concealed Supply/Return/Exhaust Ducts A 3" Return and Relief Ducts in B 2" Mechanical Rooms Internal Lining in Supply and C 1" Return Ducts (Indicated by dashed lines within ductwork on Project Drawings- duct sizes shown are free and clear inside dimensions) END OF SECTION 23 07 00






PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 1

SECTION 23 07 19

PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three years minimum

experience. B. Materials: Flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating in accordance with NFPA 255

and UL 723. Fiberglass insulation shall have flame spread rating of 25/smoke developed rating of 50; calcium silicate insulation shall have flame spread rating of 0/smoke developed rating of 0.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 INSULATION

A. Molded pipe insulation shall be manufactured to meet ASTM C 585 for sizes required in the particular system. It shall be of a type suitable for installation on piping systems. Molded fibrous glass pipe insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 547.

B. For indoor systems operating at temperatures from zero to +450F: Heavy density Fiberglas pipe

insulation with factory applied all-service jacket (ASJ) and Doublesure two component adhesive closure system, rated for a maximum service temperature of 850F. For large pipe sizes where SSL-II is not available, the single adhesive SSL closure may be substituted. Circumferential joints shall be sealed by butt strips having a two-component sealing system. Stapling is not required to complete the closure. When self sealing lap systems are used, sufficient thickness of insulation shall be used to maintain the outer surface temperature of the operating system below +150F. Manufacturer's data regarding thickness constraints in relation to operating temperature shall be followed. When multiple layers are required, all inner layer(s) shall be unjacketed. On cold systems, vapor barrier performance is extremely important. All penetrations of the ASJ and exposed ends of insulation must be sealed with vapor barrier mastic. If




humidities in excess of 90% are expected, the ASJ shall be protected with either a mastic coating or a suitable vapor retarding outer jacket. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section joint and at each fitting to provide isolation of water incursion.

C. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-formed fiberglass fittings, fabricated sections of

Fiberglas pipe insulation, Fiberglas pipe and tank insulation, Fiberglas blanket insulation, or insulating cement. Thickness shall be equal to adjacent pipe insulation. Finish shall be with pre-formed PVC fitting covers or as otherwise specified on contract drawings. Flanges, couplings and valve bonnets shall be covered with an oversized pipe insulation section sized to provide the same insulation thickness as on the main pipe section. An oversized insulation section shall be used to form a collar between the two insulation sections with low density blanket insulation being used to fill gaps. Jacketing shall match that used on straight pipe sections. Rough cut ends shall be coated with a suitable weather or vapor resistant mastic as dictated by the system location and service. On hot systems where fittings are to be left exposed, insulation ends should be beveled away from bolts for easy access. On cold systems, particular care must be given to vapor sealing the fitting cover or finish to the pipe insulation vapor barrier. All valve stems must be sealed with caulking which allows free movement of the stem but provides a seal against moisture incursion.

D. All piping shall be supported in such a manner that neither the insulation nor the vapor/weather

barrier is compromised by the hanger or the effects of the hanger. In all cases, hanger spacing must be such that the circumferential joint may be made outside the hanger. On cold systems, vapor barrier must be continuous, including material covered by the hanger saddle.

E. Piping systems 3" in diameter or less, insulated with Fiberglas insulation, may be supported by

placing saddles of the proper length and spacing, under the insulation.

F. For hot or cold piping systems larger than 3" in diameter, operating at temperatures less than +200F and insulated with fiber glass, high density inserts such as wood or foam with sufficient compressive strength shall be used to support the weight of the piping system. At temperatures exceeding 200F, Calcium Silicate pipe insulation shall be used for high density inserts.

G. Calcium Silicate pipe insulation may be used to support the entire weight of the piping system

provided the hanger saddle is designed so the maximum compressive load does not exceed 100 psi.

H. Where pipe shoes and roller supports are required, insulation shall be inserted in the pipe shoe

to minimize pipe heat loss. Where possible, the pipe shoe shall be sized to be flush with the outer pipe insulation diameter.

I. Thermal expansion and contraction of the piping and insulation system can generally be taken

care of by utilizing double layers of insulation and staggering both longitudinal and circumferential joints. Where long runs are encountered, expansion joints may be required where single layers of insulation are being used and should be so noted on the contract drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SITE INSPECTION

A. Before starting work under this section, carefully inspect the site and installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where installation of materials and accessories under this section can begin.

B. Verify that all materials and accessories can be installed in accordance with project drawings




and specifications and material manufacturers' recommendations.

C. Verify, by inspecting product labeling, submittal data, and/or certifications which may accompany the shipments, that all materials and accessories to be installed on the project comply with applicable specifications and standards and meet specified thermal and physical properties.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that all pipe and equipment surfaces over which insulation is to be installed are clean and dry.

B. Ensure that insulation is clean, dry, and in good mechanical condition with all factory-applied

vapor or weather barriers intact and undamaged. Wet, dirty, or damaged insulation shall not be acceptable for installation.

C. Ensure that pressure testing of piping or duct systems has been completed prior to installing

insulation. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install all insulation materials and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that it will serve its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on piping subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and

acceptance tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over all piping surfaces.

D. Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on all pipe insulation, protecting it

against puncture, tears or other damage.

E. Fittings: Cover valves, fittings, and similar items in each piping system using one of the following: Mitered sections of insulation equivalent in thickness and composition to that installed on straight pipe runs, or Insulation cement equal in thickness to the adjoining insulation, or PVC fitting covers insulated with material equal in thickness and composition to adjoining insulation.

F. Penetrations: Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar

piping penetrations, except where otherwise specified.

G. Joints: Butt pipe insulation against hanger inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints, and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. All pipe insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed, regardless of service.

H. Vertical Piping: All insulated, exposed vertical piping within the building and all insulated piping

exposed to the outdoors shall be additionally jacketed with 0.016" thick (minimum) aluminum. Vertical piping shall be protected to a height of 8'-0" above the floor.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Upon completion of all insulation work covered by this specification, visually inspect the work




and verify that it has been correctly installed. This may be done while work is in progress, to assure compliance with requirements herein to cover and protect insulation materials during installation.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, including insulation with vapor barrier damage and moisture-saturated insulation.

B. The insulation contractor shall advise the general and/or the mechanical contractor as to

requirements for protection of the insulation work during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration of the finished insulation work.

3.06 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. Insulation contractor's employees shall be properly protected during installation of all insulation. Protection shall include proper attire when handling and applying insulation materials, and shall include (but not be limited to) disposable dust respirators, gloves, hard hats, and eye protection.

B. The insulation contractor shall conduct all jobsite operations in compliance with applicable

provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, as well as with all state and/or local safety and health codes and regulations that may apply to the work.

3.07 SCHEDULE

A. Heating Hot Water - use the following thicknesses of insulation: Pipe Size Insulation Thickness Up to 2" 1 1/2 inch 2 1/2" and over 2 inch







COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00-1

SECTION 23 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section presents specific commissioning requirements for the Captain Isaac Paine Elementary

School Mechanical System Renovations project to be met in addition to other commissioning

requirements, including but not limited to Section 01 91 13 “General Commissioning

Requirements.”


A. Section 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements

B. Section 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. See Section 01 91 13 for abbreviations and definitions.

1.4 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Meet all the requirements of Section 01 91 13 “General Commissioning Requirements.”

B. Provide factory start-up and required technical personnel for participation in Owner’s

Commissioning.

C. Construction and Acceptance Phase

1. Provide submittal data, commissioning documentation, O&M data and training related to

Commissioning, including information from equipment suppliers.

2. Attend meetings necessary to facilitate the Commissioning process (refer to Section 01 91 13

and PART 3 of this specification for more information on meetings).

3. Review the commissioning Issues Log for items related to contracted work and assist the

commissioning team in addressing and resolving these issues.

4. Complete commissioning checklists provided by Stephen Turner Inc. and return completed

checklists to the Commissioning Team. Startup checklists may require specific input from the

Equipment Supplier such as a copy of the Manufacturer’s Startup Checklist.

5. Address any available Owner and Design Professional punch list items before final

commissioning testing. Discrepancies and problems shall be remedied before commissioning

testing of the respective systems.

6. Install a P/T plug at each water sensor that is an input point to the control system.

7. Complete water and air TAB with discrepancies and problems remedied before commissioning

testing of the respective air or water-related systems.




8. Execute commissioning tests, which will be developed and led by Stephen Turner Inc. Testing

will start at the components level, will proceed to the system level, and will end with inter-

system testing.

9. Correct issues (differences between required and observed performance) as interpreted by

Stephen Turner Inc., the Owner, and the Design Professional and retest the equipment.

10. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff, as required in PART 3 of this specification and

elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

11. Assist and cooperate with Stephen Turner Inc. Provide skilled technicians familiar with this

building to assist with commissioning testing.

D. Warranty Period

1. Execute seasonal or deferred commissioning testing, as applicable, witnessed by Stephen

Turner Inc. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-

built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.


A. For the following systems and components, Stephen Turner Inc. will develop pre-functional

checklists (PFCs) that are completed by the Trade Contractors (TC) and Functional Performance

Tests (FPTs) that are executed by the Trades with Stephen Turner Inc., as indicated.

Building Systems to be Commissioned Pre-Functional Checklists

Functional Performance Testing

HVAC Systems and Associated Controls

Fan Coil Units Yes 20 % Sampling

Energy Recovery Units Yes 100%

Duct Mounted Heating Coils Yes 100%

Heating Hot Water Pumps Yes 100%

New Controls for Heating Hot Water System

Yes 100%

B. The work provided under this Division that is listed above is included in the scope of the

Commissioning activities to meet the Owner’s goals.

C. In addition to component and systems level commissioning of the work listed, participation in inter-

system testing and integrated commissioning of interrelated work is required. For list of all

commissioned work see Section 01 91 13 “General Commissioning Requirements.”

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 BAS INTERFACE

A. If any special software or hardware is required to access BAS at controllers, integrators, and field

panels, it shall be made available to Stephen Turner Inc. for use during testing, and during the first

year of operation of the building if authorized by the Owner.

B. BAS access with log-ins having full override access shall be made available to Stephen Turner Inc.

prior to turnover of the building to the Owner.




2.2 P/T PLUGS

A. 1/4” & 1/2” NPT Pressure/Temperature Test Plugs & Caps:

1. P/T plugs shall have a self-sealing pierce-able rubber core that is rated at 1000 PSI and 275°F.

2. Pressure/Temperature test plugs shall be provided at each pressure or temperature sensor on

chilled and hot water systems where other means do not exist for temporary pressure and

temperature measurement access in hydronic systems without disturbing the process.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM PARTICIPATION

A. Each trade including all Sub-contractors, Tier Contractors, manufacturers’ start-up personnel, as

well as direct Equipment Suppliers shall designate personnel to be responsible for coordinating

commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority as required in Section 01 91 13

“General Commissioning Requirements.”

3.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Execution requirements for the following are in Section 01 91 13 “General Commissioning

Requirements” with additional specific requirements for this Division stated below:


A. Additional requirements for this Division:

1. Attendance of regularly scheduled commissioning meetings is required by at least one (1)

representative from the Contractor(s) for the systems being commissioned during delivery,

installation, and start-up, and when checklists and tests are being performed.

2. As specific issues arise, a representative from each direct equipment supplier, and each

supplier of other equipment not adequately represented by technical personnel from the

responsible Contractor will be required to attend the meeting to assist in resolutions.

3.4 SUBMITTALS


1. The BAS/Controls Contractor’s Submittals of the Sequences of Operations shall demonstrate

that the control design and application incorporates the requirements provided by the Design

Professional within the contract documents into a fully functional building automation system.

The controls submittals shall document Step-by-Step Control sequences for each controlled

device, for each mode of operation, and for each possible transition from one mode to another.

The BAS/Controls Contractor’s submittals of control drawings shall include complete,

functional, and detailed Sequences of Operation for each piece of equipment, regardless of the

completeness and clarity of the sequences in the specifications. Sequences documented in the

submittals of control drawings shall include all custom and standard sequence elements

including but not limited to:

a. Start-up sequences

b. Warm-up mode sequences

c. Normal occupied operating mode sequences

d. Unoccupied mode sequences

e. Shutdown sequences

f. Capacity control and staging sequences

g. Temperature and pressure control sequences including setbacks, resets, and step or mode

changes




h. Detailed sequences for implementing required economizer, optimum start/stop, demand

limiting and other modes

i. Sequences for maintaining required outside air ventilation criteria in all occupied modes,

including sequences for any CO2-based demand controlled ventilation airflow rates with

minimum and maximum airflow rates at normal and high CO2 levels

j. Sequences for any unoccupied setbacks from maximum required ventilation rate (based

on both number of occupants and square feet per ASHRAE Standard 62.1, for example)

to minimum required ventilation rate (based on square feet only per ASHRAE Standard

62.1)

k. Emergency or stand-by power sequences where applicable, including effects of power or

equipment failure and all stand-by functions

l. Effects of equipment failure

m. Sequences for all alarms and emergency shut-downs including annunciation and

notification sequences

n. Seasonal operation variations and recommendations including all change-over sequences

and requirements

o. Initial and recommended values for all adjustable settings, setpoints, and parameters that

are typically set or adjusted by operating staff

p. Initial and recommended values for all adjustable settings, setpoints, and parameters, as

well as control settings, delays, or fixed values that will be implemented or used during

BAS/Controls Contractor’s start-up and testing

q. Schedules, if known

r. All interlocks, interfaces, and interactions with other systems including controls systems

provided by others.

s. Detailed delineation of control interface between any packaged equipment controls and

the BAS, listing all controllable or adjustable points and all monitoring points.

t. Written sequences of control for packaged controlled equipment, including additional

clarifying narrative for equipment manufacturers’ stock sequences.

u. Description of graphics to be developed and programmed during construction.

2. The BAS submittal shall include all engineering drawings and product data.

a. Product data sheets submitted prior to engineering drawings will be deemed not suitable

for further review until complete engineering drawings are provided.

3. If the engineer’s specified sequences are not clear or do not contain enough detail for Stephen

Turner Inc. to develop detailed functional test procedures for evaluation in the field, the BAS

vendor shall elaborate on or expand on them in the BAS Submittal, or shall submit RFIs in

advance of the BAS Submittal requiring the Design Professional to provide such elaboration or

clarification. The Design Professional shall coordinate such clarifications and ensure that they

are contained in the BAS Submittal prior to circulating it for review.

4. The BAS Submittal shall include a list of proposed alarms with the priority code for alarm

annunciation and alarm clear for each alarm listed.

5. HVAC product data submittals for any packaged or skid-mounted equipment that includes

factory OEM controls shall include detailed sequences including setpoints, inputs, outputs, and

logic in sufficient detail for Stephen Turner Inc. to develop specific functional testing

procedures to verify controls functionality. Points lists, communication protocol (BACnet or

other), and lists of preprogrammed alarms shall be included.

6. HVAC coordination drawing submittals shall include complete thermal metering plans, if

applicable, demonstrating compliance with the Owner’s metering standard and interface to the

building metering system.




7. The TAB Contractor shall submit a project-specific TAB Submittal six (6) weeks prior to

starting TAB work. This plan will be developed after the TAB Contractor has some familiarity

with the systems and associated control systems. The Submittal shall address each system and

component, and shall include but not be limited to:

a. TAB Contractor’s certifications and credentials to perform the contracted work.

b. Certification that the TAB has reviewed the construction documents and the systems with

the design engineers and contractors to sufficiently understand the design intent for each

system.

c. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent

calibration date.

d. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system for review and

comment on feasibility by the BAS contractor and Stephen Turner Inc.

e. All field checkout sheets and logs to be used that list each piece of equipment to be

tested, adjusted and balanced with the data to be gathered for each.

f. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings

during the process.

g. Final test report forms to be used.

h. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue: terminal flow

calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser proportioning, branch / sub-main

proportioning, total flow calculations, rechecking, diversity issues, expected problems

and solutions, etc. Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and

sensors will be discussed. Provide the analogous explanations for the water side.

i. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements

to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be

used.

j. Details of how total flow will be determined.

1) Air: sum of terminal flows via BAS calibrated readings or via hood readings of all

terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations.

2) Water: pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.

k. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the

lowest possible pressures and provide methods to verify this.

l. Confirmation that TAB contractor understands the outside air ventilation criteria under

all conditions.

1) Details of whether and how minimum outside air cfm will be verified and set, and

for what level (total building, zone, etc.).

2) Details of how any CO2-based demand controlled ventilation airflow rates will be

verified at various CO2 levels.

3) Details of verification for any unoccupied setbacks from maximum required

ventilation rate (based on both number of occupants and square feet per ASHRAE

Standard 62.1, for example) to minimum required ventilation rate (based on square

feet only per ASHRAE Standard 62.1)

m. Details of how building static and exhaust fan / relief damper capacity will be checked.

Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement methods.

n. Details of methods for making any specified coil or other system plant capacity

measurements. Details of any TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.), or of areas

to be built out later.

o. Phasing plan for performing TAB work by floor or area, and details regarding specified

deferred or seasonal TAB work.

p. Details of any specified false loading of systems to complete TAB work.




q. Details of all exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required

room pressure differentials.

r. Procedures for verifying required room pressure differentials.

s. Details of any required interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements and

calculations.

t. Plan for hand-written field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted

work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and

frequency).

u. Plan for formal progress reports (scope, frequency and distribution list).

v. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution list).

w. Procedures for addressing partial build-out, diversity, and part load issues including false

loading or other approaches where allowed.

x. Methods to make all specified coil and system capacity measurements.

y. Specific procedures to ensure both water and air distribution systems operate at the

lowest possible pressures and the methods to verify and document this.

z. Proposed points for sound measurements including proposed measurement methods.

8. The HVAC Submittals shall:

a. Include ranges for all thermometers, pressure gauges, flow meters, and other measuring

devices.

b. Provide performance data including range, accuracy, data storage, local read-out, and

data connections for each meter type submitted.

c. Include service designation for each individual system, including each duct system and

piping system, fittings and joining materials, each insulation system, all valves, all piping

specialties, and all accessories. These shall be presented in table format, to clearly

indicate where each type of material will be used for each system. Generic cut sheets that

do not indicate the specific application are not acceptable. Copies of the project

specifications are not acceptable.

d. Provide detailed product data for each piece of equipment including capacities, electrical

components and requirements, including all specified product attributes.

e. Provide performance curves (full and part-load as applicable) for each pump, fan, and

piece of unitary equipment submitted.

f. Provide Manufacturers’ detailed installation requirements clearly marked (arrow,

underline, circled, etc.) to indicate only the intended item.

g. Provide Manufacturers’ detailed start-up requirements and procedures clearly marked

(arrow, underline, circled, etc.) to indicate only the intended item.

h. Provide Manufacturers’ operation instructions clearly marked (arrow, underline, circled,

etc.) to indicate only the intended item.

i. Provide Manufacturers’ recommended maintenance and troubleshooting procedures

clearly marked (arrow, underline, circled, etc.) to indicate only the intended item.

j. Provide Warranty and clear statement of Owner’s obligations to maintain equipment to

preserve warranty.


A. No additional requirements for this Division.

3.6 O&M MANUALS





1. Within 4 weeks of completing the submittal review (“Approved” Product or Shop Drawing

Submittal), provide final, or if that is not yet available, draft electronic format O&M Manual to

Stephen Turner Inc. for use in developing Functional Performance Tests.

2. Final BAS/Controls O&M Manuals shall include:

k. Component installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for each building level,

floor level, and equipment level controller, integrator, or field panel.

l. Calibration requirements and intervals by sensor and positioned or actuator type.

m. Specific instructions on how to perform all functions, access all features, and switch to

each mode in the workstations and controllers.

n. Software version and security update requirements.



1. For all commissioned systems and equipment, one copy of the equipment manufacturer’s or

Contractor’s start-up report shall be provided to Stephen Turner Inc. for review and to

document that the equipment is installed, operational, and ready for commissioning testing.

2. Copies of additional testing performed including but not limited to vibration analysis required

elsewhere in the specifications shall be provided to Stephen Turner Inc.

3. For all third party testing required elsewhere in this specification or by code, provide test

reports to Stephen Turner Inc. for review and to document that the testing has been performed.

Coordinate dates for third party testing in advance with Stephen Turner Inc. to allow

commissioning personnel to witness selected tests.

4. The BAS/Controls Contractor shall prepare a written plan indicating the step-by-step

procedures that will be followed to ring out, check out, and adjust the BAS prior to functional

performance testing. The plan shall indicate, for each type of equipment controlled by the

BAS: the system name; the devices list; controller testing procedures; field check-out,

calibration, and log sheets; test instruments required; and the tests to be completed prior to

TAB to support TAB work using the BAS.

5. The Contractor shall ensure that the actual room numbers as posted in the building are used in

the controls programming and point names.

3.8 COMMISSIONING TESTING


1. Each direct equipment supplier, and each supplier of other equipment not adequately

represented by technical personnel from the responsible Contractor shall assist the installing

contractor in commissioning testing.

2. The BAS/Controls Contractor shall provide signed and dated certifications for the completion

of the programming, point to point ring outs, and check out of each controlled device,

equipment, and system prior to functional performance testing. Any programming to be

completed during functional performance or inter-system testing shall be clearly indicated.

3. The BAS/Controls Contractor shall assist and cooperate with Stephen Turner Inc. Skilled

technicians familiar with this project shall execute the functional performance testing of the

controls system, and shall assist in the functional performance testing of controlled systems

and equipment, including systems with interlocks, interfaces, or other interaction with the

BAS.

4. The BAS/Controls Contractor shall implement control system trend logs at the direction of

Stephen Turner Inc. during functional performance testing. The BAS/Controls Contractor shall

provide Stephen Turner Inc. with access to the BAS system, at a minimum on-site and, if

Owner network security permits, remote access and monitoring capability. If this access




requires proprietary software, this shall be supplied to Stephen Turner Inc. for use during

testing and first year of operation.

5. Additional Requirements for Testing Specified Elsewhere

a. This includes the following tests:

1) HVAC Piping Pressure Testing.

2) HVAC Duct Pressure Testing.

3) Natural Gas Piping Pressure Testing.

b. Additional requirements for each of these tests:

1) The Construction Manager (CM) shall provide a copy of the proposed test

procedure to Stephen Turner Inc. for review.

2) The CM shall notify Stephen Turner Inc. at least two days in advance of the date

and time the test is scheduled.

3) The CM shall provide copies of field and final test results to Stephen Turner Inc. for

review for consistency with the Owner’s Project Requirements.

6. Initial Testing

a. The emphasis of the initial commissioning testing is on the building automation system

performance, since many of the building functions have the control system as a common

component.

b. Included in this work will be sample-based verification of instrument and sensor

calibration, access to components, labeling of devices, clear sequences and shop

drawings.

c. The verification of the control system will be accomplished as an on-going task during

construction to identify and resolve systemic issues early in the project.

d. The building automation system operation shall be sufficiently operational prior to the

TAB of the system. It is understood that a portion of the final building automation

system startup occurs in conjunction with the TAB work. The intent of this requirement

is for the TAB work to be productive and not be hampered by a control system that is not

sufficiently functional.

e. The commissioning testing of the control system will utilize the controls system

instrumentation for testing. Therefore, the first portion of the control system testing will

be verification of the sensors, inputs and outputs.

f. Point-to-Point Verification: All wiring shall be checked out by the controls contractor

from end to end, point to point, from field to computer screen to ensure correct

connection and a system free from wiring deficiencies. The BAS/Controls Contractor

shall document this verification and provide to Stephen Turner Inc. prior to start of

Functional Performance Testing.

g. Commissioning verification of sensors will be made using the sampling method; an

exhaustive re-test of all control system inputs and outputs will not be conducted by

Stephen Turner Inc. Prior to Stephen Turner Inc. verification, the control contractor shall

be responsible for complete input/output checkout quality assurance.

1) Sensor and Actuator Calibration, General:

a) This section is included to emphasize the importance of the control contractor

calibrating the instrumentation, and to make clear the requirement for same;

and that “factory calibration” or “calibration by exception” is not acceptable.

b) All field-installed temperature, relative humidity, CO2, and pressure sensors

and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on all equipment shall be

calibrated using the methods described below. Alternate methods may be

used, if approved by the Owner in advance. All test instruments shall have

had a certified calibration within the last 12 months. Sensors installed in the

unit at the factory with calibration certification provided to Stephen Turner

Inc. need not be field calibrated.




c) All procedures used shall be fully documented, clearly referencing the

procedures followed and written documentation of initial, intermediate and

final results.

2) Sensor Calibration Methods

a) All Sensors. Verify that all sensor locations are appropriate and away from

causes of erratic operation. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are

grounded only at one end.

b) Sensors without Transmitters. Make a reading with a calibrated test

instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor is within

the specified tolerances. If not, install offset in BAS, calibrate or replace

sensor.

c) Sensors with Transmitters. Connect a signal generator. Adjust transmitter

zero and span to match the signal generator until the ammeter reads 4 mA.

Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site

sensor. Verify that the sensor reading is within the specified tolerances. If

not, replace sensor and repeat.

3) Valve and Damper Stroke Setup and Check

a) For all valve and damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position

against the BAS readout.

b) Set pumps or fans to normal operating mode. Command valve or damper

closed, visually verify that valve or damper is closed and adjust output zero

signal as required. Command valve or damper open, verify position is full

open and adjust output signal as required. Command valve or damper to a

few intermediate positions. If actual valve or damper position doesn’t

reasonably correspond, repair or replace actuator.

c) Closure for normally closed valves and dampers. Disconnect power to the

actuator motor, and verify the valve or damper moves to full closed position.

Restore to normal.

d) Normally open valves and dampers: disconnect power to the actuator motor,

and verify the valve or damper moves to full open position. Restore to

normal.

7. The systems in the building will be operated in different modes of operation to verify the

control system responds properly. This testing provides both the Owner and Contractor with

documentation that the control system was operating properly at Project Acceptance. The tests

include but are not limited to:

a. Sequence of control for:

1) Central Air Distribution Systems

2) Local Air Distribution System

3) Exhaust Air System

4) Hot Water Systems

b. Operator’s Workstation graphics display

c. Trend logs

d. Status review screens, out of bounds checks, and alarming

8. Stephen Turner Inc. will witness the Initial tests. Each contractor will be responsible, as

required, to put the system in various modes of operation, to fix minor problems found during

the test (i.e. problems that can be fixed without delaying the completion of the test), and to

witness the testing. Where Stephen Turner Inc. develops a procedure for the test, the

contractor shall implement the test to the satisfaction of Stephen Turner Inc.

9. Stephen Turner Inc. will provide all commissioning team members (construction manager,

contractors, Design Professional, Owner, etc.) the commissioning test procedures prior to

scheduled testing. If no comments are received from a particular commissioning team

member, that shall constitute acceptance of the commissioning test procedures as is.




10. Stephen Turner Inc. shall schedule and witness the testing once all commissioning checklists

(with exception of the TAB Checklists) have been completed by the contractors and accepted

by Stephen Turner Inc.

11. Intermediate Testing

a. The TAB contractor shall, upon request by Stephen Turner Inc. if necessary during

system troubleshooting, provide Stephen Turner Inc. with the technician(s) who

accomplished the TAB, along with the specific equipment used for the TAB, to verify

and re-test between 10% and 20% of the TAB final report.

1) Included in this work will be:

a) Sample-based verification of measured quantities

b) Review of firm qualifications

c) Review of instrument calibration records

d) Review of basic procedures. Particular emphasis will be placed on the use of

iterative methods (repeat measurements) acknowledging the fact that changes

in branch flows have an overall system effect.

b. The TAB Contractor shall provide the field reports or draft TAB reports to Stephen

Turner Inc. within one week of completion for each system or area, before functional

performance testing.

c. The TAB Contractor shall make skilled technicians and instruments used during TAB

available to address functional performance test results that are at variance with TAB

reports.

12. System Level Testing

a. Additional commissioning testing will be conducted after testing of the control system

and TAB work, but prior to occupancy of the building. This testing will provide both the

owner and Contractor with documentation that the system operated correctly according to

the Owner’s Project Requirements. These tests are typically performed at the room level,

where a sample of rooms is selected for review.

b. Stephen Turner Inc. will lead this portion of commissioning testing. Each Contractor will

be responsible, as required, to put the system in various modes of operation, to fix minor

problems found during the test (i.e. problems that can be fixed without delaying the

completion of the test), and to witness the testing. Where Stephen Turner Inc. develops a

procedure for the test the Contractor shall implement the test to the satisfaction of

Stephen Turner Inc.

c. Contractors shall attend and operate equipment during commissioning testing as required

by the specific test being performed.

d. Stephen Turner Inc. shall schedule and administer the testing once all commissioning

checklists have been completed by the Contractors and accepted by the Commissioning

Authority.

13. Additional inter-system testing is required under the Owner’s Commissioning process to

ensure that work in this Division is properly interoperable with other work. Contractors shall

participate in system level and inter-system testing. Testing will include operation under both

normal power and emergency power where applicable; change-over and transition between

different operating modes; and complete exercising of systems through all modes and

sequences.

a. HVAC and hot water systems

b. BAS system

c. Fire detection and life safety systems

d. Metering system

e. Plumbing systems including but not limited to Domestic Hot Water and pumps

f. Tel/data systems




g. Lighting controls, indoor and outdoor

h. Power systems

i. Emergency power systems, including recovery from utility power loss







contractor in resolving commissioning issues.

3.11 TRAINING




1. Sequences of operations for each piece of equipment.

2. Final points list including cross-references to final room numbers and equipment designations

provided by the Owner during Construction.

3. Full as-built file of all schedules and setpoints in electronic format as specified in the contract

documents.

4. Full as-built file of all software programs in electronic format on DVD-ROM of the complete

programs for this project in format compatible with BAS per the Owner’s requirements.

5. Actual room numbers as posted in the building shown on controls drawings.







DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 1

SECTION 23 09 23

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section describes the Systems Integration scope of work for the project. This section also coordinates the responsibilities of the Mechanical and Electrical trade contractors pertaining to control products or systems, furnished by each trade, that will be integrated by this Division

B. All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that

is required to meet the functional intent of this specification, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.

C. It is the owner’s goal to implement an open system that will allow products from various suppliers

to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s).

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of Network Area Controller or Controllers (NAC) within each facility. The NAC shall connect to the owner’s local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Access to the system, either locally in each building, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard Web browsers, via the Internet and/or local area network. Each NAC shall communicate to LonMark/LonTalk (IDC) and/or BACnet (IBC) controllers and other open and legacy protocol systems/devices provided under Division 23 or Division 24.

B. The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) as provided in this Division shall be based

on the Niagara Framework (or “Niagara”), a Java-based framework developed by Tridium. Niagara provides an open automation infrastructure that integrates diverse systems and devices (regardless of manufacturer, communication standard or software) into a unified platform that can be easily managed in real time over the Internet using a standard Web browser. Systems not developed on the Niagara Framework platform are unacceptable.

1.03 SUBMITTAL

A. Eight copies of shop drawings of the entire FMCS shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers catalog data sheets and installation instructions. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings. A complete written Sequence of Operation shall also be included with the submittal package. Division 23 and 24 contractors




supplying products and systems, as part of their packages shall provide catalog data sheets, wiring diagrams and point lists to the Division 17 contractor for proper coordination of work.

B. Submittal shall also include a trunk cable schematic diagram depicting operator workstations,

control panel locations and a description of the communication type, media and protocol. Though the Division 23 and 24 contractors shall provide these diagrams for their portions of work, the Systems Integrator shall be responsible for integrating those diagrams into the overall trunk cable schematic diagrams for the entire Wide Area Network (WAN).

C. Submittal shall also include a complete point list of all points to be connected FMCS by the

Systems Integrator. Division 15 and 16 contractors shall provide necessary point lists, protocol documentation, and factory support information for systems provided in their respective divisions but integrated into the FMCS.

D. Submittal shall also include a copy of each of the graphics developed for the Graphic User

Interface including a flowchart (site map) indicating how the graphics are to be linked to one another for system navigation. The graphics are intended to be 80% - 90% complete at this stage with the only remaining changes to be based on review comments from the A/E design team and/or Owner.

E. Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of ‘as-built’ drawings and application

software on compact disk. Drawings shall be provided as AutoCAD™ or Visio™ compatible files. Eight copies of the ‘as-built’ drawings shall be provided in addition to the documents on compact disk. Division 23 and 24 contractors shall provide as-built for their portions of work. The Division 17 contractor shall be responsible for as-built pertaining to overall FMCS architecture and network diagrams. All as built drawings shall also be installed into the FMCS server in a dedicated directory.

1.04 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE

A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows: FMCS Facility Management and Control System TCS Temperature Control System NAC Network Area Controller IDC Interoperable Digital Controller IBC Interoperable BACnet Controller GUI Graphical User Interface WBI Web Browser Interface POT Portable Operator’s Terminal PMI Power Measurement Interface DDC Direct Digital Controls LAN Local Area Network WAN Wide Area Network OOT Object Oriented Technology PICS Product Interoperability Compliance Statement

1.05 DIVISION OF WORK

A. The Division 23 contractors shall be responsible for all controllers (IDC and IBC), control devices, control panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller input/output and power wiring and controller network wiring.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for the Network Area Controller(s) (NAC), software and

programming of the NAC, graphical user interface software (GUI), development of all graphical screens, Web browser pages, setup of schedules, logs and alarms, LonWorks network management and connection of the NAC to the local or wide area network.




1.06 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Division 23, Mechanical: 1. Providing control devices and systems including but not limited to:

a. Interoperable Digital Controllers and programming b. Interoperable BACnet Controllers and programming c. Control panels, devices and wiring d. Local controller and control device networks

B. Division 24, Electrical: 1. Providing motor starters and disconnect switches (unless otherwise noted). 2. Power wiring and conduit (unless otherwise noted). 3. Provision, installation and wiring of smoke detectors (unless otherwise noted). 4. Other equipment and wiring as specified in Division 16.

1.07 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS

A. All products of the FMCS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable.

1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems 2. C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 205-M1983 “signal

Equipment” 3. CE 4. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices

1.08 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

A. The Owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer's standard software and firmware licensing agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application software to Owner as defined by the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect manufacturer's rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software.

B. It is the owners express goal to implement an open system that will allow products from various

suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s). In addition, the Owner shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and/or configured for use with the NAC, FMCS Server(s), and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices. Any and all required IDs and passwords for access to any component or software program shall be provided to the owner. The owner shall determine which organizations to be named in the SI organization ID (“orgid”) of all software licenses. Owner shall be free to direct the modification of the “orgid” in any software license, regardless of supplier, by Tridium Inc.


A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

1.10 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to ensure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's




responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and that of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air diffusers, and structural and architectural features.

PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL

A. The Facility Management Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a computer system, graphical user interface software, printers, network devices and other devices as specified herein.

B. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data

contained in the overall FMCS. 2.02 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES

A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system with the capability to integrate ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001 BACnet, LonWorks technology, MODBUS, OPC, and other open and proprietary communication protocols in one open, interoperable system.

B. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation

of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet and LonMark to assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide an XIF file and a resource file for the device. For each BACnet device, the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed device’s compliance level. Minimum compliance shall support the ability to support data read and write functionality and those features as specified. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet (BACnet Ethernet/IP,) and/or RS-485 (BACnet MSTP) as specified.

C. All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable.

D. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard Web browsers

without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable.

E. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage

the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.

1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces.

2. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces.

2.03 NETWORKS




A. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be a 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and SOAP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs), user workstations and, if specified, a local server.

B. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements:

1. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3 2. Cable; 100 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5 3. Minimum throughput; 100 Mbps.

C. Remote Network Access. 1. For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote

location, via the Internet. The Owner shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high speed cable modem, asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) modem, ISDN line, T1 Line or via the customer’s Intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Customer agrees to pay monthly access charges for connection and ISP.

2.04 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC)

A. The Division 17 contractor shall supply one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC) as part of this contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and quantity of devices provided under Divisions 15 and 16. It is the responsibility of the Division 17 contractor to coordinate with the Division 15 and 16 contractors to determine the quantity and type of devices.

B. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field

control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide:

1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization 6. Integration of LonWorks controller data, BACnet controller data, and any device

connected through an optional software driver installed in the NAC 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices

C. The Network Area Controller (Jace 403 I/O version) must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:

1. One Ethernet Port – 10/100 Mbps 2. One RS-232 port 3. One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A 4. One RS-485 port (electrically isolated) 5. Direct on board I/O with six universal inputs (Thermistor, current, voltage, dry contact, fast

input contact) and 4 digital relay outputs. 6. Optional auto-dial/answer 56K modem 7. Battery Backup 8. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not

supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 9. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122°F 10. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 158°F 11. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non-

condensing

D. The Network Area Controller (Jace 545 multi-port version)) must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:

1. One Ethernet Port – 10/100 Mbps




2. Two RS-232 ports 3. One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A 4. Four RS-485 ports (electrically isolated) 5. Optional auto-dial/answer 56K modem 6. Battery Backup 7. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not

supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 8. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122°F 9. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 158°F 10. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non-

condensing

E. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 32 simultaneous users.

F. Event Alarm Notification and actions

1. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.

2. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area network.

3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: a. To alarm b. Return to normal c. To fault

4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.

5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. 6. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for equipment

maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control.

G. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated. H. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:

1. Screen message text 2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route

and email alarms based on: a. Day of week b. Time of day c. Recipient

3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message 4. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) 5. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer

I. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum): 1. Time and date 2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) 3. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.) 4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. 5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.

J. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose. K. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of

alarms defined by the user.




L. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and

shall be available for review by the user. M. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters. N. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and

available for review by the user. O. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for

review by the user. P. The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for

future use. Q. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall have, at a

minimum, the following configurable properties: 1. Designating the log as interval or deviation. 2. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the

sample collection interval. 3. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a

fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. 4. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log

and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis.

5. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined event or action.

R. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC and the data shall be accessed

from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web browser. S. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard

SQL statements. T. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:

1. HTML 2. XML 3. Plain Text 4. Comma or tab separated values

U. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall not be acceptable.

V. The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely to a

server or other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum:

1. Archive on time of day 2. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size) 3. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores 4. Provide ability to clear logs once archived

W. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data:

1. Time and date




2. User ID 3. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.

X. The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval.

Y. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the

NAC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined database save interval.

Z. The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and

editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported.

2.05 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS

A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable.

B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is

supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the FMCS, shall not be acceptable.

C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules,

calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted.

D. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:

1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.

2. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the Web browser interface.

3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format.

4. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC), without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.

5. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page.

6. Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: a. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set

points in a graphical manner. 1. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring

any keyboard entry from the operator. 2. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any

keyboard entry from the operator. b. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the

selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.




c. View logs and charts d. View and acknowledge alarms e. Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archive information

7. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.

Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

2.06 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide the ability to perform system programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package. Access to the programming functions and features of the GUI shall be through password access as assigned by the system administrator.

B. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the creation of all

applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide “real-time” data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to display its current value on a user display. Systems requiring separate software tools or processes to create applications and user interface displays shall not be acceptable.

C. Programming Methods

1. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a user-defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc.

2. Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet using fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration will not be accepted.

3. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system.

4. All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading, editing, and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed.

5. The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during duplication.

D. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide a complete set of integrated LonWorks

network management tools for working with LonWorks networks. These tools shall manage a database for all LonWorks devices by type and revision, and shall provide a software mechanism for identifying each device on the network. These tools shall also be capable of defining network




data connections between LonWorks devices, known as “binding”. Systems requiring the use of third party LonWorks network management tools shall not be accepted.

E. Network management shall include the following services: device identification, device installation,

device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable binding. F. The network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on the network, to

reset devices, and to view health and status counters within devices. G. These tools shall provide the ability to “learn” an existing LonWorks network, regardless of what

network management tool(s) were used to install the existing network, so that existing LonWorks devices and newly added devices are part of a single network management database.

H. The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller (NAC),

ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the network management database at all times. Systems employing network management databases that are not resident, at all times, within the control system, shall not be accepted.

2.07 OBJECT LIBRARIES

A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks.

B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s database

and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library.

C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on-

line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed.

D. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet specification. E. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum:

1. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events.

2. Calendar Object. . The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control.

3. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals

4. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection.

5. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance.




F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification.

1. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits.

2. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing.

3. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition.

4. Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not employing the BACnet method of contention resolution shall not be acceptable.

5. PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control.

6. Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.

7. Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.

8. Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use.

9. Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period.

10. Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user.

11. Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the




ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container.

G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the

Network Area Controller (NAC). At a minimum, provide the following as part of the standard library included with the programming software:

1. LonMark/LonWorks devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to, devices for control of HVAC, lighting, access, and metering. Provide LonMark manufacturer-specific objects to facilitate simple integration of these devices. All network variables defined in the LonMark profile shall be supported. Information (type and function) regarding network variables not defined in the LonMark profile shall be provided by the device manufacturer.

2. For devices not conforming to the LonMark standard, provide a dynamic object that can be assigned to the device based on network variable information provided by the device manufacturer. Device manufacturer shall provide an XIF file, resource file and documentation for the device to facilitate device integration.

3. For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum: a. Analog In b. Analog Out c. Analog Value d. Binary e. Binary In f. Binary Out g. Binary Value h. Multi-State In i. Multi-State Out j. Multi-State Value k. Schedule Export l. Calendar Export m. Trend Export n. Device

4. For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and object instance number.

5. For BACnet devices, provide the following support at a minimum a. Segmentation b. Segmented Request c. Segmented Response d. Application Services e. Read Property f. Read Property Multiple g. Write Property h. Write Property Multiple i. Confirmed Event Notification j. Unconfirmed Event Notification k. Acknowledge Alarm l. Get Alarm Summary m. Who-has n. I-have o. Who-is p. I-am q. Subscribe COV r. Confirmed COV notification s. Unconfirmed COV notification t. Media Types u. Ethernet v. BACnet IP Annex J w. MSTP




x. BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) function y. Routing

H. The Network Area Controller shall support the integration of device data from Modbus RTU, Ascii,

or TCP control system devices. The connection to the Modbus system shall be via an RS-232, RS485, or Ethernet IP as required by the device.

Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface

programming software, to support the integration of the Modbus system data into the FPMS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum:

1. Read/Write Modbus AI Registers 2. Read/Write Modbus AO Registers 3. Read/Write Modbus BI Registers 4. Read/Write Modbus BO Registers

I. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the Modbus system

devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller. J. The FMCS supplier shall provide a Modbus system communications driver. The equipment

system vendor that provided the equipment utilizing Modbus shall provide documentation of the system’s Modbus interface and shall provide factory support at no charge during system commissioning

K. The Network Area Controller shall act as an OPC client and shall support the integration of device

data from OPC servers. The connection to the OPC server shall be Ethernet IP as required by the device. The OPC client shall support third party OPC servers compatible with the Data Access 1.0 and 2.0 specifications.

Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface

programming software, to support the integration of the OPC system data into the BAS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum:

1. Read/Write OPC AI Object 2. Read/Write OPC AO Object 3. Read/Write OPC BI Object 4. Read/Write OPC BO Object 5. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Input Object 6. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Output Object 7. Read/Write OPC String Input Object 8. Read/Write OPC String Output Object

L. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the OPC system

devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller. M. The FMCS supplier shall provide an OPC client communications driver. The equipment system

vendor that provided the equipment utilizing OPC shall provide documentation of the system’s OPC server interface and shall provide factory support at no charge during system commissioning.

N. The Network Area Controller shall support the integration of device data from the existing control

system. The connection to the existing system shall be via an RS-232 connection between the Network Area Controller and the existing control system.

O. The Owner, and/or the existing control system representative shall ensure that the existing

system’s database is setup to make all data to be integrated into the FMCS available at the RS-232 port. Any modifications to the existing system database to accomplish this shall be the responsibility of the Owner.




Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface programming software, to support the integration of the existing system data into the FMCS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum:

1. LEGACY SYSTEM Generic AI Object 2. LEGACY SYSTEM Generic AO Object 3. LEGACY SYSTEM Generic BO Object 4. LEGACY SYSTEM Generic BI Object

P. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions (demand limiting, etc.), of the existing system devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller. Integration of the existing system’s schedules, alarms, logs, etc. is neither required nor desired.

Q. The FMCS supplier shall provide a legacy system communications driver. The Owner shall

provide documentation of the existing system’s protocol to facilitate the development of this driver if one is not available. Costs for the development of the driver are to be arranged between the Owner and the FMCS supplier and are not included as part of this contract.

2.08 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE COMPUTER HARDWARE (DESKTOP)

A. The browser workstation shall be an Intel Pentium based computer (minimum processing speed of 2.4 GHz with 1.0 GB RAM and a 100-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a DVD-ROM/CD-RW Combination Drive, 2-parallel ports, 2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A minimum 17”flat panel color monitor, 1280 x 1024 optimal preset resolution, 25 ms response time, shall also be included.

B. Connection to the FMCS network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card, 10 Mbps. C. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x 600-dpi

resolution and rated for 12 PPM print speed minimum. 2.09 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE COMPUTER HARDWARE (LAPTOP COMPUTER)

A. The laptop computer shall consist of an Intel Pentium based laptop computer (minimum processing speed of 2 GHz with 1 GB RAM and a 80-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a DVD-ROM/CD-RW Combination Drive. Connection to the FMCS network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card, 10/100 Mbps.

B. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x 600-dpi

resolution and rated for 12 PPM print speed minimum.

2.10 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE

A. Operating System: The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows XP Professional.

B. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification.

C. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features and

functions: 1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a

GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be




acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures.

2. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens.

3. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.

4. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner.

5. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

6. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

7. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.

8. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text shall be required.

D. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks,

with proper password access: 1. Create, delete or modify control strategies. 2. Add/delete objects to the system. 3. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters. 4. Enable or disable control strategies. 5. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer. 6. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state. 7. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values

automatically.

E. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format.

F. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and password in

order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.

G. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations,

printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

H. Alarm Console

1. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.

2. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supersede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged




alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.

2.11 SERVER FUNCTIONS AND HARDWARE

A. A central server, located (in, at) ____________________, shall be provided. The server shall support all Network Area Controllers (NAC) connected to the customer’s network whether local or remote.

B. Local connections shall be via an Ethernet LAN. Remote connections can be via ISDN, ADSL, T1

or dial-up connection. C. It shall be possible to provide access to all Network Area Controllers via a single connection to the

server. In this configuration, each Network Area Controller can be accessed from a remote Graphical User Interface (GUI) or from a standard Web browser (WBI) by connecting to the server.

D. The server shall provide the following functions, at a minimum:

1. Global Data Access: The server shall provide complete access to distributed data defined anywhere in the system.

2. Distributed Control: The server shall provide the ability to execute global control strategies based on control and data objects in any NAC in the network, local or remote.

3. The server shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time synchronization for all Network Area Controllers (NAC).

4. The server shall accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision Atomic Clock Internet sites and update its master clock based on this data.

5. The server shall provide scheduling for all Network Area Controllers and their underlying field control devices.

6. The server shall provide demand limiting that operates across all Network Area Controllers. The server must be capable of multiple demand programs for sites with multiple meters and or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program shall be capable of supporting separate demand shed lists for effective demand control.

7. The server shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16 levels) for safe and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to Network Area Controllers. Systems not employing this prioritization shall not be accepted.

8. Each Network Area Controller supported by the server shall have the ability to archive its log data, alarm data and database to the server, automatically. Archiving options shall be user-defined including archive time and archive frequency.

9. The server shall provide central alarm management for all Network Area Controllers supported by the server. Alarm management shall include:

10. Routing of alarms to display, printer, email and pagers 11. View and acknowledge alarms 12. Query alarm logs based on user-defined parameters 13. The server shall provide central management of log data for all Network Area Controllers

supported by the server. Log data shall include process logs, runtime and event counter logs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management shall include:

14. Viewing and printing log data 15. Exporting log data to other software applications 16. Query log data based on user-defined parameters

E. Server Hardware Requirements: The server hardware platform shall have the following

requirements: 1. The computer shall be an Intel Pentium M based computer (minimum processing speed

of 2.4 GHz with 1 GB RAM and a 100-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a DVD-ROM/CD-RW Combination Drive, 2-parallel ports, 2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A minimum 17” flat panel color monitor, 1280 x 1024 optimal preset resolution, 25 ms response time shall also be included.




2. The server operating system shall be Microsoft Windows XP Professional. Include Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.

3. Connection to the FMCS network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card, 100 Mbps.

4. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x 600-dpi resolution and rated for 12-PPM print speed minimum.

5. For dedicated alarm printing, provide a dot matrix printer, either 80 or 132 column width. The printer shall have a parallel port interface.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All work described in this section shall be performed by system integrators or contractors that have a successful history in the design and installation of integrated control systems. The installing office shall have a minimum of five years of integration experience and shall provide documentation in the submittal package verifying the company's experience.

B. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as detailed on

the project drawing set. C. Drawings of FMCS network are diagrammatic only and any apparatus not shown, but required to

make the system operative to the complete satisfaction of the Architect shall be furnished and installed without additional cost.

D. Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment shown specified or shown on the

control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by the Temperature Control sub-contractor in accordance with the specifications in Divisions 15 and 16.

3.02 WIRING

A. All electrical control wiring and power wiring to the NAC, computers and network components shall be the responsibility of the FMCS contractor.

B. The electrical contractor (Div. 16) shall furnish all power wiring to NAC, computer and any

networking equipment (routers, hubs, switch, etc.). C. All wiring shall be in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 16), the

National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. All FMCS wiring shall be installed in the conduit types specified in the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 16) unless otherwise allowed by the National Electrical Code or applicable local codes. Where FMCS plenum rated cable wiring is allowed it shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the structure, properly supported and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.

3.03 WARRANTY

A. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period of one year from the time of system acceptance.

B. Within this period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the work provided under this section

due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly (within 48 hours after receipt of notice) repaired or replaced by the Division 17 contractor at no expense to the Owner

3.04 WARRANTY ACCESS




A. The Owner shall grant to the Division 17 contractor, reasonable access to the FMCS during the warranty period. The owner shall allow the contractor to access the FMCS from a remote location for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the warranty period.

3.05 SOFTWARE LICENSE

A. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s). The owner, or his appointed agent, shall determine which organizations to be named in the “orgid” of all Niagara Framework software licenses.

B. The owner, or his appointed agent, shall be free to direct the modification of the “orgid” in any

Niagara Framework software license, regardless of supplier. C. The owner, or his appointed agent, shall receive ownership of all job specific software

configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and /or configured for use within Niagara Framework (Niagara) based controllers and/or servers and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices. Any and all required Ids and passwords for access to any component or software program shall be provided to the owner.

3.06 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the Division 17 contractor shall load all system software and start-up the system. The Division 15 contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications. The Division 15 and 17 contractors are to coordinate the checkout of the system such that each Division has a representative present during system checkout.

B. The Division 15 contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components,

routines, and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a point-by-point log to validate 100% of the input and output points of the DDC system operation. The Division 17 contractor shall have a representative present during system checkout by the Division 15 contractor.

C. Upon completion of the performance tests described above, repeat these tests, point by point as

described in the validation log above in presence of Owner's Representative, as required. Properly schedule these tests so testing is complete at a time directed by the Owner's Representative. Do not delay tests so as to prevent delay of occupancy permits or building occupancy.

D. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the Division 15, 16 and 17 contractors have

performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies.

3.07 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION, TRAINING

A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the FMCS hardware and software has been established the Temperature Control sub-contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction shall be done during normal working hours and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware, software and accessories.

B. The Division 17 contractor shall provide 40 hours of instruction to the owner's designated

personnel on the operation of the FMCS and describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of the FMCS shall include, but not be




limited to; the overall operation program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system), commands, systems generation, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention required in responding to the System's operation.

C. The training shall be in three sessions as follows:

1. Initial Training: One day session (8 hours) after system is started up and at least one week before first acceptance test. Manual shall have been submitted at least two weeks prior to training so that the owners' personnel can start to familiarize themselves with the system before classroom instruction begins.

2. First Follow-Up Training: Two days (16 hours total) approximately two weeks after initial training, and before Formal Acceptance. These sessions will deal with more advanced topics and answer questions.

3. Warranty Follow Up: Two days (16 hours total) in no less than 4 hour increments, to be scheduled at the request of the owner during the one year warranty period. These sessions shall cover topics as requested by the owner such as; how to add additional points, create and gather data for trends, graphic screen generation or modification of control routines.

PART 4 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION 4.01 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall refer to this Item under Division 23 to determine what level of control the Network Area Controller, must provide, which is the responsibility of this Division. It is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate control functions, such as scheduling and supervisory-level global control with the Division 23 contractor.

4.02 CONTROL SEQUENCES - GENERAL

A. SETPOINTS: All setpoints indicated in the control specification are to be adjustable. The setpoints shall be readily available to be modified in the mechanical system software system summary (either textual or graphic based) and under the same software level as hardware points. Some less used setpoints may be provided on a lower software level, if requested by the user Agency for clarity. The setpoints indicated herein are only specified as a calculated starting point (or initial system operation). It is expected that setpoint adjustments and control loop tuning shall be required to provide optimum system operation based on requirements of the building. The control contractor shall work with the balancing contractor and the user Agency to provide the final system setpoint adjustments and control loop tuning after the system is in operation and building is in use. Document all final setpoints on the as-built control drawings. Any questions regarding the intended operation of the HVAC equipment and control systems shall be referred to the HVAC design engineer through the appropriate construction communication process. The following setpoints should be used as initial setpoints unless otherwise specified in the individual control sequences or instructed by the user Agency. If the contractor fails to check with the user Agency for final setpoints, they shall adjust setpoints at no additional cost.

Occupied Space Terminal Unit Heating: 68º F Unoccupied Space Terminal Unit Heating: 62º F Entry Way Heating: 60° F Mechanical or Unoccupied Space Ventilation: 82º F Mechanical or Unoccupied Space Heating: 60º F

B. DEADBANDS: Provide deadbands for all DDC control loops to prevent constant hunting of output signals to controlled devices. Deadbands shall be set to provide adequate control around setpoint as follows unless otherwise specified in the individual control sequences:

Temperature Control: ±1.0º F

C. ALARMS: Provide all alarmed points with adjustable time delays to prevent nuisance tripping under normal operation and on equipment start-up. For all commanded outputs that have status feedback, provide an alarm that shall indicate the commanded output is not in its commanded state. Provide alarms on all points as indicated on point charts. For existing campus automations




systems, add/delete what is called on the point charts for after consultation with user Agency to provide consistent alarming throughout the automation system. For devices that have form “C” contacts available for alarm monitoring, use closed contacts for the Normal condition and open contacts on Alarm condition. This shall provide a level of supervision by detecting a break in the wiring.

D. EQUIPMENT START/STOP FAILURE STATES: All start/stop points for equipment shall utilize

normally open contacts unless called out specifically in the individual control sequences.

E. LEAD/LAG SEQUENCING: For sequences that call for lead/lag of equipment connected to building automation systems, the lead device shall be able to be chosen through a selectable day of the week and time of day through the building automation system. Coordinate with the user Agency for scheduling switchover and frequency. Unless otherwise directed, switchover shall occur at 10AM Sunday and shall rotate the lead device on a weekly cycle rotating through all devices sequentially. For standalone lead/lag sequence controllers (non-DDC), the lead device shall be selected by a switch on the panel face.

F. DAMPER INTERLOCKS FOR FANS WITH STARTERS: For fan systems with magnetic starters and shutoff dampers specified with end switches, the damper interlock shall be hardwired in such a way that the damper shall open if the fan starter hand / off / auto switch is in the hand or in the auto position and being called to start. After the damper end switch has proven the damper open, a hardwire interlock from the end switch to the starter holding coil for the fan shall cause the fan to start. For fan systems that are ducted in parallel, see specific sequence for fan system on interlock requirements.

G. THERMOSTATS AND SENSORS: All devices and equipment including terminal units, specified

to be controlled in a control sequence by a thermostat or sensor, shall be provided with a thermostat or sensor, whether or not the device is indicated on the plans. Consult the HVAC design engineer for the thermostat or sensor location.

H. WEEKLY SCHEDULING: Provide scheduling of DDC terminal units in groups based on

occupancy. Work with the user Agency to determine how many groups are required and which zones should be included. Individual terminal units shall be able to receive temporary schedules that shall override the group schedules. Temporary override buttons at the zone sensor (where specified on point charts) shall override the scheduling to occupied. When groups that consist of more than 20% of terminal units are indexed to occupied, the associated air handling unit shall start if not already running.

I. DDC CONTROLLER COMMUNICATION BUS CONFIGURATION: The actively controlled primary

mechanical equipment (Energy recovery units, hot water, boilers, etc.) DDC controllers shall be configured to be located on the same supervisory controller BACnet MSTP communication trunk unless the supervisory controller capacity prevents it. If this is the case, the primary mechanical equipment DDC controllers shall be separated onto supervisory controllers in such a way that the systems that need to share information for operation and interlocking shall reside on the same supervisory controllers. When AHU systems have associated exhaust fan systems that are interlocked and designed to operate together as a combined air system within a building, these must be on the same BACnet MSTP trunk. Peer to peer communication shall be used for interlocks and data sharing between the AHU and exhaust fans systems when possible to limit air system disruptions in the event of a supervisory controller failure. Other critical building systems that require communication between DDC controllers to operate shall be on the same BACnet MSTP communication trunk. Terminal unit controllers shall be located on a separate BACnet MSTP trunks if necessary to allow for primary equipment to reside on the same BACnet MSTP trunk. If the DDC controllers used for control of primary mechanical equipment and interlocks or point information is required for proper operation as described above do not use BACnet MSTP communication but use Ethernet communication, the DDC controllers shall be connected to the same Ethernet switch. If the controllers cannot be connected to the same switch, hardwired points between controllers shall be used to share information.

J. CONTROLLED VARIABLE REQUIREMENTS: All controlled variables, i.e. differential pressure,

temperature, etc., shall be wired directly to the DDC controller in which the software PID loop or other similar software loop resides unless the control sequence specifically allows the controlled variable to be routed over the network. Where a controlled variable is used for reset of a PID loop, the controlled variable shall be allowed to be shared over the network unless specified to be directly wired to the DDC controller.




4.03 CONTROL SEQUENCES - SPECIFIC

BOILER & PUMPS - HEATING WATER CONTROL Start/Stop: The DDC system shall start the lead pump and enable the boiler(s) to fire whenever the outside air temperature is below 60 degrees F (adjustable). The lag pump shall normally remain off. The hot water pump start/stop relays shall utilize normally closed contacts so upon failure of the relay or DDC controller the pump shall fail on. On outdoor temperature above 60 degree F (adjustable), hot water pumps shall be commanded off, boiler controls shall be de-energized, and suppress alarm. Control heating water supply temperature, set at 180 degrees F (adj.), by modulating boiler controls and step-firing boilers when boiler controls are energized. Flow switch in heating pump discharge provides on/off indication. Flow switch in heating water circuit indicates alarm on no-flow conditions.

Combustion air damper shall be proven open before boilers are allowed to fire. Lead / Lag Control: Current status switches shall prove lead and lag pump operation. If the lead pump is called to run and the current status switch indicates that the lead pump is not operating for 30 seconds (adj.), an alarm shall be sent to the operator interface and the DDC system shall start the lag pump. Upon sensing the lead pump is operating, the lag pump shall be stopped. The DDC system shall index the lag pump to become the lead pump through weekly scheduling feature of the building automation system. TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL: DDC CONTROLLED TERMINAL UNIT MASTER COMMAND POINTS: Provide individual master software points for each of the following functions that can be executed from a single command through the DDC system:

Command all terminal unit heating valves open (i.e. reheat, radiation, fan coil, etc.). Command all terminal unit heating valves closed.

CABINET AND UNIT HEATER CONTROL: Provide an electric space thermostat to control the control valve to maintain space temperature. Provide a strap on aquastat mounted on the hot water return line set at 100º F to control the unit fan when hot water temperature is above setpoint. FAN COIL HEATING ONLY DDC CONTROL: Provide a DDC space temperature sensor to control modulating control valve for hot water to maintain space temperature. When the space temperature is below setpoint, the DDC controller shall modulate the hot water valve open to maintain setpoint. The reverse shall occur when space temperature is above setpoint. Provide DDC start/stop for fan control. The fan shall start on a call for heating. When space is satisfied fan shall be off. Provide a discharge temperature for monitoring purposes. The fan coil heating coil valve shall be commanded closed when the fan coil fan is off. RADIATION/FIN TUBE/CONVECTOR TERMINAL STANDALONE DDC CONTROL: Provide a DDC space temperature sensor to control a modulating electronic control hot water valve to maintain space temperature. When space temperature is below setpoint, modulate the hot water valve open. The reverse shall occur when space temperature is above setpoint. Lock hot water valve closed off whenever outside air is above 50º F (adj.). Provide separate adjustable heating setpoints for both the occupied and unoccupied modes. HEAT RECOVERY UNIT CONTROL The DDC system shall open and close unit intake and relief air isolation dampers, start and stop the supply and exhaust fans, control the heat recovery media operation, and control duct-mounted hot water heating coil operation. When the energy recovery unit changes from unoccupied to occupied mode, unit intake and relief air isolation dampers shall open; once isolation dampers are proven open, the supply and exhaust fans shall start and shall run.




Whenever the energy recovery unit changes from occupied to unoccupied mode, the supply and exhaust fans shall stop, and the isolation dampers shall close. If the exhaust fan fails off, the supply fan shall be indexed off. On a failure of either the supply or exhaust fan, an alarm shall be sent through the DDC system. The heat recovery media shall be used as the first stage of heating and shall be sequenced with the hot water heating coil to maintain the discharge temperature setpoint (68º F (adj.). Cold Weather Start: Whenever outside air temperature is below 40º F (adj.), open the relief air isolation damper and start and run the exhaust fan for 3 minutes to pre-warm the heat recovery media before opening the intake air isolation damper and starting the supply fan. Damper Interlocks: Provide DDC outputs for controlling the isolation intake and relief air dampers. All dampers shall fail closed. Damper Alarms: Provide alarms for each set of dampers if they are not in the commanded position after a delay of 5 minutes after command is sent. Heating Coil Freezestat: Install an electric freezestat downstream of heating coil, to shut down the unit, open heating coil control valve to coil, and close isolation dampers if the temperature downstream of the heating coil drops below 35º F (adj.). The electric freezestat shall act independently of the DDC system via hardwire interlock, and shall override the DDC system control signals to open the heating coil control valve to coil. A freezestat trip shall notify the DDC system that shall send an alarm to the operator interface. Filters: Install a differential static pressure sensor across the HRU filter bank. Ensure that the static probes do not impede filter removal. For filter bank, provide an alarm to the operator interface when the differential static pressure exceeds 0.75" w.c. (adj.). Safeties: All safeties shall be hard wired to the supply and exhaust fan starters. Fire Alarm Shutdown: Upon a Fire Alarm System alarm, the fire alarm control module provided by the electrical contractor at the temperature control panel shall change state of its contacts. This shall cause the unit to be shut down (see Unit Shutdown for additional information) and all fire/smoke and smoke dampers within this system shall close. An auxiliary contact shall be provided to notify the DDC system of a fire alarm shutdown.

4.04 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Contractor is responsible for utilizing the functional performance test forms supplied under specification Section 23 08 00.







HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 1

SECTION 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Heating water piping system. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9 and applicable state labor

regulations. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. Store and protect products. C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch wall for sizes 12 inch and over, black. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type

fittings. 2. Joints: Screwed, or ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass of ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder.



HYRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 2

2.02 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 galvanized. 1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or ANSI/ASTM B16.3 malleable iron. 2. Joints: Screwed, or grooved mechanical couplings. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder. 2.03 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping;

bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges

for copper piping; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene bonded to asbestos. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and

lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; C-shape elastomer composition sealing gasket for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.

2.04 GATE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single

wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single wedge,

flanged ends. 2.05 GLOBE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable

composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged

ends, renewable seat and disc. 2.06 BALL VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,

lever handle, and balancing stops where required or shown on drawings, solder or threaded ends.

B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals,

lever handle, flanged. 2.07 PLUG COCKS A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, threaded

ends, with one wrench operator for every ten plug cocks. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends, with

wrench operator with set screw. 2.08 BUTTERFLY VALVES




A. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 250 degrees F, wafer or lug

ends, extended neck, infinite position lever handle with memory stop. 2.09 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder or screwed ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged

ends. 2.10 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or

flanged ends. 2.11 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated,

capacities ASME certified and labeled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale, oil and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment. E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings. F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top

of pipe level. H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,

and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.




J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

K. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever joining dissimilar metals.

L. Use lead-free solder for all copper piping joint connections, where required by authority having jurisdiction.

M. Do not "bullhead" any piping systems.

N. Install all piping at elevations indicated on Project Drawings. Where no elevations are indicated,

install piping as high as possible. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Automatic

control valves shall have unions installed at valve outlet and bypass (three-way control valves only).

B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters

to pipe. C. Install gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or

vertical risers. D. Install ball or globe valves for throttling or bypass services. Refer to Section 15515 for balancing

valves (and combination balancing and shutoff valves). E. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of pumps. F. Use butterfly valves in heating water systems interchangeably with gate and globe valves. G. Provide 3/4 inch gate or ball drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of

vertical risers, and at equipment. END OF SECTION 23 21 13






HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 21 14 - 1

SECTION 23 21 14

HYRONIC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Expansion tanks. B. Air vents. C. Air separators. D. Strainers. E. Pump suction fittings. F. Combination fittings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 23 31 13 - Hydronic Piping. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of

tanks. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer

throughout. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. Include installation instruction, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts

list. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



HDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 21 14 - 2

A. Deliver products to site. Store and protect products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME

Code; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.

B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 18 psig. C. Size: As shown on Drawings. 2.02 AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch

brass needle valve at top of chamber. B. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable

for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. 2.03 AIR SEPARATORS A. Combination Air Separators/Strainers: Steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D

of ANSI/ASME Code, for 125 psig operating pressure, with galvanized steel integral strainer with 3/16 inch perforations, tangential inlet and outlet connections, and internal stainless steel air collector tube.

2.04 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern

with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64

inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with

1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.05 AUTOMATIC BALANCING/FLOW CONTROL VALVES

A. Contractor shall provide and install automatic balancing/flow control valves at all locations as specified in the Contract Documents.

B. The flow cartridge’s non-clogging single orifice design shall include no metal-to-metal contact, no

segmented ports, no rolling diaphragm, and incorporate a tapered profile flow nozzle and metering disk controlled by a pressure compensating spring.

C. The flow cartridge shall be a single assembly, constructed with stainless steel moving parts and be accessible without removing the valve from the piping. Flow cartridges constructed with composite or rubber materials are not acceptable.

D. The flow cartridge shall be factory flow tested and calibrated to maintain accuracy of ±5%; the accuracy shall be maintained over a standard operating range of 2 – 45 PSID. Cartridges that prevent flow above the maximum operating range are not acceptable.




E. The flow cartridge shall be clearly inscribed with the designed manufactured flow rate. Cartridges

that are not marked with the manufacture designed flow rate or use a coding system are not acceptable.

F. Manufacturer shall provide a full 100% cartridge exchange for up to one (1) year from date of delivery at no charge. Exchange shall be provided for flow rate changes within same valve body.

G. The flow cartridge and valve shall carry a lifetime product warranty.

H. Valves 1½” and smaller shall be a forged brass Y-pattern body and valves 2” – 2½” shall be a cast brass y-pattern body with integrated ball valve, (2) pressure/temperature test ports, a tag indicating the model, flow rate and PSID range, blowout proof stem with dual FKM o-ring seals, interchangeable union end with FKM o-ring seal, hard chrome plated solid ball with Teflon™ seats, and rated at 600 PSI WOG, 325 degrees F. Valves shall be available with NPT, SWT, PRESS or PUSH connections; like Nexus UltraMatic™ (Model UM.) Optional solid stainless steel ball and stainless steel valve stem shall be available.

I. Valves 2½” and larger shall be a wafer style cast iron body with pressure and temperature test plugs across the flow cartridge; a tag indicating the model, flow rate and operating control range; able to incorporate a drain and or vent as required and rated at 400 PSI, 350 degrees F.; like Nexus UltraMatic™ (Model UMW.) To minimize field labor, valve may include Flange x Groove adapters or Flange x Threaded adapters, butterfly valves and other accessories pre-assembled; like Nexus UltraMatic™ (Model UMG, UMGB, UMWB, UMT, and UMTB.)

J. Optional extended pressure and temperature test plugs, manual air vents and handles shall be available. Extended handles shall not break the vapor barrier when operated.

K. Contractor should, to reduce field connections and leak points, provide pre-assembled kit including isolation valves, strainers, unions and other required accessories.

L. Approved Manufacturers: 1) Nexus Valve, Inc. 2) Flow Design, Inc. 3) Flo-Pac LLC 4) Other proposed alternate manufacturers as approved by Architect/Engineer

.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended

performance. B. Support tanks inside building from building structure, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. C. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes. D. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated. E. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to

nearest drain. F. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.




G. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection. H. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports. I. Provide isolation valves on water inlet to terminal heating units such as radiation, unit heaters,

and fan coil units. J. Provide balancing valves on water outlet side of terminal units, coils, etc. or as indicated on the

Drawings. K. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers,

and expansion tanks. L. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve

capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. M. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. END OF SECTION 23 21 14






HVAC PUMPS 23 21 23 - 1

SECTION 23 21 23

HVAC PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. In-line pumps. B. Base-mounted pumps. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps

with minimum three years experience. 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts

list. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically. B. Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. C. Pump Motors: Operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise. D. Pump Connections: Flanged. 2.02 IN-LINE PUMPS A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor for in-line

mounting, oil lubricated, for 175 psig maximum working pressure.



HVAC PUMPS 23 21 23 - 2

B. Casing: Cast iron. C. Impeller: Brass or bronze, keyed to shaft. D. Bearings: Two, oil lubricated bronze sleeves. E. Shaft: Alloy steel with stainless steel sleeve, integral thrust collar. F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, viton fitted, 225 degrees F maximum

continuous operating temperature. G. Drive: Flexible coupling. 2.03 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS

A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radially or horizontally split casing, for 175 psig maximum working pressure.

B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing

rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.

C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft.

D. Bearings: Permanently lubricated roller or ball bearings.

E. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve.

F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, viton fitted, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as

recommended by manufacturer. C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

D. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent

to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over.

E. Provide line sized shut-off valve and on pump suction, and line sized combination shutoff and

balancing valve with check valve on pump discharge. F. Lubricate pumps before start-up.



HVAC PUMPS 23 21 23 - 3







DUCTWORK 23 31 00- 1

SECTION 23 31 00

DUCTWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ducts. B Duct cleaning. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 23 05 29 - Supports and Anchors: Sleeves. B. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation. C. Section 23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories. D. Section 23 37 00 - Air Inlets and Outlets. E. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9 and applicable state labor

regulations. Welders must be state-certified. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 1/2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure

and velocities less than 2,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm and 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. Indicate all duct mains and fittings, duct runouts, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and

configuration prior to start of fabrication and installation of low pressure, medium and high pressure, and glass fiber duct systems. Any conflicts with work of other trades that necessitates changes in duct sizes or intended routing shall be indicated on shop drawings, so that




Architect/Engineer can review proposed changes. Required changes not indicated on shop drawings shall become the sole responsibility of the installing contractor.


A. Deliver products to site.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL

181. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having

zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. C. Aluminum Ducts: ANSI/ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors

and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength. D. Flexible Ducts: Interlocking spiral of galvanized steel or aluminum construction or fabric

supported by helically wound spring steel wire or flat steel bands; rated to 2 inches WG positive and 1.5 inches WG negative for low pressure ducts and 15 inches WG positive or negative for medium high pressure ducts.

E. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed by

seamless aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 degrees F.

F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. G. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid

used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. H. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously

threaded. 2.02 LOW AND MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE

handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing. Seal all joints, seams, and openings with duct sealant.

B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of

equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. All exposed round ductwork 8 inch diameter and larger shall be spiral lockseam type.

C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible.

Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees.




E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.

F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape. G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches and smaller with

crimp in direction of air flow. Use heavy bead on joint connections for duct sizes greater than 8 inch.

H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and

maintenance activities. C. Connect terminal units to low pressure ducts with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do

not use flexible duct to change direction. D. Connect diffusers, registers, grilles or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum

length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. E. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

F. Install all ductwork at elevations indicated on Project Drawings. Where no elevations are indicated, install ductwork as high as possible.

3.02 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL

Low/Medium Pressure Supply Steel, Aluminum (Heating Systems)

Low/Medium Pressure Supply Steel, Aluminum (System with Cooling Coils)

Return and Relief Steel

General Exhaust Steel, Aluminum

Outside Air Intake Steel

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be

harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.







AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1

SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Volume control dampers. B. Fire dampers. C. Backdraft dampers. D. Air turning devices. E. Flexible duct connections. F. Duct access doors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as

indicated. B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction,

and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. C. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade

with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set screw.

D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inches. E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72

inches. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade

dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.




G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod

lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. Quadrant regulators shall be equal to Duro-Dyne Model KS-385L.

H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters. 2.02 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. All fire dampers shall be

dynamic type (with air flow). B. Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless

steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for low pressure ducts up to 12 inches in height.

C. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for

combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.03 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18x18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment,

may be air moving equipment manufacturer’s standard construction. B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16 gage galvanized

steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.04 AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with

individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as

indicated. B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum

density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 2 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. 2.06 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as

indicated. All access doors shall be UL listed 1 1/2 hour "B" label fire-rated for fire-rated wall systems.

B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick

fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.

D. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two




compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.

E. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts and on duct runouts to all individual diffusers, registers and grilles, as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated

components and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to all authorities having jurisdiction, including the

Owner's representative. E. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where

indicated. F. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans

and motorized equipment. G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,

automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated.







AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 1

SECTION 23 37 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test

Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Square, stamped, multicore type adjustable diffuser to discharge air in pattern as indicated on

Project Drawings or by model number, with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B. Provide surface mount snap-in inverted T-bar or spline type frame, as indicated by model

number. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. C. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel off-white finish. D. Provide opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid and direction changer, with

damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.02 CEILING SUPPLY, EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4 inch spacing, with spring or other device to set

blades, vertical or horizontal face. B. Fabricate one inch margin frame with concealed mounting. C. Fabricate of steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and

aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.



AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 2

D. Where not individually connected to exhaust fans, provide integral, gang-operated opposed

blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with

architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers, regardless of

whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

E. Install all air volume extractors and equalizing grids at diffusers, grilles and registers, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. G. See schedule on drawings for all sizes and types of air inlets and outlets required. END OF SECTION 23 37 00






PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY-RECOVERY UNITS 23 72 00 - 1

SECTION 23 72 00

PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY-RECOVERY UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) shall be a packaged unit as manufactured by RenewAire, or approved equal, and shall transfer both heat and humidity using static plate core technology.

B. Roof curbs.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittal data for the following:

1. Energy wheel performance data for both summer and winter operation. 2. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics and motor and fan accessories. 3. Combined efficiency data per ARI Guideline V-2003 for each model. Data shall include

RER, COP, Unitary Net Cooling, Unitary EER and CEF. 4. Material types and gauges of all component pieces and assemblies. 5. Dimensioned drawings for each type of installation, showing isometric and plan views, to

include location of attached ductwork and service clearance requirements. 6. Estimated gross weight of each installed unit. 7. Installation, Operating and Maintenance manual (IOM) for each model. 8. [Remote Control Panel description to include all functions.]


A. Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.

C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430.

D. Filter Media: ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II, approved by local authorities.

E. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410.

F. Packaged Energy Recovery Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues complete catalog data on total product.

G. Certifications:

1. Entire unit shall be AMCA Certified for air flow. AMCA certification of individual components is not acceptable.

2. Entire unit shall be ETL Certified per U.L. 1995 and bear an ETL sticker. 3. Energy recovery section shall be AHRI Certified, per Standard 1060.



PACKAGED AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY- RECOVERY UNITS 23 72 00 - 2


A. Submit operation and maintenance data.

B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.


A. Deliver products to site in containers, with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs.


C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.


A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

1.07 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide one extra set of disposable panel filters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONSTRUCTION

A. The energy recovery component shall be of fixed-plate cross-flow construction, with no moving

parts. B. No condensate drain pans or drains shall be allowed and unit shall be capable of operating in

both winter and summer conditions without generating condensate. C. The unit case shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with lapped corners and

zinc plated screw fasteners. D. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, ERV cores, and filters. Doors shall have an

airtight compression seal using closed cell foam gaskets. Pressure taps, with captive plugs, shall be provided allowing cross-core pressure measurement allowing for accurate airflow measurement.

E. Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1 inch, 4 pound density, foil/scrim faced, high-

density fiberglass board insulation, providing a cleanable surface and eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers, and with minimum R-value of 4.3 (hr·ft2·°F/BTU). EV450IN case walls and doors shall be insulated with 7/8 inch, expanded polystyrene foam insulation faced with a cleanable foil face on all exposed surfaces.

F. The ERV cores shall be protected by a MERV-8 rated, 2” nominal, pleated, disposable filter in

both airstreams. G. Unit shall have single-point power connection and a single-point 24 VAC contactor control

connection.




H. Blower motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EISA compliant for energy efficiency. The blower motors shall be totally enclosed (TEFC) and be shall be supplied with factory installed motor starters (HE6X and HE8X 208-230/460V models are open drip-proof).

I. Blowers shall be quiet running, forward curve type and be either direct drive (EV450 and HE1X

only) or belt drive. HE1.5X shall be backward incline, motorized impeller type packages. HE6X and HE8X units use backward incline, belt drive blower packages. Belt drive motors shall be provided with adjustable pulleys and motor mounts allowing for blower speed adjustment, proper motor shaft orientation and proper belt tensioning.

J. The unit electrical box shall include a factory installed, non-fused disconnect switch and a 24

VAC, Class II transformer/relay package. K. The ERV shall be provided “inverter-ready” allowing for applications of inverters supplied and

installed by others.

2.02 OPTIONS

A. Provide unit and duct connection orientation per project schedule.

B. Provide double wall construction with 24-gauge galvanized steel liner.

C. Units are available single or three phase at a full range of operating voltages. See project

schedule. D. Provide motor horsepower as specified in project schedule. E. Provide factory installed disconnect fuses. F. Provide factory installed filter monitors for each airstream. G. Provide MERV-13 filters for final installation after construction phase. H. Provide factory installed isolation dampers for either or both air streams. The insulated dampers

shall be of a low leakage design and shall not restrict the airstream, reducing airflow, in any way. The dampers shall be opened with a motor actuator powered by the standard unit transformer package and have a spring return for low off- position power consumption.

2.03 UNIT CONTROLS

A. The unit shall be constructed so that it can function as a stand-alone heating and cooling system controlled by factory-supplied controllers, thermostats and sensors or it can be operated as a heating and cooling system controlled by a Building Management System (BMS). This unit shall be controlled by a factory-installed microprocessor programmable controller (DDC) that is connected to various optional sensors.

B. Unit shall incorporate a DDC controller with integral LCD screen that provides text readouts

of status, operating settings and alarm conditions. DDC controller shall have a built-in keypad to permit operator to access read-out screens and change settings without the use of ancillary equipment, devices or software. DDC controllers that require the use of equipment or software that is not factory-installed in the unit are not acceptable. Alarm readouts consisting of flashing light codes are not acceptable. Owner-specified ventilating conditions can be input by means of pushbuttons. 1. Operating protocol: The DDC shall be factory-programmed for BACnet for monitoring of

the unit’s status and control of the unit’s functions.




C. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD): unit shall have factory installed variable frequency drives for modulation of the blower motors The VFDs shall be factory-programmed for unit-specific requirements and shall not require additional field programming to operate.

D. Remote Interface: Contractor shall provide and install a Remote Interface that functions as a

remote indicator of owner-selected operating parameters and also permits remote inputting of new operating parameters. Each remote panel shall have a large LCD user interface screen similar in form and function to the screen on the DDC. Installed location of room display shall be as indicated on the plans.

E. Sensors

1. Room / Space Temperature Sensors 2. Dirty Filter Sensor

2.04 COILS

A. Provide coils for hot water heating, sizes and capacities as indicated on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with ARI 435.

B. Assemble units by bolting sections together. Isolate fan section with flexible duct connections.

C. Install unit on vibration isolators.

D. Protect heat recovery media to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins.







TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 23 82 00 - 1

SECTION 23 82 00

TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Unit heaters. B. Cabinet unit heaters. C. Fan coil units. D. Fin-tube radiation. 1.02 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents under provisions of Specifications. B. Accurately record actual locations of access doors in radiation cabinets required for access or

valving. 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions,

maintenance and repair data, and parts listings. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with

minimum three years experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products. C. Protect units from physical damage by storing in protected areas and leaving factory covers in

place.




1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. Install radiation, convectors, fan-coil units, unit ventilators and radiant heaters (equipment

exposed to finished areas) after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Avoid damage. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. Warranty: Include coverage of motors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FINNED TUBE RADIATION

A. Heating Elements: 3/4 ID seamless copper tubing, mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins, suitable for soldered fittings.

B. Element Hangers: Quiet operating, ball bearing cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal

movement, on enclosure brackets.

C. Enclosures: 18 gage steel up to 18 inches in height, 16 gage steel over 18 inches in height. Provide easily jointed components for wall to wall installation. Support rigidly, on wall or floor mounted brackets.

D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color as selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or

cabinet.

E. Damper: Where not thermostatically controlled, provide knob-operated internal damper at enclosure air outlet.

F. Access Doors: For otherwise inaccessible valves, provide factory-made permanently hinged

access doors, 6 x 7 inch minimum size, integral with cabinet.

G. Capacity: Based on 65 degree F entering air temperature, 180 degree F average water temperature.

2.02 UNIT HEATERS

A. Coils: Seamless copper tubing, 0.025 inch minimum wall thickness, silver brazed to steel headers, and with evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing.

B. Casing: 18 gage steel with threaded pipe connections for hanger rods.

C. Finish: Factory apply baked enamel of color as selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or

cabinet.

D. Fan: Direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced, with fan guard; horizontal models with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; vertical models with grease lubricated ball bearings.

E. Air Outlet: Adjustable pattern diffuser on projection models and two way louvers on horizontal

throw models.




F. Motor: Horizontal models with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; vertical models with

grease lubricated ball bearings.

G. Control: Local disconnect switch.

H. Capacity: Based on 65 degree F entering air temperature, 180 degree F average water temperature.

2.04 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, designed for 100 psi and 220 degrees F.

B. Cabinet: 16 gage steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, easily removed panels, glass

fiber insulation, and integral air outlet and inlet grilles.

C. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color as selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet.

D. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct

driven.

E. Motor: Sleeve bearings, resiliently mounted.

F. Control: Multiple speed switch, factory wired, located in cabinet.

G. Filter: Easily removed one inch thick glass fiber throw-away or permanent washable type, located to filter air before coil.

H. Capacity: Based on 65 degree F entering air temperature, 180 degree F average water

temperature. 2.05 FAN-COIL UNITS

A. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, designed for 200 psi and 220 degrees F. Provide drain pan under cooling coil, easily removable for cleaning, with drain connection.

B. Cabinet: 16 gage steel with exposed corners and edges rounded, easily removed panels, glass

fiber insulation, and integral air outlet and inlet grilles.

C. Finish: Factory apply baked enamel of color as selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet.

D. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct

driven. Fans and fan housings shall be all metal construction.

E. Motor: Sleeve bearings, resiliently mounted.

F. Control: Multiple speed switch, factory wired, located in cabinet.

G. Filter: Easily removed one inch thick glass fiber throw-away or permanent washable type, located to filter air before coil.

H. Capacity: Based on 65 degrees F entering air temperature, 180 degree F average water

temperature.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop

drawings. B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Hang unit heaters from building structure, with pipe hangers anchored to building, not from

piping. Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest headroom unless otherwise indicated. C. Install terminal heat transfer equipment as indicated. Coordinate to assure correct recess size

for recessed units. D. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction. E. Provide hydronic units with shut-off valve on supply and combination balancing and shutoff

valve on return piping. If not easily accessible, extend vent to exterior surface of cabinet for easy servicing. For cabinet unit heaters and unit heaters, provide float operated automatic air vents with stop valve.

F. Seal all piping penetrations through fan-coil unit and unit ventilator cabinets at floor/unit base

with silicone sealant, so that openings are watertight. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1 Specifications. B. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum

clean coils and inside of cabinets. C. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials

furnished by manufacturer. D. Install new filters. END OF SECTION 23 82 00


310 George Washington Highway- Suitee 100 - Smithfield, Rhode Island 02917 T 401-232-5010 F 401-232-5080




ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 1

SECTION 26 00 00

ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL


The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction including Supplementary Conditions and General

Requirements shall apply fully to the work specified in this section and to all work specified under all sections of

Electrical. Examine all other sections of the specifications and drawings for any alternates that may affect this

section. Examine all other sections of the specifications and drawings for work to be performed in connection

therewith.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The work to be provided under this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to all complete and

operational electrical systems and items in accordance with these specifications and the accompanying drawings.

Provide all supervision, labor, materials, equipment, machinery and any and all other items necessary, but not limited

to, completing the following systems:

A. Equipment connections.

B. Feeds from existing panels to equipment locations.

C. Removal of existing electrical wiring, equipment and devices.

D. Miscellaneous outlets and wiring.

All items of equipment are specified in the singular; however, the Contractor shall provide and install the number

items of equipment as indicated on the drawings and as required for complete systems.

With submission of bid, give written notice to the Architect of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or

unsuitable, in violation of laws, ordinances, rules, and any necessary items or work omitted. In the absence of such

written notice, it is mutually agreed that the Contractor has included the cost of all required items in his proposal, and

that he will be responsible for the approved satisfactory functioning of all systems, equipment and devices without

extra compensation.

It is the Electrical Contractors responsibility to verify all conditions relating to equipment dimensions and locations.

Any and all construction methods required due to low ceilings in equipment locations, obstructions, routing of

conduit/wiring runs in or around the structure, obstructions which have to be overcome, etc. are the responsibility of

the Electrical Contractor. All equipment locations on the drawings are diagrammatic, exact and final locations shall

be determined and coordinated in the field by this Contractor. The electrical contractor is responsible for all field

conditions and shall include such in his bid.

All electrical equipment and components furnished by other sections of the specifications and delivered for

installation under this section of the specifications shall be clearly marked for location. The section supplying the

equipment and components shall be responsible for all required tests after the electrical connections are completed.

1.03 ADDITIONAL WORK UNDER THIS SECTION

The following items of work shall be provided under THIS section of the specifications and drawings.




All wooden mounting boards, PAINTED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR with two coats of GRAY fire

retardant paint, where required and called for. Wooden mounting boards shall be provided for all surface mounted

panelboards, for main service equipment, telephone service board and other locations for mounting of equipment.

Minimum thickness of plywood backboards shall be (3/4”) three quarters of an inch and THERE SHALL BE (1)

ONE FINISHED SIDE for the equipment. Where required due to obstructions and conditions backboards shall be

installed on standoffs of unistrut, blocking or other suitable means to provide required and desired final locations of

panelboards, etc. in cases where they cannot be mounted directly to walls. Plywood shall be grade APA C-D

PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1.

Panelboards may be mounted on unistrut supports in lieu of wooden backboards. Where required, unistrut shall be

mounted from floor to ceiling and secured to both surfaces if the panelboard has to be mounted away from walls to

avoid obstructions. All conduits and/or wireways shall be racked on unistrut up wall.

Cutting and patching as applicable to this section of the specification.

Installation of fireproofing material in and around all sleeves, at fire rated wall and floor penetrations and other areas

as required by the Building and Electric Codes.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

The word “provide” is defined to mean “furnish and install complete with all accessories.”

The word “wiring” is defined to mean “wire installed in raceway or surface metal raceway including boxes and

fittings” and/or Metal Clad Cable and/or as defined in other portions of this section of the specifications.

The word “contractor” or “this contractor” is defined as the electrical contractor.

The words “by others” are defined to mean “not by this division but by another division of the contract documents.”

The word “equal” is defined to mean “to posses the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the

utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability and longevity.”

The words “satisfactory operation” is defined to mean “operation as specified.”

“UL” is defined to mean “Underwriters Laboratories Inc.”.

“R.S.C.” or “RSC” is defined to mean threaded thick-walled rigid galvanized steel conduit. “E.M.T. or EMT is

defined to mean electric metallic tubing (thin walled steel conduit).

1.05 INTENT

It is the intent to cover all work and materials necessary for installing complete, ready for continuous use, all

electrical systems as shown on the accompanying drawings, or as hereinafter described.

In the event that there is a conflict on the drawings, between the drawings and the specifications or within the

specifications, the most stringent requirements with the highest cost and value shall be carried in the bid. Upon

award of the contract the electrical contractor shall ask for a review of the conflict for a formal interpretation.

Sizes of conduit/wiring and running of it may be shown but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor

every structural difficulty that will be encountered during the installation of the work. If the alignment of the

conduit/wiring has to be varied from that shown on the drawings, where necessary because of slight architectural

changes, structural or Architectural conditions or to avoid the work of other trades, it shall be done without extra

expense to the Owner. It is the Contractors responsibility to coordinate and layout the building wiring system to suit

field conditions. Provide all necessary fittings, J.B.’s, etc. as required. Where wiring is not indicated the Contractor

is responsible for correctly wiring the equipment, lighting, devices, etc. in accordance with the Electric Code and

other sections of this specification. Circuit numbers are indicated to show the intent of the wiring system and to

indicate the limit of the number of items per circuit.




This Contractor is responsible to examine the Architectural, Structural and other drawings, and investigate field

conditions, in order to determine any height restrictions, structural difficulties, etc. which may be encountered and

include the cost of overcoming same in the bid for any and all required equipment, fittings and construction methods

necessary to install the equipment in the general locations indicated on the drawings. In instances where equipment

cannot be installed where indicated on the drawings the Contractor shall contact the Engineer, prior to construction

in order to review other possible locations.

1.06 LEGAL AUTHORITIES, CODES AND REGULATIONS

Where the term “Electric Code” or “Code” is used in this section of the specifications and drawings, it shall mean the

MOST current published edition of the National Electric Code and the latest edition of the State Electric Code. In

addition all work pertaining to Life Safety System shall be done in accordance with the Life Safety Code NFPA 101-

most current published edition, NFPA 72 Fire Codes and all other applicable NFPA Standards. All controls,

signage, systems, equipment, etc. shall conform to the requirements of “ADA”, “UFAS” and all other applicable civil

laws and codes pertaining to the handicap.

All work shall be executed in accordance with the Electric Code, State Building and Fire Safety Codes, Federal,

State and Local Rules and Regulations each Authority having jurisdiction enforces. Also, inspection forms, permits

and approvals required for this section of work shall be obtained and all associated fees and charges required by all

Authorities and Utility Companies, shall be included in this section of work.

1.07 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION

Cooperate and coordinate with all work of other divisions of the contract documents in executing the work of this

division. Refer to other sections of the contract documents for the location of equipment in relation to this work.

Coordinate all work of the Utility Companies (electric and telephone and cable TV) required in this project.


For the actual fabrication, installation and testing of the work of this section use only thoroughly trained and

experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the requirements for the work and with the installation

recommendations of the manufacturers of the specified items.

In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the

installers. Retain the services of a foreman who shall be in attendance at the project site during the progress of the

work. The foreman assigned to the project at the start of construction shall remain until construction completion,

unless circumstances arise which necessitate a replacement foreman - the Engineer and Architect shall be notified in

advance of any change of foremen during the project.

All material shall be new and shall conform to requirements of, and be listed by, the Underwriters’ Laboratories,

Inc., or Factory Mutual, for that which standards have been established.

Industrial standards pertinent to electrical work being installed shall be considered minimum requirements, over and

above those required by federal, state, and local Authorities.

It is this Contractors responsibility to check and verify all electrical equipment and components for correct

characteristics that are provided from other sections of the specifications for installation under this section such as

starters, fan speed control switches, etc.

Storage of equipment such as switches, fixtures, panelboards, wire, etc. is not to remain outside, exposed to weather,

in damp locations, but shall be stored in warm, dry, safe storage until ready for use.

This Contractor shall be responsible for their workers to protect all walls, floors, ceilings, including existing, and

other work installed under other sections of the specifications while installing this work, and protect this work from

damage during and after installation and deliver clean and in first class condition. Repair or replace any of this work

or work of other sections of the specifications damaged by workmen employed under this section, without causing

additional costs to the owner.




1.09 TEST AND MAINTENANCE

Apply such tests as to insure the proper and desired operation of all electrical equipment, controls and wiring after all

electrical materials and equipment are in place and connected. Replace all defective work and adjust such systems as

the Architect shall direct or as required for proper and satisfactory operation. All meters, equipment and tools used

for testing shall be provided under this section of the specifications. Instruct in use of all systems and apparatus,

such persons as the Owner shall designate.

Tests for systems such as Fire Alarm System, Emergency Lighting System, Sound, Hearing Impaired, Emergency

Generator, Computer/Wiring System, Telephone System, Internal Communications Systems, and others where

specified, shall be made in the presence of the manufacturer’s representative and the Owner when applicable. The

Architect and Engineer shall be notified a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance of all preliminary and final testing

of all systems. Upon completion of satisfactory tests, a separate report of each system shall be submitted to the

Architect for review, comment and/or approval.

Operate each circuit breaker in each panelboard in the presence of the Owner and/or Owners Maintenance

crew/Representative (other than the Architect) to indicate accuracy and completeness of the panelboard schedules.

During the final observation of the project a random sampling of the circuit breakers will be taken by the Engineer

and/or OWNER. If the schedules prove to be inaccurate from the random selection The Electrical Contractor shall

make all necessary corrections to the panelboard schedules, contact the Engineer to arrange for a demonstration that

circuit breakers are properly scheduled, and the Electrical Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer for all time spent

during this review process at the Engineers standard hourly rates, without additional cost to the Owner or the Project

- a retainer fee will be required prior to the site visit.

1.10 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

Guarantee all material, equipment, labor and systems as required by the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions and General Requirements of the Contract for Construction and thereafter as per common law. Minimum

Guarantees and Warranties for basic materials and labor shall not be less than a period of one year from date of

project completion and acceptance by the Owner, Architect and Engineer. Guarantees and Warrantees in excess of

one year by the equipment suppliers shall be in effect for their entire duration.

Upon determination that work covered by Warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition

complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for the cost of

replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the work through a

portion of its anticipated useful life (labor and material cost). Refer to other portions and sections of the

specifications for additional requirements.

See other portions and sections of the specifications for additional systems and equipment that require a guarantee or

warrantee that is longer than one year.

1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

At the completion of the project, furnish for delivery to the Owner, at no additional cost, two (2) bound sets of

operating and maintenance manuals. These manuals shall include manufacturer’s data, maintenance requirements,

shop drawings, installed equipment catalog cuts, wiring device catalog data sheets, and operating instructions on all

electrical equipment installed, including lighting fixtures with lamp sizes clearly indicated.

Also include the names, addresses and telephone numbers of repair and service companies for each of the major

systems installed under this section and the telephone number of this Contractor including a 24 hour telephone

number for emergency calls.

1.12 DRAWINGS

The accompanying drawings are intended to be supplementary to the specifications but any work indicated,

mentioned or implied in either, is to be considered as specified in both.

All work shown on the drawings is intended to be approximately correct to scale, but detailed drawings, calculated

and measured dimensions are to be followed in all cases. The Electrical Contractor shall check locations of all




equipment and check dimensions with the proposed locations so all obstacles to be overcome will be figured into the

bid. Refer to Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Fire Protection, Plumbing, and other contract drawings for

building construction details and dimensions. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans, when available, for

exact locations of lighting fixtures. If this Contractor finds a conflict with equipment locations notify the Engineer

immediately. The electrical contractor is responsible for all field conditions and shall include such in his bid.

The electrical systems and equipment layouts are generally diagrammatic, exact and final locations shall be

determined and coordinated in the field by this Contractor. In most cases equipment circuitry is indicated by

panelboard designation and circuit number. It is this Contractors responsibility to wire the system in accordance

with the National Electric Code. No more than (4) Four current carrying conductors (excluding the ground

conductors) shall be installed in any raceway or cable assembly - see other portions of the specifications. The

routing of wiring, in some cases is indicated, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every

structural difficulty or obstacle that will be encountered during the installation of the work. If the alignment of

conduit has to be varied from that shown on the drawings, where necessary on account of slight architectural

changes, structural conditions, field conditions, space restrictions or to avoid the work of any other trades, it shall be

done without extra expense to the Owner. Provide all necessary equipment, fittings, L.B.’s, Junction Boxes,

Wireways, etc. which are required to overcome space restrictions, special construction, obstacles, height restrictions,

etc.

The work outlined on these drawings is subject to actual field conditions.

In the event that the drawings or specifications are revised to indicate changes in the work, either by sketch or written

form, this Contractor shall evaluate changes promptly. Before installation of any item or performance of any work

indicated by revisions this Contractor shall notify, in accordance with other sections of the specification, of any

addition or deduction to the Contract Price. Contractor shall not proceed with changes without proper authorization.

All changes to the Contract Price shall have the following information forwarded: Each different item of material

itemized as line items with unit costs including Quantities listed as Each, L.F. (lineal foot), CLF (hundred lineal feet)

or other accepted abbreviations, and cost extensions for both material and labor charges and the hourly rate of labor.

Lists which only indicate the items as “material” and “labor” without a breakdown of each item of material with

associated labor cost will not be acceptable. If the Electrical Contractor fails to provide the information in the

requested format and the electrical engineer is required to do a partial or full estimate (formal or informal) the

electrical contractor will be responsible for compensating the electrical engineer for all time spent estimating the

revisions to verify pricing at the engineers standard hourly rates.

1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS

Maintain accurate records of all deviations in work as actually installed from work indicated on the drawings. On

completion of the project, two (2) complete sets of marked-up prints shall be delivered to the Architect.

1.14 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES

Within 10 days after date of award of contract and before any materials, fixtures, devices or equipment are

purchased, submit in writing to the Architect, a complete list in triplicate, of specified materials, fixtures, devices and

equipment to be incorporated in the work. After one copy of this list is returned showing items approved or rejected,

submit within 15 days catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams, drawings and such other descriptive data as outlined in the

specifications.

Substitutions will not be accepted on Fire Alarm, Lighting, emergency lighting, sound system, hearing impaired

system, and other items of equipment which are designated as “shall be as manufactured by...”, or do not have the

designation “or equivalent”.

No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to time. Approval of materials shall be based on

manufacturer’s published ratings and data. Any materials, fixtures, devices and equipment listed that are not in

accordance with specified requirements may be rejected. Upon expiration of the above specified period (for

submitting or subsequent data submission) or any authorized extension thereof, the Contractor fails to submit the list

as specified above, the Engineer will select a complete line of materials, fixtures, devices and equipment and this

selection shall be final and binding and all items shall be furnished and installed without change in contract price or

time of completion.




If the Electrical Contractor submits a substitution all time spent will be billed to the Electrical Contractor at the

Engineers standard hourly rates, with no additional cost to the Owner or Project. All costs for all labor and

miscellaneous expenses arising from comparisons of substitute equipment, including any and all meetings requested

or required, will be billed to the Electrical Contractor, with no additional cost to the project or the Owner

With substitute equipment submission the Electrical Contractor shall provide a letter of agreement that the equipment

will be replaced at no additional cost if in the opinion of the Engineer the equipment is unsatisfactory in its

performance. Shop drawings will not be processed without this letter and will be returned with no action taken. The

Contractor assumes all repercussions of the project schedule in relation to this requirement.

It is the Contractors responsibility to meet the entire intent of the specifications. Deviations from the specified items

shall be at the risk of the Contractor until the date of final acceptance by the Engineer. Approved submittals on

substitute equipment shall only allow the Contractor to proceed with installing a substituted item and said item shall

not be considered equal until such time as the Engineer has completely accepted the substituted item. All cost for

removal, relocation or replacement of a substituted item shall be at the risk of and completely paid for, including

work required by other Divisions of the specifications, by the Electrical Contractor (this Contractor).

1.15 UTILITY COMPANY REBATES

ANY AND ALL UTILITY COMPANY REBATES FOR ALL ELIGIBLE ENERGY EFFICIENT LIGHTING,

BALLAST, LAMPS, OCCUPANCY SENSORS, LED EXIT SIGNS, ETC. SHALL BE PAID DIRECTLY TO

THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT RECEIVE THE REBATE OR DEDUCT THE AMOUNT

FROM HIS BID IN ANTICIPATION OF A REBATE.

1.16 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

Identify each item of equipment, including panelboards, switchboards and cabinets 12 inch square and larger,

disconnect switches and starters furnished by this division or any other division of the specification, Fire Alarm

Control Panel Zones and separate fire alarm system cabinets and junction boxes 6 inch square and larger, and other

equipment as designated on the drawings or elsewhere in this specification, including existing equipment where

called for. Identifications shall be by a permanently attached nameplate (secured with screws or rivets, with sharp

edges filed smooth) made of a black surface, white core, laminated bakelite with engraved letters. Fire Alarm

System nameplates shall be red with white core. Nameplates shall be minimum of 3” long by 1-1/2” wide and shall

bear the equipment name. All nameplates shall be secured with screws; adhesive back will not be accepted. ALL

NAMEPLATES SHALL BE SECURED WITH SCREWS OR RIVETS, WITH ALL SHARP EDGES FILED

SMOOTH, TO THE EQUIPMENT, ADHESIVE BACK NAMEPLATES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AND WILL

BE REPLACED AT THIS CONTRACTORS EXPENSE.

Provide typed directories under clear plastic, in directory card holders, in each panelboard, showing the utilization of

each circuit. When panelboards are odorless (Power panelboards) the Contractor shall provide screw mounted

lamacoid nameplates indicating the utilization of each circuit. The directory shall indicate the circuit breaker

number, equipment served and the area/location of the equipment. Area/location designations shall be as designated

on the Architectural drawing(s), (i.e. c.b. #1: lighting room 101, c.b. #6: receptacles room 101, 102). OR

Area/location designations shall be as designated by the Owners representative, (i.e. c.b. #1: lighting, Office #1

Room 10, c.b. #6: receptacles Lounge). Area designations shall be reviewed with the Owners representatives so all

areas are identified as understood by the personnel. This Contractor shall mark up a print with the Owners

room/area designations and use these designations in the panelboard schedule.

As part of the base bid the Contractor shall operate all existing branch circuit breakers in all existing panelboards to

identify the equipment and/or load served. All existing panelboards shall have an updated schedule installed in them

which shall indicate all the new work and additions to the panel and all existing loads on existing circuit breakers not

affected by the new work. Directory information shall be the same format as indicated in the previous paragraph.

Directory card holders shall be installed in existing panels if there is not one existing. Coordinate this work with the

Owners representative so as not to interfere with the operation of the facility.

Once the work has been completed the Contractor shall operate all circuit breakers in all panelboards, new and

existing, in the presence of the Owner and/or their designated personnel to show correctness of the new panelboard

schedules.




1.16 EXISTING CONDITIONS AND CONSTRUCTION SITE AND BUILDING CONDITIONS

Visit the project site, prior to bidding, and be thoroughly acquainted with the provisions of the contract documents

and all surrounding conditions with reference to the various phases of work to be performed. Failure to do so shall

not be justification for relief from responsibility of performing the work necessary for a complete and proper

installation.







Remove such existing accessories and equipment as directed in the work area, in areas to be demolished or

applicable to new work and required under the work. All salvaged-surplus material, which the Owner has requested

to keep, is to remain his property and shall be stored on the site, by this Contractor, where directed. All other

salvaged or surplus material shall become the property of this Contractor and shall be promptly removed from the

site.

Upon completion of each phase of the electrical installation, remove all surplus and salvaged material and debris,

clean, polish and leave in perfect condition all electrical components and equipment.

1.17 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING

Portions of the building will be occupied by the Owner through-out the construction. All work shall be performed in

such a manner that there shall be no interference with the operation of the existing facilities. All required shut downs

of the electric service or any other system, such as fire alarm, shall be scheduled with the Owner so as not to interfere

with the Owners operation of the facility. The Contractor shall perform these shutdowns when the building is not

occupied, unless otherwise instructed by the Owner, and shall complete the work prior to the building being

occupied the next day of normal operation. Also schedule all shutdowns with the Authorities having jurisdiction

(i.e.; Fire Dept., Utility Co., etc.) so proper precautions and procedures are followed (fire watch, etc.). See

Architectural specifications and drawings for additional information and sequence of work.

Deliveries shall be scheduled so as to avoid the storage of materials and equipment in the way of vehicular and

personnel traffic required for the proper operation of the existing facilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Materials provided under this section shall be new, be the best of their respective kinds and shall comply with the

specifications.

Samples and shop drawings of all material shall be submitted for approval as required by the Architect. See section

“SUBMITTALS” for additional INFORMATION.

1.01 WIRE AND CABLE

All wire and cable shall be copper and shall comply with the standards of and be listed by the Underwriters’

Laboratories, Inc. (UL), the ASTM and the I.P.C.E.A. as applicable. Wire and cable for interior lighting and power

systems shall be type THWN/THHN insulation for 600 volts. Wire and cable for EXTERIOR lighting and power

systems shall be type XHHW insulation for 600 volts All wire shall be marked on the jacket with the type of

insulation, gauge of wire and manufacturers name and designation.

WIRE SHALL BE SUPPLIED IN DIFFERENT COLORS FOR THE DIFFERENT PHASES IN ACCORDANCE

WITH THE LATEST PUBLISHED EDITION OF THE ELECTRIC CODE, ARTICLES 210-4(D), 210-5, AND

OTHER PERTINENT ARTICLES. CONDUCTORS #8 AND LARGER SHALL HAVE COLORED TAPE ON

EACH END OF THE CONDUCTORS AND IN EACH JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFYING THE PHASE IT IS

CONNECTED TO.




WHERE TERMINAL STRIPS ARE USED FOR VARIOUS SYSTEMS (ELECTRIC, FIRE ALARM, LOW

TENSION SYSTEMS, ETC.) BRADY TAGS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON EACH CONDUCTOR TO

IDENTIFY THE CORRESPONDING CONDUCTOR ON EACH SIDE OF THE TERMINAL STRIP (TO

INSURE PROPER RETERMINATION IF CONDUCTORS ARE REMOVED FROM THE TERMINAL STRIP

FOR ANY REASON).

120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire systems, Black, Red and Blue for the ungrounded conductors and white for neutral.

120/240 volt, 1 phase, 3 wire systems, Black and red for the ungrounded conductors and white for neutral.

Green shall be used for ground.

Isolated ground shall be green with a yellow stripe or other identifying stripe and a tag identifying it at each junction

box (provide Thomas Betts TY-RAP identification cable ties), panelboard and/or outlet box and at the main system

ground.

Conductors of different voltage systems, emergency wiring systems and other systems shall not be installed in the

same raceway, junction box, pull box, etc.

All wire and cable shall be as manufactured by Triangle Wire and Cable, P.W.C., Collyer Insulated Wire Company

or American Flexible Conduit Co. (AFC) or equivalent. All conductors No. 10 gauge or smaller shall be solid and

No. 8 gauge and larger shall be stranded unless otherwise noted. All joints and splices of No. 10 AWG or smaller

wire and cable shall be made with UL listed wire nuts or compression type connectors. All joints or splices for No. 8

AWG or larger shall be made with UL listed mechanical compression connectors - see section “WIRE AND CABLE

CONNECTORS”. After the conductors have been made mechanically and electrically secure, the entire joint or

splice shall be covered with two layers of UL listed rubber tape and two layers of UL listed PVC electrical tape to

provide a minimum insulation value of 600 volts.

Wiring for the Life Safety Systems Feeders, Elevator Feeder, Fire Pump Feeder, and others where required by the

Electric Code, Life Safety Code or other applicable codes and standards shall be type “MI” CABLE WITH A 2

HOUR FIRE RATING. It shall be installed in all areas required by the Electric Code and in accordance with the

Electric Code.

Wiring runs shall be concealed in finished areas of the building.

Wiring method for ALL EXPOSED vertical wiring runs and horizontal wiring runs in unfinished areas, wiring which

may be subject to physical damage and boiler wiring shall be E.M.T. or R.S.C. as applicable - see conduit section.

ALL FIRE ALARM WIRING SHALL BE IN E.M.T. OR R.S.C. CONDUIT - CABLE SHALL NOT BE USED –

PROVISIONS SHALL BE MADE BY THIS CONTRACTOR FOR INSTALLING CONDUIT CONCEALED

ABOVE ALL CEILINGS AND WITHIN ALL WALLS IN ALL FINISHED AREAS. Note that if the Authority

having Jurisdiction approves the use of type RED ARMOR “FPL/MC” cable, in writing, they may be used. Provide

letter from the Department to the Architect

Wiring which is located above ceilings in areas used for environmental air (air plenums) shall be type “MC” cable,

conduit and wire or other types of cable/wire complying with the requirements of the Electric Code for use in air

plenums.

Metal-clad sheathed cable, Type “MC”, with full size green ground wire may be used on interior branch circuits,

where run concealed (except in concrete or block walls), unless otherwise indicated - BX IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.

The outer jacket of type “MC” cable shall be listed for use as a supplemental ground path.

Support all cables types “MC” from the structure at regular intervals so there will be NO sagging of cables to

provide a neat mechanical appearance. The cable shall be installed so as NOT to lay on the ceiling or ceiling tiles,

ductwork, piping, etc. Supports shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 6 feet and within 12 inches of

outlet/junction box. Support of cable SHALL NOT BE from the suspended ceiling wire system. Cables shall be

installed in conformance with the Electric Code. All type “MC” cables shall be UL listed.

Branch circuit wiring in all common spaces and areas as required by the Electric Code shall be metal-clad sheathed

copper cable, Type MC, with green (full size) ground.




1.02 WIRE AND CABLE CONNECTORS

All joints and splices of No. 10 AWG or smaller wire and cable shall be made with UL listed wire nuts or

compression type connectors.

All joints and splices for Fire Alarm System Conductors, where allowed and/or required (equipment with pigtail

connections), shall be made on U.L. Listed approved terminal strips - see Fire Alarm section of the specifications.

All joints or splices for No. 8 AWG through # 4/0 AWG shall be made with UL listed mechanical compression

connectors. Connectors shall have a spacer to physically maintain a separation between the conductors but shall

maintain electrical continuity. Connectors shall be BURNDY type “KSA” tritap servit or equal. Provide shop

drawings.

Feeder and Branch circuit conductors 250 MCM AWG through 750 MCM AWG which require splicing provide

BURNDY “SPLICE BLOCK” CONNECTORS” or BURNDY “U-BLOCK CONNECTORS” as applicable. The

type of assembly used shall be for junction box or wireways as applicable. The assembly shall consist of a system of

an insulating platform and connectors as required for the wire sizes to be terminated. The Electrical Contractor may

install the system in either a wireway or junction box - order appropriate system and connectors. Provide quantity

and type of power distribution connectors as required for the number of conductors terminated - EACH

CONDUCTOR SHALL TERMINATE IN ITS OWN CONNECTOR - CONDUCTORS SHALL NOT BE

DOUBLED UP IN A SINGLE CONNECTOR.

After the conductors have been made mechanically and electrically secure, the entire joint or splice shall be covered

with two layers of UL listed rubber tape and two layers of UL Listed PVC electrical tape.

If the Electrical Contractor combines wiring runs in conduit without consulting the Engineer and installation of the

proper Gauge conductor to compensate for derating, the wiring run will be determined unusable and shall be

removed and all wiring properly installed at the expense of the Electrical Contractor. Multiple conductors in conduit

down to panelboards WILL NOT BE ALLOWED - WIREWAYS SHALL BE USED or multiple conduits with no

more than (4) four conductors shall be installed. Where flush mounted panelboards are installed all conduit and

cable runs shall be installed individually down to the panelboard - do not combine runs in larger conduits with more

than four conductors. Note: All conductor ampacity ratings shall be based on 60 degree rating for 100 amp Circuit

Breakers and Below and 75 degree for Circuit Breaker frames larger than 100 ampere.

1.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

Steel conduit (RSC or R.S.C.) shall be UL listed and shall be used in wet or damp locations, in concrete, outside,

through exterior walls or roofs, where conduit may be subject to physical damage and for feeders. The conduit shall

be rigid, standard weight, thick-walled, threaded, mild steel, hot-dipped galvanized with an interior coating, as

manufactured by Wheatland, Republic, Allied Tube and Conduit, or equivalent. Threaded fittings such as elbows,

bends, etc., shall be made of full weight material and treated with the same protective coating required for rigid

conduit. All thick-walled rigid steel conduits shall have double locknuts (one inside and one outside the box,

enclosure, etc.). All conduits 1.5 inch and larger shall have grounding bushings properly installed and terminated in

accordance with the Electric Code.

Conduit for interior systems, where required or called for, for boiler wiring, wiring runs where exposed in unfinished

areas not subject to physical damage, in dry locations and within block walls shall be UL listed and shall be thinwall

Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT or E.M.T.). EMT shall be mild steel, hot-dipped galvanized, with interior coating,

as manufactured by Wheatland, Republic, Allied Tube and Conduit, or equivalent. All EMT fittings shall be

standard steel setscrew concrete tight type. All connectors shall have insulated throats. Cast alloy fittings will not be

accepted and shall NOT be used. EMT SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN, UNDER OR THROUGH CONCRETE

SLABS. All conduits 1.5 inch and larger shall have grounding bushings properly installed and terminated in


Where PVC is called for on the exterior systems the Electrical Contractor shall install it with all required expansion

fittings and other required and necessary accessories per the manufacturer’s recommendations. All PVC conduit

shall be SCHEDULE 80 concrete encased where called for or required and shall be UL listed and approved for the

installation of electric conductors. Also a DETECTABLE marker tape with the legend “CAUTION BURIED




ELECTRIC BELOW” shall be installed above ALL PVC conduit runs at approx. 9 inches below grade. The

detectable underground tape shall have a solid aluminum foil core for identification and detection. PVC conduit

shall not be used where run exposed, through floors or concrete walls, EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFICALLY NOTED

OR CALLED FOR. All elbows, stubs through floors, penetration of concrete walls, through roofs, etc. shall be

Rigid Steel Conduit (R.S.C.). Provide PVC to RSC adapter at the elbows or fittings. PVC CONDUIT SHALL NOT

BE USED WITHIN THE BUILDING OR WHERE EXPOSED, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED ON THE

DRAWINGS. Where wiring runs are indicated to be underfloor, below concrete floor slab, Schedule 80 or 40

P.V.C. conduit may be used. ALL ELBOWS, STUBS THROUGH FLOORS, PENETRATION OF CONCRETE

WALLS, ETC. SHALL BE RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (R.S.C.). PVC conduit shall be as manufactured by Carlon

or equivalent.

Where PVC conduit is run exposed it shall be SCHEDULE 80 and shall be supported to provide adequate lineal

movement to allow for expansion and contraction of conduit due to temperature changes. Expansion joints shall be

installed in all runs, the number and spacing of expansion joints shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Provide

adequate number of support clips, angles, brackets, etc. to prevent distortion of the PVC conduit (bending, warping,

drooping, ETC.). The Contractor shall replace at his expense any PVC which distorts within a one year period of

time from date of final acceptance of the project by the Engineer. All PVC shall be installed in accordance with the

Electric Code and manufacturers recommendations. PVC conduit shall be as manufactured by Carlon or equivalent.

Flexible metal conduit is a raceway of circular cross section and shall be constructed of continuous interlocking

bands of zinc coated steel and shall be complete with fittings, couplings and connectors and be UL listed and

approved for the installation of electric conductors. When used an additional green bond wire shall be used to bond

each end of the conduit to provide continuity. Flexible metal conduit may only be used for connection of lighting

fixtures or similar use. It shall not be used for connection to motors or equipment that vibrates - Liquidtite Flexible

metal conduit shall be used for that purpose. Flexible conduit shall not exceed six (6) feet in length in any given

branch circuit wiring run. Provide grounding/bonding connectors at each termination point of the flexible conduit.

Liquidtight flexible metal conduit is a raceway of circular cross section and shall be constructed having an outer

liquidtight, nonmetallic, sunlight-resistant jacket over the inner flexible metal core, with associated couplings,

connectors and fittings, and be UL listed and approved for the installation of electric conductors. When used an

additional green bond wire shall be used to bond each end of the conduit to provide continuity. Liquidtight flexible

metal conduit shall be used for connections to motors, HVAC equipment, HV equipment, exterior equipment which

requires flexible connection, equipment which vibrates and other connections which require a flexible, watertight

connection, in Boiler and Mechanical Rooms and as required by the Electric Code. Liquidtight Flexible conduit

shall not exceed six (6) feet in length in any given branch circuit wiring run. Provide grounding/bonding connectors

at each termination point of the flexible conduit.

All fittings for conduits shall be steel. Where type “MC” cable is used the fittings shall be steel and be the proper

type for the box and be Listed for use with type “MC” cable.

1.04 OUTLET BOXES

All outlet boxes for all wiring methods shall be UL listed and shall be galvanized 4” square with proper raised

covers, unless otherwise required for the device or equipment to be mounted on or in the box. Where the boxes are

cut into existing walls for flush mounting and type “MC” cable is used 2” x 4” or gang boxes may be used, unless

otherwise noted, called for or required. WHERE BOXES ARE CUT INTO EXISTING WALLS THEY SHALL BE

PROPERLY SECURED SO THERE IS NO MOVEMENT WHEN THE DEVICE IS OPERATED OF A PLUG

INSERTED. All wall outlet boxes shall be set in wall to match finish line of walls. Wall outlets for wall mounted

lighting fixtures (wall sconces, etc.) shall be 3-1/2” or 4” octagon with stud and plaster ring unless otherwise

required by the fixture to be installed - Contractor shall verify the type, size and style of box required for wall

mounted fixtures prior to installation. Outlet boxes shall be UL listed for their use.

Ceiling outlets shall be 4 inch octagon boxes, or 3-1/2 inch if required, with stud and plaster ring unless otherwise

required. Ceiling fan outlets shall be type specifically manufactured and rated for use with ceiling fans. Ceiling

outlet boxes shall be installed so they do not protrude below the ceiling surface. Contractor shall verify the type, size

and style of the ceiling outlet box required with the type of equipment to be mounted and connected (fire alarm

detector, lighting fixture, etc.). Outlet boxes shall be UL listed for their use.




At outlets of all descriptions, for all systems, there shall be provided a suitable fitting, which shall be either a box or

device, especially designed to receive the type of fittings to be mounted thereon

Outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter receptacles and surge suppresser receptacles shall be a minimum 2-1/2

inches in depth or deeper and be 4 inch square with raised cover.

All outlets on exposed work subject to the weather or in damp or wet locations shall be threaded cast device “FS” or

“FD” outlet boxes of proper type and shall be flush mounted in new walls and other areas where possible.

“FS”/”FD” boxes shall be as manufactured by Crouse Hinds, Killark, Appleton, or equivalent.

Tile type raised covers, depth as required, shall be used in all walls where masonry, dry wall or wood paneling will

remain as finished surface. All boxes shall be as manufactured by RACO, Steel City, Appleton, or equivalent.

In unfinished areas where outlet boxes are exposed, 4” square boxes with rounded edges and with exposed work

raised covers shall be used. This shall apply to all Fire Alarm devices, controls, and all other types of equipment to

be mounted on outlet boxes. Panelboard covers shall not overhang the backbox installed on.

Outlet boxes shall be increased where necessary to provide conductor space for number of conductors and devices

installed in conformance with the code and/or conduits 1 inch and larger. Any and all boxes with open knockouts

shall have knockout seals installed in conformance with the Electric Code.

1.05 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

Junction or pull boxes shall be UL listed and shall be galvanized, code gauge steel and minimum size as required by

the Electric Code. Junction or pull boxes larger than 4 inch square shall be furnished without knockouts with holes

being field cut as required. Covers shall be secured with bronze button head screws. This Contractor is responsible

for proper sizing of all junction and pull boxes in accordance with the number of conduits, conductors, etc. to meet

the requirements of the National Electric Code. Any and all boxes with open knockouts shall have knockout seals

installed in conformance with the Electric Code.

1.06 WIREWAY TROUGHS

Wireway troughs shall be UL listed and shall be constructed of code gauge sheet metal with hinged covers and be

approved for housing and protecting electric wires and cables. Where wireway is installed with the cover in other

than the upright (top of wireway) position wire clips shall be installed to secure and prevent conductors from hanging

out of wireway when the cover is opened or removed. Couplings, elbows, end plates, mounting supports and

accessories shall be provided where required. Wireway size shall be based on the quantity and size of conductors

installed and shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code.

Where the number of conductors exceeds that allowed by the National Electric Code (30 conductors maximum

inclusive of neutral conductors) additional wireways shall be installed. In no case shall there be more than a 20

percent fill in any wireway. For purposes of conductor quantities the NEUTRAL conductor is considered current

carrying and shall be included in the quantity count. The Ground wire(s) are NOT current carrying and shall not be

included in the quantity count.

1.07 SAFETY SWITCHES

Where called for on the drawings and elsewhere as required by the Electric Code, safety switches shall be UL listed

and shall be heavy duty type, 240 Volt or 600 Volt with number of poles necessary for the intended use, fusible or

non-fusible as required for the equipment served or for the intended use, weatherproof where installed exterior to the

building, ampacity and/or horsepower rated as required and/or as indicated on the drawings. All safety switches

shall have provisions to lock the handle in the “OFF” position.

All safety switches used on systems with neutral conductors shall have an insulated solid neutral block installed

within the enclosure for connection of neutral conductors. A ground lug, bonded to the enclosure, shall be provided

in all safety switch enclosures for connection of ground conductors. Safety switches shall be rated as “suitable for

use as service entrance equipment” when used for this application.

Safety switches shall be as manufactured by Siemens or Square “D”.




Enclosures shall be NEMA type 1 where installed indoors, NEMA type 3R or 4 (watertight) where installed exterior

or in unheated spaces, unless otherwise required due to the location of the safety switch. When used in an

environment that is in a constantly humid state all safety switches shall be either stainless steel or fiberglass

enclosure type. Where the environment is of a corrosive nature, or requires special considerations, the proper

NEMA style safety switch shall be used in accordance with the hazard or corrosive nature of the space. This

Contractor is responsible for verifying the type of space and hazard and providing the proper style safety switch.

This Contractor shall furnish to the Owner three (3) spare fuses for EACH type of fuse used and/or called for, and a

spare fuse cabinet of sufficient size to store ALL spare fuses supplied.

1.08 INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS

All individual circuit breakers shall be UL listed and shall be size as noted on the drawings or required with number

of poles necessary for the intended use Circuit breakers shall be 250 volt or 600 volt rated in accordance with the

electrical system voltage.

NO MORE THAN ONE CONDUCTOR PER PHASE SHALL BE PLACED ON ANY LUG OF CIRCUIT

BREAKERS FROM 10 AMPERE TO 400 AMPERE UNLESS CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE FACTORY

EQUIPPED WITH DOUBLE LUGS PER PHASE. THIS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING

THE LUG CONFIGURATION WITH THE WIRE SIZE SPECIFIED AND ORDERING THE CIRCUIT

BREAKER APPROPRIATELY.

Enclosures shall be NEMA type 1 where installed indoors, NEMA type 3R or 4 (watertight) where installed exterior

or in unheated and/or humid spaces, unless otherwise required due to the location of the circuit breaker. Enclosures

shall have provisions to PADLOCK the Circuit Breaker in either the “ON” or “OFF” position. This provision shall

be a standard option of the manufacturer and shall be purchased with the Circuit Breaker.

All individual circuit breakers shall have provisions for locking the circuit breaker in the “OFF” position. All circuit

breakers used on systems with neutral conductors shall have an insulated solid neutral block installed within the

enclosure for connection of the neutral conductors. A ground lug, bonded to the enclosure, shall be provided in all

circuit breaker enclosures for connection of ground conductors. Circuit breakers shall be U.L. listed and rated as

“suitable for use as service entrance equipment” when used for this application. Circuit breakers shall be as

manufactured by Siemens or Square “D”.

1.09 RECEPTACLES AND MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

Receptacles and miscellaneous devices shall be as specified in the symbol list on the drawings and shall be UL listed.

ALL RECEPTACLES SHALL BE HARD USE OR EXTRA HARD USE SPECIFICATION GRADE,

COMMERCIAL GRADE AND RESIDENTIAL GRADE WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AND WILL BE

REMOVED AND REPLACED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AT THEIR EXPENSE IF INSTALLED.

They shall be of the type, rating and number of poles indicated and required for the anticipated purpose. They shall

be as manufactured by Leviton, Hubbell or Pass and Seymour (P & S).

Receptacles shall be installed with the grounding connection up above the hot and neutral connections.

Receptacles shall be installed securely in the outlet box, so there will be no movement of the device. If the device

moves, when pressed on, the Contractor shall correct the problem. Where required, provide shims (such as “B-Line

“Retainer Leveler”) between the device and the outlet box to hold the device firmly in place flush with wall surface.

The plate shall not be used as the means of holding the device in place.

All colors of receptacles and miscellaneous devices shall be as selected by the Architect. Catalog numbers represent

the type and style of the device specified for installation and does not represent the color choice. If the color

installed by this Contractor is not acceptable to the Architect they shall be replaced at no additional cost to the

Owner, at the Contractors expense. Colors selected shall be of the standard colors of GRAY, IVORY, WHITE,

BROWN. Colors shall vary in accordance with the room or space finish. The Architect reserves the option of

choosing multiple colors for use in the various spaces in accordance with the various color schemes used within the

structure.




1.10 WIRING DEVICE PLATES

Device plates shall be UL listed and shall be unbreakable type, Leviton “80700” or “80400-N” (decorator style)

unbreakable nylon series, Pass and Seymour (P & S) “SRP” unbreakable nylon series or Hubbell “P” unbreakable

nylon series, or stainless steel type 302. Stainless Steel type 302 shall be used in areas where plates may be subject

to damage such as equipment storage rooms, mechanical rooms, warehouse spaces, etc. Special plates and plates

requiring engraving shall be stainless steel type 302. Plates shall be as manufactured by Leviton, Pass and Seymour

(P & S) or Hubbell.

When prints are being submitted the initial submittal shall consist of 3 sets of prints and 1 sepia. The sepia will be

marked up and returned for corrections and/or record prints, to the Vendor. There shall be a second submittal which

shall consist of prints in the quantity specified under SUBMITTALS and the additional quantities required for

distribution as indicated in previous paragraphs, for record purposes. This does not negate the responsibility of prior

submission to the Fire Alarm Authority having jurisdiction.

PART 3 EXECUTION

The electrical systems and equipment layouts are generally diagrammatic, exact and final locations shall be

determined and coordinated in the field by this Contractor. In most cases equipment circuitry is indicated by

panelboard designation and circuit number. It is this Contractors responsibility to wire the system in accordance

with the National Electric Code. No more than (4) Four conductors shall be installed in any raceway or cable

assembly - see other portions of the specifications. The routing of wiring, in some cases is schematically indicated,

but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty or obstacle that will be

encountered during the installation of the work. If the alignment of conduit/wiring has to be varied from that shown

on the drawings, where necessary on account of slight architectural changes, structural conditions, field conditions,

space restrictions or to avoid the work of any other trades, it shall be done without extra expense to the Owner.

Provide all necessary equipment, fittings, LB’s, Junction Boxes, Wireways, etc. which are required to overcome

space restrictions, special construction, obstacles, height restrictions, low ceilings, high ceilings requiring staging,

etc. All exposed conduit shall be secured tight to the ceiling and/or wall surfaces and shall be run at right angles to

and parallel with the directions of the walls - diagonal runs will not be accepted and will be replaced at the Electrical

Contractors expense. It is the Electrical Contractors responsibility to verify routing of all wiring runs and install

same so as not to interfere with the structure or the work of other trades.







3.01 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

All conduit called for to be installed underground shall be installed a minimum of (36”) thirty six inches below

finished grade. All Electric Primary Service conduits shall be installed in accordance with Utility Company

requirements (including concrete encasement). All other Utility Underground conduits shall be installed in

accordance with the Utilities(y) standards (Telephone, Cable TV, Fire Alarm, etc.) unless the drawings are more

stringent - then the conduit system shall be installed in accordance with the drawings. Concrete encasement shall be

provided for all underground conduits that are installed under roadways, parking lots or other areas where there is

vehicular traffic. Schedule 80 thick-walled PVC shall be used unless otherwise specified or required by the different

Utility services - Schedule 40 PVC is not acceptable unless concrete encased. All elbows through floors and/or pads

or penetrations through walls shall be Thick-walled Rigid Threaded Steel Conduit (RSC). Provide concrete

encasement where required by the Utility Companies, by the Electric Code and where called for on the drawings or

elsewhere in the specifications.

A marker tape with the legend “CAUTION ELECTRIC LINES BURIED BELOW” shall be installed above ALL

underground metal or PVC conduit runs and low voltage direct burial cable




3.02 FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS

As part of this contract this Contractor shall operate each circuit breaker in each existing panelboard to identify the

load/equipment served (lighting, receptacles, etc.). Provide new typed directories in the panelboards showing the

utilization of each circuit and new stick on numbers on each circuit breaker. Directory shall contain information as

outlined in the “equipment identification” section of this specification. The Contractor shall mark up a print with the

Owners room/area designations and use these designations in the panelboard schedule.

All necessary fittings, LB’s, condulets, junction and pull boxes shall be installed in runs to facilitate wire pulling and

conduit installation and shall be in accordance with the Electric Code. These boxes and fittings shall be provided

whether or not shown.

All conduits and fittings on exposed work shall be secured by means of metal clips, held in place by means of

Polyset Solid Masonry type anchors (for use on CMU, concrete or other masonry or solid type construction) and

machine screws. When installed over concrete surfaces, the screws shall be held in place by means of Polyset Solid

Masonry type anchors or other acceptable means - the installation shall not depend on the screw alone. PLASTIC

ANCHORS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE AND SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED AT THE

CONTRACTORS EXPENSE IF INSTALLED.

All conduit on exposed work shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding walls and shall conform

to the shape of the ceiling. Conduit shall be secured tight to the wall and/or ceiling surfaces and shall not hang down

from these surfaces. No diagonal runs shall be permitted. Bends and offsets shall be avoided as far as possible.

Where bends cannot be avoided, condulet fittings shall be used. Conduit in all cases shall be run straight and true,

satisfactory to the Architect. Where conduits must pass through structural members, permission shall be first

obtained from the Architect and then a provision will be made by the General Contractor. All thick-walled rigid

steel conduits shall have double locknuts (one inside and one outside the box, enclosure, etc.). All conduits (Rigid

Steel and/or E.M.T.) 1.5 inch and larger shall have grounding bushings properly installed and terminated in


All type “MC” cable shall be properly secured in accordance with the Code, utilizing U.L. Approved cable staples

specifically made for the type of cables installed. These cables may only be used in areas designated in other parts of

this specification. Support cable from the structure at regular intervals so there will be NO sagging of cables to

provide a neat mechanical appearance. The cable shall be installed so as NOT to lay on the ceiling or ceiling tiles,

ductwork, piping, etc.

All cable types “MC” shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 6 feet and within 12 inches of the outlet/junction

box which the cable is terminated at. All terminations shall be made utilizing U.L. Approved connectors made

specifically for the type of cables installed.

Raceways shall be installed and terminated to exclude dirt, plaster, moisture and foreign material from entering,

while the project is in the process of construction. All thick-walled rigid steel conduits shall have double locknuts

(one inside and one outside the box, enclosure, etc.). All conduits (Rigid Steel and/or E.M.T.) 1.5 inch and larger

shall have grounding bushings properly installed and terminated in accordance with the Electric Code.

All raceways shall be complete in every respect before electrical conductors and/or cables are installed. No splices

or joints will be permitted in either feeders or branches except at outlets or at accessible junction boxes.

Provide expansion fittings in all conduits passing through all building expansion joints and in other areas in

accordance with manufacturers recommendations for the type of conduit used and the length of the conduit run.

Provide sleeves for the installation of wiring runs (raceways, cables, etc.) through Fire Rated and bearing walls, all

ceilings, all floors, etc. Seal openings between wiring run and inside surface of sleeve and around sleeve with a U.L.

listed (3) three hour rated fire proofing material approved for this purpose. Install fireproofing material as instructed

by the manufacturer and to meet the requirements of the fire rating required at the penetration. Fireproofing material

shall be type acceptable to the Architect - It is the Electrical Contractors responsibility to meet the required fire

rating regardless of acceptance of material by the Architect.

Wiring runs shall be installed concealed in all finished portions of the building even if runs have to be relocated.

Relocation of wiring runs shall be reviewed with the Architect.




At all surface mounted panelboards branch circuits shall be brought to wireways which shall be installed from the top

of the panelboard to above the accessible hung ceiling or near the structural ceiling where there is no hung ceiling.

Where panelboards contain 24 poles or less provide 2 - 2-1/2 inch wireways, panelboards with more than 24 poles

shall have 3 - 2-1/2 inch wireways installed. Cable outer coverings shall be terminated at the wireway; conductors

shall be brought down the wireway into the panelboard unspliced. Provide a nipple connection from the wireways

into the panelboard consisting of a maximum 3 inch long nipple, maximum diameter possible (the panelboard

backbox does not have to be cut for the wireway entrance). Provide proper connectors for termination of cables to

the wireway. All wireways shall have hinged covers. Where larger conductors (other than #12 or #10) are to be

installed the Electrical Contractor shall not exceed the 30 conductor or 20% fill limit of the wireway. FEEDERS TO

OTHER PANELBOARDS AND/OR LARGER THAN #8 GAUGE WIRE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN

SEPARATE CONDUITS AND SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN THESE WIREWAYS.

All branch circuit conductors shall be #12 AWG size, SOLID copper, except as otherwise indicated on the drawings

or required. All No. 12 AWG conductors shall be increased to #10 AWG if the length to center of load is more than

100 feet. All color codes for conductors shall comply with Articles 200 and 210 of the Latest Published Edition of

the National Electric Code and shall be identified at the panelboard as indicated in Article 210-4(d) where there is

more than one voltage in the building, see section “WIRE AND CABLE”. Conductors of the different voltage

systems shall NOT be installed in the same raceways, junction boxes, pull boxes, wireways, etc. Wire insulation to

be type THHN/THWN where used for the interior systems and type XHHW where used for the exterior systems.

Outlets shall be located approximately where indicated on the drawings and shall be properly centered where located

in paneled work or other special interior finish. The Architect reserves the right to relocate outlets, using the same

amount of material, before actual construction begins, without expense to the Owner. See general notes for

additional requirements.

Verify all dimensions, electrical characteristics, location and method of connection to all types of equipment,

devices, appliances and accessories prior to installing any runs - see other portions of the specifications for

Contractor responsibilities. When indicated, verify the number of wires indicated on the various systems wiring runs

and report any discrepancies to the Engineer. For circuitry indicated by circuit number only the Contractor is

responsible for layout with the proper number of conductors in accordance with the Electric Code and these

specifications. For appliances and equipment furnished under other divisions of work verify the type and

characteristics of the wiring runs. Responsibility to see that all systems and equipment function correctly and as

intended is included in this division of the contract documents.

For equipment furnished with a cord and plug provide a matching receptacle. Equipment with direct connection

provide final connection. Wiring connections to equipment shall include connection to all the associated

accessories. The Electrical Contractor is responsible to verify the type of final connection and the equipment and

accessories required for the connections. Provide flexible conduit or liquid tight flexible conduit where required.

Provide disconnects where required by the Electric Code and/or where called for.

3.03 GROUNDING

Bond all raceways, outlets and all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical equipment in

accordance with the Electric Code. Each system shall be properly grounded by means of separate grounding

conductors installed with branch circuit wiring and feeders and by means of bonding jumpers sized in accordance

with the Electric Code. All conduits, nipples, locknuts, bushings and EMT fittings shall be tightly made up to form a

continuous bond throughout. All thick-walled rigid steel conduits shall have double locknuts (one inside and one

outside the box, enclosure, etc.). All conduits (Rigid Steel and/or E.M.T.) 1.5 inch and larger shall have grounding

bushings properly installed and terminated in accordance with the Electric Code.

Where type “MC” cable is used the armor shall be type approved as a supplemental ground path. IN NO CASE

SHALL A CABLE ASSEMBLY WHICH DOES NOT HAVE THE UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.

(UL) LISTING FOR THE OUTER JACKET MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS FOR A SUPPLEMENTAL

GROUND PATH BE USED. IN ADDITION TO THE OUTER JACKET THERE SHALL BE A FULL SIZE

GROUND WIRE AS PART OF THE CABLE ASSEMBLY.

Provide conduit(s) with bare copper stranded wire(s) from the main service(s) to the street side of the water meter

and sprinkler service and to a grounding grid of driven ground rods as required by Section 250-81 of the Electric




Code. In the event that the exterior water pipe is non metallic or determined as not suitable for grounding purposes a

20 foot or longer grounding electrode encased in the building concrete foundation shall be installed in accordance

with the Electric Code Article 250-81(c). Provide sleeve for mechanical protection where this electrode penetrates

the foundation. The metal frame of the building shall be grounded in accordance with the Electric Code

Provide grounding of the Fire Alarm System as described in the Fire Alarm section of this specification.

Ground shall be tested to verify that the resistance is not more than called for by the Electric Code. If resistance is

higher, additional ground rods shall be added as necessary.

3.04 HEATING, VENTILATING AND MISCELLANEOUS POWER

Motors, in general, unless otherwise specified, will be supplied by other sections of the specification with the various

items of equipment requiring same. Connect the motors to the source of supply. Motors furnished under this section

of the specification shall be energy efficient type conforming to the energy conservation section of the State Building

Code. Motors furnished under other sections of the specification shall be checked and if found to be non-energy

efficient shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Engineers.

All motors shall be checked to verify they have been supplied in the voltage and phase indicated on the electrical

drawings. Multi tap motors (200/240/480) shall be checked to verify the tap is the correct current characteristics for

the building voltage - change tap if necessary to match building voltage and phase, change overload heaters in the

starters as required. If other motors are found to be different than what is described on the drawings, the Architect

and Engineer shall be notified immediately to determine if the motor, circuit breaker(s), safety switch (es),

disconnect switch (es) or any other equipment/controls are to be changed. If this Contractor does not notify the

Architect it shall be the Contractors responsibility to provide all necessary changes to panelboard circuit breaker(s),

controls, safety switch (es), etc. If provided in the wrong voltage for the building the contractor supplying the motor

is to be notified by this contractor so the equipment/motor can be replaced with the correct voltage and

characteristics for the building system.

All motor starters, push buttons, pilot lights and other miscellaneous controls for all motors and equipment shall be

furnished under other sections of the specification and installed and connected under this section, unless otherwise

noted. All safety switches, disconnects, thermal switches and toggle switches shall be furnished and installed under

this section. All motors shall be connected from outlets through Liquidtite flexible metal conduit. In damp or wet

locations, flexible metal conduit to be liquid tight. All starters and similar controls shall be installed in an accessible

location, verify exact location with the Architect and Engineer.

All thermal elements for motor protection shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor and shall be correct type for

protecting each type of motor.

Wire multiple runs of electric baseboard on the same thermostat by connecting to the LINE side of the internal limit

switch. Note: wiring from the load side of a limit switch to the next limit switch will cause improper operation of

the baseboard and reduced heat output.

Provide temperature control and power wiring called for on the electrical drawings. All other control and power

wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required, shall be provided under other sections of the

specifications.

3.05 SUBMITTALS

After first checking for compliance and making all necessary notations and corrections, submit for approval ten (10)

sets (unless other quantity of data is required by the Architectural Specifications) of shop drawings, product data,

wiring diagrams (where applicable) on all component parts of the following equipment and systems:

A. Service equipment.

B. Safety Switches

C. Motor disconnect switches and enclosures.

D. Wire connectors.

E. Fuses with type and rating indicated and spare fuse cabinet.




F. Individual circuit breakers.

G. Timeclocks, photocells, relays and accessories.







COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 26 08 00-1

SECTION 26 08 00

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section presents specific commissioning requirements for the Captain Isaac Paine Elementary

School Mechanical System Renovations project to be met in addition to other commissioning

requirements, including but not limited to Section 01 91 13 “General Commissioning

Requirements.”


A. Section 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements

B. Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. See Section 01 91 13 for abbreviations and definitions.

1.4 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Meet all the requirements of Section 01 91 13 “General Commissioning Requirements.”

B. Provide factory start-up and required technical personnel for participation in Owner’s

Commissioning.

C. Construction and Acceptance Phase

1. Provide submittal data, commissioning documentation, O&M data and training related to

Commissioning, including information from equipment suppliers.

2. Attend meetings necessary to facilitate the Commissioning process (refer to Section 01 91 13

and PART 3 of this specification for more information on meetings).

3. Review the commissioning Issues Log for items related to contracted work and assist the

commissioning team in addressing and resolving these issues.

4. Complete commissioning checklists provided by Stephen Turner Inc. and return completed

checklists to the Construction Manager. Startup checklists may require specific input from the

Equipment Supplier such as a copy of the Manufacturer’s Startup Checklist.

5. Address any available Owner and Design Professional punch list items before final

commissioning testing. Discrepancies and problems shall be remedied before commissioning

testing of the respective systems.

6. Execute commissioning tests, which will be developed and led by Stephen Turner Inc. Testing

will start at the components level, will proceed to the system level, and will end with inter-

system testing.




7. Correct issues (differences between required and observed performance) as interpreted by

Stephen Turner Inc., the Owner, and the Design Professional and retest the equipment.

8. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff, as required in PART 3 of this specification and

elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

9. Assist and cooperate with Stephen Turner Inc. Provide skilled technicians familiar with this

building to assist with commissioning testing.

D. Warranty Period

1. Execute seasonal or deferred commissioning testing, as applicable, witnessed by Stephen

Turner Inc. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-

built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.


A. For the following systems and components, Stephen Turner Inc. will develop pre-functional

checklists (PFCs) that are completed by the Trade Contractors (TC) and Functional Performance

Tests (FPTs) that are executed by the Trades with Stephen Turner Inc., as indicated.

Building Systems to be Commissioned Pre-Functional

Checklists Functional

Performance Testing

Electrical Systems

Connections to Equipment Listed in Section 019113

Yes Support

B. The work provided under this Division that is listed above is included in the scope of the

Commissioning activities to meet the Owner’s goals.

C. In addition to component and systems level commissioning of the work listed, participation in inter-

system testing and integrated commissioning of interrelated work is required. For list of all

commissioned work see Section 01 91 13 “General Commissioning Requirements.”

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 SEE COMMISSIONING SECTION 01 91 13

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM PARTICIPATION

A. Each trade including all Sub-contractors, Tier Contractors, manufacturers’ start-up personnel, as well

as direct Equipment Suppliers shall designate personnel to be responsible for coordinating

commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority as required in Section 01 91 13

“General Commissioning Requirements.”

3.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Execution requirements for the following are in Section 01 91 13 “General Commissioning

Requirements” with additional specific requirements for this Division stated below:






1. Attendance of regularly scheduled commissioning meetings is required by at least one (1)

representative from the Contractor(s) for the systems being commissioned during delivery,

installation, and start-up, and when checklists and tests are being performed.

2. As specific issues arise, a representative from each direct equipment supplier, and each

supplier of other equipment not adequately represented by technical personnel from the

responsible Contractor will be required to attend the meeting to assist in resolutions.

3.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Electrical coordination drawing submittals shall include complete electrical metering plans and

interface to the non-electrical meters that are integrated with the system.



3.6 O&M MANUALS




1. For all commissioned systems and equipment, one copy of the equipment manufacturer’s or

Contractor’s start-up report shall be provided to Stephen Turner Inc. for review and to

document that the equipment is installed, operational, and ready for commissioning testing.

2. For all third party testing required elsewhere in this specification or by code, provide test

reports to Stephen Turner Inc. for review and to document that the testing has been performed.

Coordinate dates for third party testing in advance with Stephen Turner Inc. to allow

commissioning personnel to witness selected tests.

3.8 COMMISSIONING TESTING








contractor in resolving commissioning issues.

3.11 TRAINING
